BIOLOGY CONN LIBRARY G BIOLOGY AN INTRODUCTORY STUDY FOR USE IN COLLEGES BY HERBERT W. CONN, PH.D. I ' PROFESSOR OF BIOLOGY IN WESLEYAN UNIVERSITY SILVER, BURDETT AND COMPANY BOSTON NEW YORK CHICAGO BIOtOfiY COPYRIGHT, 1912, BY SILVER, BURDETT AND COMPANY PREFACE THIS work is intended to serve as an introduction to the study of botany and zoology. It has been for some time recog- nized that there is a series of laws and principles which relate both to animal and plant life, and another series of important facts which refer to the relations of animals and plants to each other. In helping to a comprehension of nature, these interrelations are really of more significance than the detailed study of certain animals and plants. But with the tendency shown frequently in our educational system, to divide biology into zoology and botany, there is danger that these fundamental truths and interrelations be neglected, since a consideration of them belongs strictly neither to zoology nor to botany. To students of the age of those in secondary schools, the study of such concrete facts as the description of animals and plants is most attractive; and for them, courses in elementary botany and zoology are eminently appropriate. But to students of the greater maturity of college grade, the study of the funda- mental biological laws is more stimulating and better calculated to develop the thinking powers. It is, therefore, the author's belief that the proper way for older students to begin the study of the great department of biology is to consider the fundamental principles relating to both animals and plants, before either of these groups is studied in detail. After the student turns his attention more particularly to zoology or botany, he is likely to be engrossed in the details of the life and structure of animals and plants, and so almost inevi- tably neglects the broader fundamental laws which should correlate the phenomena of life as one science. Unless, there- fore, the foundation principles of biology be studied as an introductory course, it is very probable that they will be neglected. For this reason, this text has been provided as iii 544529 ir PREFACE an introductory survey of the laws which apply to both ani- mals and plants, and those principles which coordinate and correlate them. It is hoped that it may have some influence in developing the study of the fundamental principles of biology as an introductory course, thus supplanting the old custom of plunging the student at the outset more specifically into zoology or botany. It is designed that this work shall be an elementary study of biology, on a par with, and parallel to, elementary physics and chemistry. Logically it should follow, rather than pre- cede, these two sciences, although it may be taken simultane- ously with them. Its place in a curriculum should, therefore, be about the same as that of elementary physics and chemistry; and as developed in the following pages, it belongs to the be- ginning of college work. In preparing these pages, it has been recognized fully that a certain amount of laboratory work is necessary in order that the student may properly understand biological phenomena. It is also appreciated that, with the present development of the teaching of biology and the present equipment of many of our institutions, it is frequently impossible to introduce any extended laboratory work, on account both of insufficient equip- ment and lack of time in the already crowded courses of study. For this reason, the chapters have been arranged so that, where necessary, they can be used without the accompanying labora- tory demonstrations. Although this is an undesirable method of studying biology, the author believes that the biological principles covered in the following pages may be comprehended in a fairly satisfactory manner, even though the student does not have the opportunity of making the laboratory tests. It is hardly necessary to state, however, that as much practical laboratory work as possible should accompany the study of the text. For this reason, outlines of the correlative laboratory work have been added at the end of the chapters. In all cases where laboratory work is possible, students should be required PREFACE 7 to make careful drawings of the objects studied. Wherever time permits, the laboratory work outlined here should be expanded by instructors. (For more detailed laboratory di- rections than can be given here, reference should be made to the many excellent handbooks of zoological and botanical lab- oratory work, a few of which are mentioned in the brief bibli- ographies at the close of the chapters.) In place of the ordinary index there will be found at the close of the book a glossary-index. In it are given brief defi- nitions of all the technical words used in the book, with deri- vations and with page references. To make this more valuable as a reference glossary, some common biological words which do not chance to be used in the text are defined. These are easily recognized from the fact that they have no page numbers. H. W. CONN. CONTENTS APTER PAGE I. THE SCOPE OF BIOLOGY . . . . . 1 The New Biology and the Old. The Funda- mental Properties of Living Things. Chemical Composition of giving Tissues. Origin of Life. The Biological Sciences: Morphology. Physiology. Zoology and Botany. II. CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY . . , . 26 Organisms. The Cell as the Unit of Organic Structure. Cell Structure. Cell Substance or Protoplasm. The Nucleus. The Centrosome. The Cell Wall. Cell Functions. History of the Cell Doctrine: 1. The Early Conception of the Cell (1839-1861). 2. Protoplasm and the Mechanical Theory (1861-1885). 3. The Nucleus and its Significance (1880 to the present). What is Meant by Protoplasm. III. UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 52 Animals: AmcebcL Paramedwn. Plasmo- dium Malarice. Chilomonas. Pandorina. In- termediate Organisms: Peranema. Euglena. Plants: Pleurococcus. Saccharomyces — Yeast. • Bacteria. IV. CELL MULTIPLICATION AND THE CELLULAR STRUCTURE OF ORGANISMS .... 85 Cell Division or Karyokinesis. Unicellular and Multicellular Organisms. Penitillium, a Simple Multicellular Plant. Other Species of Molds. vii viii CONTENTS CHAPTER PAGE V. THE CASTOR BEAN, A COMPLEX MULTICELLU- LAR PLANT . . .103 The Castor Bean (Ricinus Communis). Gross Structure. Structure of the Stem. Structure of the Root. Structure of the Leaf. Repro- ductive Organs. VI. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF A TYPICAL PLANT . .126 Photosynthesis or Starch Manufacture. Me- tastasis. Photosynthesis and Metastasis Con- trasted. Miscellaneous Functions of Plant Life. A VII. MULTICELLULAR ANIMALS! HYDRA FuSCA . . 138 General Life Functions of Animals. Animal Biology. Hydra Fusca, a Simple Multicellu- lar Animal. The Relation of the Whole Or- ganism to its Different Parts. VIII. MULTICELLULAR ANIMALS: THE EARTHWORM (Lumbricus) 155 Anatomy. Microscopic Anatomy, orJEttstology. X IX. MULTICELLULAR ANIMALS: THE FROG (Rana). GENERAL DESCRIPTION 175 X. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF AN ANIMAL . . t . 204 Physiology of the Earthworm. L THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ANIMALS AND PLANTS: THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF OR- GANISMS 217 The Differences between Animals and Plants. Contrast between the Activities of Animals and Plants. The Mutual Relations of Organ- isms. Nature's Life Cycle. CONTENTS ix PAGH REPRODUCTION : SEXUAL AND ASEXUAL METHODS 238 General Types of Reproduction. Reproduction in Unicellular Organisms. Reproduction in Multicellular Organisms. Division without Cell Union. Multiplication by Cell Union. The Union of the Sex Bodies or Fertilization. The Relation of the Chromatin to Heredity. The Purpose of the Union of the Sexes. DISTRIBUTION OF SEXUAL AND ASEXUAL METHODS. ALTERNATION OF GENERATIONS 262 Summary of the Methods of Reproduction. Origin of Sex Union. Distribution of Asexual Reproduction. Distribution of Sexual Repro- duction. Reproductive Bodies or Reproductive Cells. Cross Fertilization the Rule. Alterna- tion of Sexual with Asexual Methods of Repro- duction. XIV. DEVELOPMENT OF THE FERTILIZED EGG . . 280 Embryology and Metamorphosis. Embryology of the Frog. XV. THE SOURCE AND NATURE OF VITAL ENERGY . 292 Matter and Energy. The Conservation of Energy. The Transformation of Energy. The Living Organism as a Machine. The Life of a Plant. The Life of an Animal. XVI. THE MECHANICS OF THE LIVING MACHINE . 303 Details of the Action of the Machine. Vital Force or Vitality. Summary. What is Life? x CONTENTS CHAPTER PAGE XVII. THE ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT OF ORGANISMS: HEREDITY AND VARIATION" . . . 325 The Origin of the Living Machine Not Ex- plained. The Forces Which Have Produced Organisms. Conformity to Type. Divergence from Type. XVIII. THE ORIGIN OF THE LIVING MACHINE: ADAP- TATION; THE FORCES OF ORGANIC EVOLU- TION 342 Adaptation. The Theory of Evolution. XIX. CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION . . . 364 Classification (Taxonomy) . The Significance of Classification. An Outline of the Classi- fication of the Living World. Distribution of Animals in Space and Time. Distribution of Organisms in Time: Paleontology. GLOSSARY-INDEX 387 BIOLOQY CHAPTER I THE SCOPE OF BIOLOGY THE NEW BIOLOGY AND THE OLD BIOLOGY is often described as the most recent of the sciences, despite the fact that it was one of the first to be studied. Four centuries before Christ, animals were dissected and described by Aristotle, and from that time on, the study of living things has never ceased. In the last half century, however, the study of vital phenomena has assumed a new aspect. Formerly animals and plants were studied only as objects to be classified and named; now they are studied as objects to be explained. Progress of Scientific Thought. — This new method of bi- ological study is only another expression of man's changed attitude toward all natural phenomena. In early times, people imagined that all the phenomena of nature which they could not understand were produced by gods. One god caused the winds; another the motions of the sun and stars. Gradually these conceptions have been changed by the attitude of modern science. First, the motions of the heavenly bodies were ex- plained under the general law of gravitation. Then, the mys- terious phenomena of fire and of electricity were comprehended under the laws of chemistry and physics. Later, the various changes on the earth's surface, such as the formation of moun- tains, of valleys, of rivers, and of plains, were explained as the result of the ordinary forces of nature. In all this there has been a progress in one direction, namely, toward the explanation of natural phenomena by natural forces. The most recent of the natural phenomena to be studied with this end in view, are those associated with living 1 2 BIOLOGY animals and plants. The question whether the activities of animals and plants can be explained by the same forces found elsewhere in nature, and the attempt to answer this question in the affirmative, form the basis of the new science of biology. Modern biology is thus something more than the study of animals and plants as dead objects to be collected, named, and classified. It is a study of animals and plants in action; as living beings to be related to their environment. It is this attempt to explain life processes which may be said to have raised biology to the rank of a new science. THE FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF LIVING THINGS Distinction between the Living and the non-Living. — Since biology (Gr. bios = \ife -\-logos = discourse) is the science of living things, we must first ask how living things may be distinguished from non-living. While it is a comparatively easy matter to recognize the distinction, it is difficult to draw it sharply. Indeed, some biologists are of the opinion that no rigid line can be drawn, and that there are some states of matter which are halfway between the living and the non-living. Whether or not this be so, it certainly is true that between most forms of matter which we call alive and those which we call non- living, there is a marked and recognizable difference, although it may be difficult to define it accurately. Four or five fun- damental properties are characteristic of life: 1. Activity. — The most noticeable difference between the living and the non-living is in the presence or absence of spon- taneous activity. If we wish to find out whether any given body is alive, we watch it carefully to see if it shows any power of independent activity, and if it does so, we call it alive. If the object, a seed for example, seems to be perfectly dormant, we may put it under conditions in which, if alive, it will develop activity. If it then begins to grow into a plant we say that the seed was alive at first but dormant. If, however, it fails to show any power of developing into a plant when placed THE SCOPE OF BIOLOGY 3 in proper conditions, we conclude that the seed is not alive. Hence the best criterion that we have for separating the living from the non-living is to determine whether or not the body in question either shows any signs of independent activity or, when put under proper conditions, may be made to show any signs of such activity. Automatic activity. — The simple fact of showing activity is, however, not enough to serve as a criterion of life. Other things besides living beings have the power of activity. A watch, or a locomotive, or a steam engine certainly shows activity, and yet none of these is alive. There is, however, one distinction between the activity of such machines and the activity of a living organism. Machines show activity only when they are started into action by some outside in- fluence; while a living organism develops activity from its own internal, independent power. With this modification, the first criterion that we have for distinguishing the living from the non-living is the power of developing automatic activity, and only objects possessing this power do we speak of as being alive. 2. Death. — The fact that living things show automatic activ- ity has a converse side. This activity may cease, the object- losing its power of showing spontaneous activity. This consti- tutes the phenomenon spoken of as death. To define either life or death has proved a puzzle to both science and philosophy. For our purpose, however, they can be fairly well defined as follows: By life, we mean the possession of the power of show- ing spontaneous, automatic activity; by death, we mean the disappearance of this power. Why an animal or plant, when it dies, loses this power, we do not know. In some cases it is undoubtedly because the complicated machinery which com- poses the body is injured and consequently cannot work properly. This we find true also in the case of ordinary ma- chines. If a locomotive should burst its cylinders, it would no longer be able to run. If a watch has its mainspring broken, 4 BIOLOGY it is thrown out of adjustment and consequently does not show activity. So in regard to living things; the inability to show further activity may undoubtedly be attributed to the fact that the machinery is out of order. If, for example, the beating of the heart ceases for any length of time, life activity must cease, because life activity is dependent on the circulation of the blood. Thus, in many cases we know positively that death comes from the breaking down of the machine. Whether death means anything more than the breaking down of the machine; whether anything is lost which can be called the life force, is one of the questions over which philosophy and biology have puzzled for long years, and upon which they have not reached any definite conclusion. 3. Growth. — All organisms disintegrate by oxidation and waste. When a piece of wood reaches the required temperature to unite with the oxygen of the air, it burns. Waste products appear as gases and ashes, and the wood disappears. In a similar way, by union with oxygen the living body is being constantly converted into waste products which are given off from the body as excretions. As a result the organism is constantly disintegrating. This would inevitably result in the disappearance of the organism if it were not for the opposite power of reintegration, or growth. All living things have the power of growing, and no object that is not alive has this power. It is true that, under some circumstances, crystals may increase in size, and this is some- times referred to as a growth of the crystals; but it is a totally different kind of growth from that which we find in living things. In the case of the crystal, the new material is simply laid upon the outside of the old, layer after layer, and the apparent growth is really an increase in size, by the process of accretion. In the growth of the living organism, material is taken inside of the body, and there it is transformed into compounds like those of the living organism which has ab- sorbed it. Thus the living organism increases from within, — THE SCOPE OF BIOLOGY 5 a type of growth spoken of as intussusception (Lat. intus = within + suscipere = to take up). With this understanding of growth we can state that nothing grows except living things. As the result of their activities, living things are constantly wasting away; but by growth they repair and keep pace with their own wastes and remain in a practically constant condi- tion, in spite of their ceaseless activity. In time, however, the disintegrating tendencies surpass the powers of repair, and the organism dies of old age. 4. Reproduction. — The power of reproduction is found only in the realm of the animate world, for only a living organism can produce another like itself. Inanimate things cannot reproduce their kind. As a result of this power of reproduction, held in common by all things possessed of life, there is a constant replacement of the individual, a constant wearing out and death, a constant rebirth and growth, the new organism ever replacing the old as it disintegrates and disappears. There is a constant tendency to undergo cyclical changes present in all manifestations of life. 5. Consciousness. — Consciousness is characteristic of some living bodies, but is probably not universal among them, for it is practically certain that life occurs in many places without consciousness, although some theorists have endeavored to argue that all forms of life, even the plants, have a very dim form of consciousness. This is very doubtful, and we cannot regard consciousness as universally characteristic of life. Wherever consciousness is found, however, it indicates the presence of life, and thus may be deemed one of the most important signs of life. CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF LIVING TISSUES Chemical Elements in Living Tissues. — Although there is a large variety of chemical compounds found in living animals and plants, nevertheless there is a certain uniformity among them. All animals and plants are made up primarily of a small num- BIOLOGY her of elements, nine chemical elements being ordinarily pres- ent in living things, four of which predominate, while the other four are present only in small quantities. They are as follows : — Oxygen, a colorless, odorless gas, forming about one-fifth of the atmosphere. Carbon, a solid at ordinary temperatures. Charcoal, graphite, lampblack, and diamond are examples of almost pure carbon. Hydrogen, a gas, the lightest of all known substances and highly inflammable. Nitrogen, a colorless, odorless gas which comprises about four-fifths of the atmosphere. Sulphur, phosphorus, calcium, iron, and potassium consti- tute the other chemical elements that are found in living Oxt/ye/j Mitroq tfydroqen FIG. 1. — DIAGRAM SHOWING THE RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF THE CHIEF ELEMENTS MAKING UP A LIVING BODY things. Only very small amounts of these elements are present, although calcium is found in animals in considerable quantities in the bone. Figure 1 shows diagrammatically the relative THE SCOPE OF BIOLOGY 7 proportions of the chief chemical elements in the animal body. Oxygen, carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen constitute about 98 per cent of the animal body and not far from the same pro- portion of the composition of the body of most plants. These four elements also constitute by far the largest proportion of the material present in the earth's crust; so that the living body is made of the same materials that are most abundantly present in the inanimate world around us. Chemical Compounds in Living Tissues. — It is perfectly evident that the elements enumerated do not exist in the living body as uncombined elements. Two or more of them are always united as chemical compounds to form a substance different from either of them. The chemical compounds that are present in the bodies of animals and plants are of an endless variety; but a few general types are most widely present and may be regarded as the fundamental compounds of living things. These compounds are important, since they enter into the food of all animals. They are as follows: proteids, carbohydrates, fats. Proteids. — Proteids are extremely complex substances, com- posed chiefly of the elements: carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen, but containing also in small proportions sulphur and the other elements that have been enumerated above. They are by far the most complex substances in living things; that is, in a proteid molecule, there are present more chemical atoms than are found in a molecule of any other substance existing in the animal body. The exact chemical composition of proteids is not known and it suffices for our purpose to state, that they are composed of a highly complex combina- tion of the elements we have mentioned, so united that hun- dreds of atoms are probably always combined to make a mole- cule. Some idea of their complexity may be obtained from the fact that one chemist gave as a formula for egg-albumen, C2o4H322N52O66S2 (a formula too complicated to have any real meaning); and indeed, no two chemists agree upon the chem- 8 BIOLOGY ica! composition of any proteid. The following are the best- known proteids: albumen, the white of an egg; myosin, the lean part of the meat; casein, the curd of the milk; gluten, the sticky substance in flour; legumen, a similar sticky material present in peas and beans. Besides these, there are many other proteids present in animal and plant tissues. Living tissue is almost entirely proteid in character. Sources of proteids. — Since living things are made up largely of proteids, we next inquire into the source of these proteids. As will be noticed later, green plants can combine the gases of the air with the water and certain minerals obtained from the soil, and thus manufacture their own proteids. Animals and colorless plants (fungi) are totally unable to manufacture proteids from inorganic compounds. Hence it follows that animals and the colorless plants depend upon the green plants for their proteids, which is simply another way of stating the fact that animals require plants for their food. Although unable to manufacture proteids, colorless plants and animals are, how- ever, able to modify them more or less, having the power to transform one kind of proteid into another. If, for example, an animal is fed with the white of an egg, it can transform this proteid into the proteid of muscle, thus changing albu- men into myosin. Since animals are unable to manufacture muscles from any substances but proteids, it follows that they are obliged to have proteids in their diet. Carbohydrates. — Starches and sugars are the best-known examples of carbohydrates. They are much simpler than proteids, consisting of only three chemical elements: carbon, oxygen, and hydrogen. These elements are combined in mole- cules with the following formulas : C6Hi0O5 (starch) and C6Hi2O6 (sugar). There is quite a large number of starches and sugars, differing from each other in some respects, but these formulas are typical of their general nature. It will be seen from the formulas that the difference between the molecules of starch and sugar is in the presence, in sugar, of H^O in addition THE SCOPE OF BIOLOGY 9 to the group contained in the starch molecules. H^O is a molecule of water; and hence we say that if a molecule of water is added to a starch molecule, it will convert it into a sugar molecule. It must not be understood, however, that this can be done by simply adding water to starch, for the two will not combine. There are methods (see page 306), however, by which they can be made to combine, and under these cir- cumstances starch can very easily be converted into sugar. Among the different types of sugars, there are two of espe- cial importance. One of these is grape sugar, also called glu- cose or dextrose. These three names are closely related, al- though not exactly identical. The formula for these is also CeH^Oe. The other type is cane sugar, obtained from sugar cane or the sugar beet. The formula for this is C^H^On, which, as will be noticed, is nearly, but not quite, twice the formula of the grape-sugar molecule. By the addition of a molecule of water it is possible to break a molecule of the cane sugar into two molecules of the grape-sugar type, according to the following equation: Ci2H22Oii+H2O = 2C6Hi206. This is commonly spoken of as inverting the sugar. Sources of carbohydrates. — Carbohydrates come almost wholly from the vegetable world. Green plants manufacture starch in their leaves by combining the carbon dioxid gas which they absorb from the air with the water which they absorb from the soil. This starch is very easily converted into sugar within the plant, and then carried to various parts where it may be stored, either in the form of starch or sugar. It is subsequently used by the plant as food, or, if the plant is consumed by animals, it serves as their food. So far as known, there is no other source of carbohydrates in nature besides the green plants, and as all animals and all plants consume carbohydrates, it is plain that the whole living world is dependent upon the green plants for carbohydrates. Hydrocarbons (Fats). — Good examples of fats are found in but- ter, in mutton tallow, in lard, in olive oil, etc., and in many other 10 BIOLOGY food products. Fats contain the three elements, carbon, oxygen, and hydrogen, in this respect agreeing with the carbohydrates. They are, however, considerably more complex than carbohy- drates, a molecule of fat containing more atoms, as is shown by the formula C5iHio4O9, which represents a common fat. When treated by a simple chemical method, fats are broken up into two substances, one of which is called glycerine and the other a fatty acid. Sources of fats.— ¥ at can be manufactured by either ani- mals or plants out of other foods. If an animal is fed upon proteids or carbohydrates, it can manufacture fat from them; and plants are able to make fat out of the food materials which they absorb from the air and water. The table on page 11, which illustrates the composition of a few of our common foods, shows that our ordinary diet con- tains a fair proportion of each of these three foodstuffs. It will also be seen from this table that the largest proportion of proteids comes from animal foods, while the largest pro- portion of carbohydrates comes from plant foods. >/ ORIGIN OF LIFE Perhaps no feature of modern biology is more important than the acceptance of the theory that every living thing comes from a living source. All living animals and plants with which we are familiar to-day have originated from pre- viously existing life. The living animal comes from the egg that was produced by another living animal; the plant comes from a seed that was produced by another living plant. But the question of the primal origin of life is sure to intrude itself upon our minds, and we are forced to ask whether living things can be, or ever have been produced by any other means. Did there ever occur, or does there occur in the world to-day, a spontaneous generation of life? In other words, did a living thing ever arise from some source which was not alive? So far as our knowledge of nature is concerned, there are no means of starting new life except from previously existing life. THE SCOPE OF BIOLOGY 11 CO i-< r-l C5 i-H 1-H OOi(N T^I I> 00 CO iO 00 iO t^ O t^ T-I I-H (M O t^- iO s 5 £ ^ < I g ^ I s " ll I . I 'S's ' fl'iis'J '§6 " -S o-~M gj'C 5 «•

cytoplasm; /, fibers; ky, karyoplasm; nm, nuclear membrane; n, nucleus; no, nucleolus; p, plastids; v, vacuole. stance) has been given. This material within the cell wall, or lie in the form of the ostrich, which is really a single cell. As a rule, however, cells are microscopic in size. Shape. — A cell is usu- ally more or less spher- ical (Fig. 9), although it may be distorted by pressure or irregular growth. CELL SUBSTANCE OR PROTOPLASM The material which composes the active part of the cell appears like a mass of more or less transparent jelly to which the name pro- toplasm (Gr. protos = first + plasma = sub- may fill the entire space of a thin layer next to FIG. 10. — CELL OF RPIROGYRA cl, cell chlorophyll; cs, cell sap; cw, cell wall; n, nucleus; p, protoplasm. the cell wall, the rest of the space being filled by a watery liquid; Fig. 10. CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY 31 Structure. — When protoplasm is examined under the micro- scope it is not found to be a homogeneous jelly, as was at first thought, but to have an intricate structure which is only partly disclosed by the microscope; Fig. 11. The exact structure of this cell substance has not been fully determined, and there are at least three different theories to explain its microscopic appearance. The Reticular Theory. — One school of scientists describes pro- toplasm as an extremely minute network of fibers forming a sort of sponge, in the meshes of which there is found a moving liquid; Fig. II A . This is the so-called reticular or fibrillar theory of pro- toplasmic structure. The Foam Theory. — Another school explains the appearance of protoplasm as due to a mass of minute bubbles, like soapsuds on a small scale; and insists that what appear to be fibers are only the delicate lines separating the bubbles from each other; Fig. 11 B. This is the foam theory of protoplasmic structure. The Granular Theory. — Still a third theory suggests that the protoplasm consists of an indefinite number of minute, living, moving granules, arranged in lines resembling fibers or in various other figures. This is the granular theory of protoplasmic structure. Between these theories the scientists have not reached any conclusion, although the first two have been more generally accepted than the last. It is quite possible, and even probable, that all of the theories may have a certain amount of truth in them, and that protoplasm does not in all cases have the same structure. It is certain, however, that protoplasm always shows a structure and is not a homogeneous body. In most cases A B FIG. 11. — DIAGRAMS ILLUSTRAT- ING THEORIES OF PROTOPLASM A, the Fibrillar; B, the Foam. (Dahlgren and Kepner.) 32 BIOLOGY two, and frequently three, distinct substances are discernible in it. 1. A mesh work (reticulum) resembling fibers. 2. A liquid (cytoplasm) occupying the meshes of the net- work. 3. Minute bodies (microsomata) (Gr. micros = small -f- soma = body) scattered along the branches of the network, regularly or irregularly, and frequently moving to and fro in the cell. Activity of Protoplasm. — If living protoplasm be studied under the microscope, it will frequently show a type of motion called streaming. This is due to minute granules constantly circu- lating in a more or less definite or indefinite fashion within the cell. Whether all protoplasm will show such motion we do not know, but apparently whenever this substance is actually alive this motion is present. Possibly this may not be true of protoplasm that is known as dormant, but it is almost certainly true of all active cells. THE NUCLEUS Lying within the cell substance there is a smaller body, usually of an approximately spherical shape, called the nucleus (Lat. nucleus = nut); Fig. 9n. This is a structure of extreme complexity. It is, as a rule, bounded by a delicate nuclear mem- brane nm, which holds the contents and separates them from the surrounding cell substance. Within this membrane may be found a jelly-like mass, very similar to, if not identical with, the cell substance outside, and also included under the term pro- toplasm. To distinguish these two parts of the protoplasm, that inside of the nucleus is called karyoplasm (Gr. karyon = nut + plasma = substance) or nucleoplasm, while that outside is called cytoplasm (Gr. cytos = cell + plasma) ; Fig. 9 ky and cy. In addition to karyoplasm, however, there are other distinct parts in the nucleus. Delicate fibers run through it called linin fibers (Fig. 90, and a small rounded body known as the nucle- CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY 33 olus (Fig. 9 no) is usually present and is sometimes very promi- nent. The significance of this nucleolus is at the present day unknown. The most remarkable substance in the nucleus is a material known as chromatin (Gr. chroma = color); Fig. 9 ch. It has received the name chromatin from the fact that it has a special affinity for certain staining reagents, the chromatin material in the nucleus being the first thing to absorb the color and become stained. By special methods the chromatin may be stained and the rest of the nucleus left unstained. The latter is sometimes called achromatin (a = without + chroma = color). By this special process of staining it is possible to show the chromatin in prepared specimens, although in the living cell the chromatin FIG. 12. — NUCLEI, SHOWING THE DIFFERENT APPEARANCES OP THE CHROMATIN (VARIOUS AUTHORS) is so transparent as to be practically invisible. Chromatin occurs in a great variety of forms in different nuclei. Some of these are shown in Figure 12. It is sometimes diffused irregu- 34 BIOLOGY larly through the nucleus; it may be in the form of stars, or a long coiled thread, or it may appear as isolated threads, or as threads interlaced, etc. Whatever its form, it always has the power of absorbing coloring material and is probably always of the same general, chemical composition. The nucleus controls the cell activities, and the chromatin forms the most impor- tant part of the nucleus. THE CENTROSOME Near the nucleus in many cells may be found a minute body (Fig. 9cr) known as the centrosome (Gr. centron = center + Gr. soma = body), which is usually present in the cells of animals, where it seems to have an important function in con- trolling the multiplication of the cell. The centrosome is usually lacking in the cells of the higher plants. Frequently two centrosomes are found near together, and sometimes they are surrounded by a clear area, which is designated as the centrosphere. At one time the centrosome was considered of great importance in the life of the cell, from its prominent role in cell division; but since it has been discovered that some cells have none, while others have several, its significance as an essential element in cellular structure has been doubted. THE CELL WALL One of the functions of the cell substance in many cells is to secrete around the cell a material of harder consistency than the protoplasm, the cell wall. Some cells have no cell wall; for example, the animal shown in Figure 13 is a cell devoid of a cell wall; and in many other animal cells the wall is either very slight or entirely lacking. From this, it is evident that the cell wall cannot be regarded as an essential part of the cell. In nearly all vegetable tissues, the living protoplasm secretes a membrane of greater or less consistency, and the same is also true of many animal cells. The cell wall may be made of a variety of different materials, In plants it is sometimes of wood, CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY 35 or of a material allied to starch and known as cellulose. Again it may be composed of lime, or made up of a hornlike substance, as in the case of the cells that secrete the finger nails, or the horns of animals. The cell wall is not alive, being simply a secretion of the living cytoplasm. The cell walls may be very thin, or entirely absent as in Figure 13. In other cases they may be very thick and form a tissue principally composed of cell wall, with only scattered bits of b /ing protoplasm in the midst of a great ma-ss of secreted wall substance. This is especially true in the case of the cartilage, as shown in Figure 4. The shape of a cell is usually determined by the shape of its cell wall. Figure 14 shows a number of cells and gives an idea of the various shapes ihe cell wall may assume. \| Since the cell wall is lifeless and has only the function of sup- port, the cell contents alone being alive, it follows that any organism may contain both living and lifeless material. Among plants the lifeless material may far surpass the living in bulk. In a tree, for example, most of the trunk, roots, and branches are made of the dead walls of cells which were formerly filled with living protoplasm. In a large tree only a thin layer of cells directly under the bark, the cells found in the leaves, buds, and some cells in the roots, are actually alive. In animals a much larger proportion of the body cells are alive, the bulk of the muscles beirg living protoplasm ; but the skin, hair, cartilage, FlG. 13. — A SINGLE-CELLED ANIMAL ACTINOPHRYS A cell without a cell wall. BIOLOGY F.IG. 14. — SHOWING CELLS OF VARIOUS SHAPES All except C are plant cells; C, a ciliated cell from the oesoph- agus of an animal. (From various authors.) CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY 37 and bone contain in a marked degree lifeless cell walls from which the living matter is either wholly withdrawn, as in the hair, or remains only in a relatively small amount, as in bone and cartilage. Other Substances in a Cell.— Cells may contain other bodies than those already described, which cannot be regarded, how- ever, as essential to cell life, since they are not characteristic of all cellular structure. Some of these are called plastids (Fig. 9 p) , and seem to grow and divide and to be handed on from one cell generation to the next. Examples of such plastids are the chlorophyll bodies in plant cells, or vacuoles in some animals. Other bodies included in cells are purely passive bodies which seem to be functionless, inert, excreted substances, not growing and not handed down from generation to generation. CELL FUNCTIONS The cell with its protoplasm and nucleus contains all of the parts that are necessary for life, and, so far as we know, nothing simpler than a cell is capable of carrying on all the functions of life. If this be true, we are justified in saying that the ideal cell we have been describing is the simplest bit of structural machinery that can manifest all the functions of life. All living organisms, animals and plants alike, are either single cells (unicellular) or complexes of cells (multicellular), and the life of the organism as a whole is thus the combined life of its individual cells. Definition of a Cell. — To sum up, then, we may say: A cell is a combination of a bit of protoplasm (cytoplasm) with a nucleus, and it is the simplest structure known to show the phenomena of life. HISTORY OF THE CELL DOCTRINE The development of the cell doctrine may, for convenience, be divided into three periods : — 1. The early conception of the cell, 1839 to 1861. 38 BIOLOGY 2. The discovery of protoplasm and the development of the mechanical theory of life, 1861 to about 1885. 3. The discoveries of the functions of the nucleus and its relations to reproduction and heredity, from about 1880 to the present. While these periods are not sharply marked off from each other, they do represent different epochs in the development of the conception of the nature of the cell. i. THE EARLY CONCEPTION OF THE CELL (1839-1861) The Formulation of the Cell Theory, 1839. — It was not definitely proved until about 1839 that the tissues of animals and plants were composed of cells, although cells were first described in 1665 by Robert Hooke. A microscopic study of a piece of cork showed him that it was made up of large numbers of minute compartments which reminded him of the cells of a monastery. Hence he gave them the name of cells, which they still bear. Miscellaneous observations followed at intervals in the next two centuries. In 1833 Brown described the nucleus as a constant part of the cell. In the years 1838 and 1839 two Germans, Schwann and Schleiden, one studying animals and the other, plants, advanced the theory that the tissues of all animals and plants were made up of these independent units, to which they still gave the name of cells. These observations formulated the so-called cell doctrine. The Original Conception of the Cell. — It was first supposed that the cell wall was the most essential part of the cell in con- trolling the processes of life and separating die contents of the cell from the surrounding medium. This conception did not last long, for it was soon seen that there were many cells that did not have cell walls. In these early days the existence of a nucleus was not realized as of much significance. The Origin of Cells. — In the beginning it was supposed that cells were like crystals and developed from a cytoblastema as CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY 39 crystals form in a supersaturated solution of sugar, the cytoblas- tema being described as a complex, supersaturated solution formed by the living body. This theory did not last many years, however, because it was shown that cells arise only from other cells. Even as early as 1846, Schultze and others proved that cells have no other origin except from previously existing cells. Starting with an egg, which is easily demonstrated to be a single cell (Fig. 15 A), and then carefully studying its development, it can be shown that its growth is by the method of re- peated division and sub-division (Fig. 15 £, C, D, E, F) until the single- celled egg gradually becomes the many-celled adult. Although the cells become very numerous, they all arise by the process of division from the original egg cell. For many years, however, it was considered possible for a cell to arise in some other way than by division of the original egg cell; and even as late as 1880 discus- sions took place as to whether "free cell origin" was possible. By this ghowing how & single.celled egg term was meant the origin of cells (A),bydiv»onCBtoO),grow»iiito a many-celled animal. from any source except from a previ- ^ endoderm; ously existing cell. In time this ques- ec' ectoderm- ,. ,,1 i • ,! A- j F and £ show side folding inward tlOn Was Settled in the negative, and to form what becomes the digestive . . . , tract. we are now certain that cells never arise except from the division of earlier cells, and that all the cells of an adult animal body, though there may be millions, have arisen by the process of division from the original egg, which was in itself the single cell from which the life of the en F FIG. 15. — THE DEVELOP- MENT OF THE EGG OF A SEA-URCHIN 40 BTOLOG\ individual started. Figure 15 shows how the single cell divides and continues to divide to produce the many cells of the adult organism. 2. PROTOPLASM AND THE MECHANICAL THEORY ( 1861-1885 ) The Discovery of Protoplasm. — In 1839 Purkinje first recog- nized under the name "sarcode" the contents of the animal cell; H. Von Mohl in 1846 applied the term protoplasm (Gr. protos = first + plasma = substance or form) to the viscid, granular sub- stance found in plant cells. Cohn in 1850 claimed not only the identity of animal and plant protoplasm but contended that it was the seat of vitality, — the basis of life. In 1861 Max Schultze established Cohn's theory and extended the meaning of the word protoplasm to include all living matter. This was a new conception and at once placed the doctrine of biology upon a new basis.- If it could be proved that the cell substance, which is the living material in all cells, is always alike, it would show that life could be reduced to one fundamental basis. The name protoplasm had been given to the living substance in the animal embryo and then to a similar material in the cells of plants; but it was Schultze who identified it with the living material of animal cells and extended the name to apply to this universal life substance. With this new conception, he defined a cell as a mass of protoplasm surrounding a nucleus, and thus placed the keystone in the arch of the protoplasmic theories. Schultze's conception of protoplasm was somewhat expanded and made more significant by Professor Huxley in 1866. Hux- ley, giving to it the name "physical basis of life," drew far- reaching conclusions as to the significance of the phenomenon that we call life, based upon this universal physical substance. He argued that the properties of life are simply characters of this protoplasmic substance, just as other properties are char- acteristic of water; and that life represents no distinct entity, but is simply a name applied to the combined properties of this remarkable chemical compound, protoplasm. This started CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY 41 a long search for a chemical explanation of life phenomena. In accordance with this idea, life was looked upon as merely representing a special manifestation of chemical and physical forces; it was argued that there was no more reason to speak of vitality as a special property possessed by living things, than to speak of aquosity as a special property possessed by the chemical compound water. The Mechanical Theory of Life. — Based upon this conception arose a large number of interesting speculations, and the discus- sions during the next twenty-five years resulted in a develop- ment of the mechanical theory of life. It was argued that, if life is merely a name given to the properties of protoplasm, and if chemists could manufacture the chemical substance protoplasm, they could thus create life, i.e., living protoplasm. Chemistry was at this time advancing with prodigious strides, and chemists were making more and more complex substances, and new com- pounds which had hitherto been considered beyond their reach. Many of the substances, which had previously been supposed to be produced only by living processes, were, one by one, manufac- tured synthetically in the chemist's laboratory. From this the further assumption and confident prediction was made that the time would come when it would be possible to manufacture a bit of protoplasm by purely chemical means; and then it would fol- low, if the mechanical theory of life were correct, that this bit of protoplasm would necessarily be alive and scientists would thus be able to manufacture a living thing. This was the essence of the mechanical theory of life which largely dominated discussion of biology for a quarter of a century. General Properties of Protoplasm. — With this idea of pro- toplasm as the basis of life, a large amount of study was given to this interesting material. Since it is alive, it has of course all the properties of life. If we look upon protoplasm as the physical basis of life, we may in one sense say that its proper- ties are as varied as are the properties of living things, since the characteristics of living things are based upon the charac- 42 BIOLOGY teristics ot their protoplasm. If the characters of mankind are dependent upon the properties of its protoplasm, it follows that the protoplasm that makes up the cells in man must differ as much from the protoplasm that makes up the cells of a plant as mankind differs from the plant. There will be, then, is many varieties of protoplasm as there are varieties of living beings in the world. But apart from these detailed charac- ters, we find that the substance protoplasm, using this term now to refer to the general life substance of the cell, has a few charac- teristics that are present in all forms of protoplasm whether animal or plant. In other words, all forms of living matter possess certain general properties, which are frequently spoken of as the general characters of protoplasm. They are as follows : — I. Chemistry of Protoplasm. — Various attempts were made in earlier years to determine the chemical composition of pro- toplasm. The chemical elements out of which it is made are easily found to be carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulphur, and some other substances in small quantities. For a time it was supposed to be a definite chemical substance with a definite formula, and attempts were even made to give the number of atoms present in a molecule of protoplasm We now know that such attempts were necessarily futile. Protoplasm is not a chemical compound but a mixture of a variety of different com- pounds. The fibrillar network, the liquids, the microsomata, and the chromatin are certainly all different from each other, and it is manifestly impossible to speak of the chemical composi- tion of protoplasm as a whole. We can safely say that proto- plasm contains proteids, but beyond this, little of significance has yet been determined. Since it is in a very unstable condi- tion, constantly undergoing changes, its chemical composition cannot be constant. Moreover, the chemical nature of living protoplasm is doubtless different from the same material when dead, and since any chemical tests are sure to result in its death, it is impossible to determine the composition of the material when alive. CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY 43 2. Irritability. — All forms of living protoplasm have the power of reacting when stimulated. This phenomenon is called irrita- bility and is produced by the action of a large variety of external ibrces upon the protoplasm itself. Any external force which serves to produce a reaction in the protoplasm is spoken of as a stimulus. Almost any kind of stimulus has the power of affecting protoplasm: mechanical, thermal, electrical, and chemi- cal. Stimuli all "have their effect upon protoplasm and all pro- duce certain reactions within it. Protoplasm is, in short, irri- table to almost any external stimulus. While the different forms of protoplasm show different degrees of irritability to various stimuli, they have certain general reactions in common. The activity of protoplasm increases directly with the heat to a certain point, and then decreases, and finally ceases altogether if the temperature continues to rise. Although some forms of protoplasm are much more irritable to mechanical stimuli than others, nevertheless, all types of pro- toplasm are influenced by external, mechanical force. Various other factors,— light, chemism, gravity, etc.,' — mentioned upon pages 57, 58, stimulate protoplasm. Various organic, internal changes stimulate it as well. If the protoplasm is improperly nourished it produces a condition that is in general known as hunger, and this excites the irritability of protoplasm. The same thing is true if there is insufficient water within the protoplasm, producing an irritation called thirst. Protoplasm is also destroyed by various chemicals called poisons, like chloroform, corrosive sublimate, etc. 3. Conductility. — An irritation produced in any one part of a bit of protoplasm is rapidly conducted throughout the whole mass, a phenomenon known as conductility. In an ordinary cell, this phenomenon of conductility does not have very much meaning, because the bit of protoplasm is too small; but some cells possess long protoplasmic fibers extending from their bodies; and then this function of conducting impulses from one end of the protoplasm to the other becomes of considerable 44 BIOLOGY importance. For instance, a nerve fiber, even in the higher animals, consists of a long bit of protoplasm extending from the cell body; see page 169. The phenomenon of conductility in this case is of great significance because it may carry an im- pulse from the outer end of these nerves (the periphery) to the cell body in the brain, or it may carry one that started within the body rapidly outward to the periphery. This phenomenon of conductility, therefore, forms the primary function of the nerves. It is this function that makes it possible for a stimulus applied to the outer part of the animal to be carried rapidly over the animal so as to produce a response in other parts of the body. 4. Assimilation. — All protoplasm has the property of taking in food material, changing its chemical nature and converting it into new protoplasm by assimilation; a process which may result in growth. This process is probably always a constructive one; i. e., it builds more complicated materials out of simpler ones. Different kinds of protoplasm have this power developed to a widely different extent. Some cells assimilate and grow with great rapidity, with the result that they multiply rapidly; other cells seem to have lost much of this power of assimilation in their adult life, and are able only to replace the worn-out parts of their own structure. In the higher animals, for example, the cells are all capable of rapid assimilation, growth, and reproduc- tion in youth, but many of them nearly or wholly lose this power after the animal has reached adult life. The nerve cells in the brain and spinal cord, for example, seem largely to have lost this property of assimilation, for they are unable to grow after they have once reached the adult form, although able to repair their own wastes. Later in life, nearly all the cells in the body lose this power, a condition characteristic of old age. Speaking generally, this power of assimilation and growth is most active at the very beginning of the life of a cell; it continues for a period with a gradually declining vigor and finally comes to an end, starting vigorously again as the result of the process of reproduction. CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY 45 5. Reproduction. — Reproduction is the direct result of assimi- lation; for assimilation produces growth, and growth in the end results in division. All forms of reproduction take the form of division. The four properties, irritability, conductility, assimilation, and reproduction, have been described as belonging to protoplasm; and the mechanical theory of life has centered around this con- ception. But in a sense it is misleading to call them properties of protoplasm, unless in the term protoplasm we include all of the contents of a cell, the nucleus as well as the cell substance. A living cell shows these general properties; but the living cell consists of protoplasm and nucleus, both of which are neces- sary in order that all the functions mentioned should be shown. The material frequently called protoplasm, i. e., the substance outside of the nucleus, does not show all these functions. We ask, therefore : What are the functions of the nucleus and proto- plasm as distinct from each other? To draw a sharp line between them is not possible at present. 3. THE NUCLEUS AND ITS SIGNIFICANCE (1880 TO THE PRESENT) In the early study of the cell the nucleus was looked upon as an unimportant part, and in all of the early discussions its sig- nificance was generally neglected. From about 1880 the modern microscope and modern methods began to be directed towards the nucleus, and a series of marvelous and unexpected results were obtained, leading to the recognition of the nucleus as perhaps the most important part of the cell, and as possessing a structure of wonderful complexity and marvelous properties. The struc- ture of the nucleus has already been outlined and may be seen in Figure 12. These figures are enough to disprove any idea that either cytoplasm or nucleoplasm can be considered a definite chemical substance. They indicate clearly that in the simplest life unit, we are not dealing with a homogeneous compound but with a complex structure and a mechanism of delicate adjust- 46 BIOLOGY ment. This has been made even more evident and brought to a point beyond discussion by a study of the functions of the nucleus. A nucleus is necessary to the complete life of a cell. Among the unicellular animals are some cells large enough for experi- menters to cut to pieces in order to study the different functions of the fragments. These experiments are very difficult and deli- cate, but they have been carried on by a number of investigators independently, who have demonstrated the following facts: If a cell is cut to pieces in such a way that each piece contains a fragment of the nucleus, ^each fragment is capable of carrying on independently all life functions. Each can feed, grow, and FIG. 16. — STENTOR. A SINGLE-CELLED ANIMAL; n, THE LONG NUCLEUS FIG. 17. — SHOWING HOW THE STENTOR, WHEN CUT INTO TWO PIECES ALONG THE LINE AB, DEVELOPS INTO TWO COMPLETE ANIMALS multiply, and seems to be lacking in none of the essential func- tions of life; Figs. 16 and 17. If, however, the animal is cut to pieces in such a way that some of the fragments contain pieces of the nucleus, while others contain none, the frag- CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY 47 ments act in totally different ways. Those that contain nu- clear material are able to redevelop lost parts, to carry on their life processes and to grow and multiply as usual; the fragments that contain none of the nucleus, although they can move around and apparently maintain life for a while, are unable to feed, or at least to assimilate their food ; they are unable to grow and unable to multiply; Fig. 18. They have thus lost the most essential features of life, since they have lost the constructive power by which protoplasm can assimilate and grow. These experiments, repeated many times over, show that the com- plete life of a cell is impossible with- out the presence of a certain amount of nuclear material, but if nuclear matter is present, the cell can carry on its complete life, even though the nucleus is itself cut into many pieces. Such experiments, of course, demonstrate very conclusively that life functions cannot be carried on by protoplasm alone, but only by proto- plasm in combination with nuclear substance. The Nucleus in Heredity. — It is well to anticipate here one further fact that demonstrates the great significance of the nucleus and chromatin. As we shall notice on a later page, nearly all animals and plants show a form of reproduction in which cells from two different individuals, male and female, combine. This is known as sexual reproduction or fertilization. When this union takes place, it is not the whole cells that com- bine but only the nuclei; or still more accurately, it is the chromatin material of the cells that combines rather than the whole nuclei. The reconstructed cell contains chromatin ma- FIG. 18. — STYLONYCHIA. A SINGLE-CELLED ANIMAL If cut along the lines AB and CD, only the middle piece con- tains any nuclear matter; this alone develops into a complete individual, the other fragments soon dying; n, the two nuclei. 48 BIOLOGY terial from both of the cells which entered into the combination. Now inasmuch as, after this combination, the offspring which arises from the cell thus formed by the union of the two parental cells inherits characteristics from both parents, and inasmuch as the only part of the original sex cells which enters into the union is the chromatin, it follows that the chromatin material itself is the bearer of heredity, and that in these little chromatin threads, minute as they are, there must be a complexity suffi- cient to contain the features of inheritance that are handed on from generation to generation. These facts give at least some idea of the separate properties of cell substance and nucleus. The cell substance by itself has the functions of irritability and conductility ; but not of assimi- lation, growth, or reproduction. These latter functions can be carried on only when a nucleus is present. WHAT IS MEANT BY PROTOPLASM It has become evident by this time that the original con- ception of protoplasm has quite disappeared. Indeed, if we ask to-day just what is meant by protoplasm, the question becomes very difficult to answer. We can no longer look upon it as simply the jelly-like substance within the cell in which the nucleus lies embedded, for it is evident that although this substance has the properties of irritability and conductility, it does not have the properties of assimilation and growth. If we wish still to call protoplasm the physical basis of life, we must extend the term to include the nucleus as well as the sub- stance outside of the nucleus, since without the nucleus, protoplasm is unable to carry on life processes. If, however, we include, in this term protoplasm, the centrosome, and the nucleus with its chromosomes, it becomes evident that proto- plasm has quite lost its original significance. It is no longer the homogeneous substance, and can no longer be looked upon as a chemical compound, but is on the other hand a mechanism with a number of distinct, though closely correlated parts. CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY 49 The explanation of its activities can no longer be regarded as a chemical problem simply, but must be in a measure a mechanical problem as well. This conception totally alters the significance of the phrase "the physical basis of life" and puts the prob- lem of the mechanical theory upon a decidedly new footing. To-day biologists are gradually giving up the use of the term protoplasm as confusing and misleading, replacing it by more definite terms which refer directly to the different parts of the cell. So now we find coming into general use the terms cytoplasm and karyoplasm (see page 32) to cover what was formerly called protoplasm. Both cytoplasm and karyoplasm are necessary and must act together in order to show the general characters of life. That reproduction may occur, the chromatin, and per- haps the centrosome also, are requisite. The mechanical theory is no longer tenable in the form in which it was originally advocated and discussed. That position has been necessarily abandoned since the studies of more recent years have demonstrated that protoplasm is not a homogeneous substance and cannot be regarded simply as a chemical com- pound. It is, on the contrary, a very complex mixture of sub- stances, forming a complicated machine in which the parts are most intricately interrelated and adjusted. While chemical forces may be regarded as sufficient to manufacture almost anything in the way of chemical compounds, they are not adapted to the manufacture of such a mechanism as living protoplasm has been proved to be. This change in the attitude of biologists has been brought about mainly through the minute study of the nucleus and the constantly increasing recognition of its great importance in the life of the cell. Are There Life Units Simpler Than Cells?— As we have learned, the cell is by no means a simple structure but a compli- cated mechanism. The question inevitably arises whether the cell is the simplest structure that can manifest life or whether it may not be analyzed into simpler units. This is one of the puzzling and unsettled problems of biology. Certainly some of 50 BIOLOGY the most minute living things (certain bacteria) seem to possess a body in which there is no definite nucleus, but in which the chromatin matter is more or less scattered without being aggre- gated into a nuclear mass, and this has led to the suggestion that perhaps the simplest life unit may be an excessively minute granule of chromatin with delicate fibrils extending from it, and that a cell is a combination of many of these minute elements. Other facts disclosed by the minute study of many animal cells, with very high magnifying powers and under special conditions, have pointed to a similar conclusion. As a result there has been advanced recently a theory that the cell is far from the simplest unit of life, and that it can be analyzed into a great number of minute elements called "chromidial units," each made of a granule of chromatin with fibers of linin radiating from it. According to this theory the whole cell is made of a network of linin fibers with granules at the nodes, each granule thus representing a life unit far simpler than a cell. This has been called the "protomitomic network." This protomitomic theory is as yet only a matter of speculation, and its chief interest to-day is in the fact that it suggests that the cell may be far from the simplest unit manifesting life. Whether this new suggestion be established or not, it seems certain that the manifestation of life requires the presence of three elements: (1) chromatin material, (2) delicate fibrils radiating from it, and (3) of a liquid material in which the other parts are embedded. As yet we know of nothing simpler than a combination of these three that is able to manifest all the properties of life. LABORATORY WORK ON CELLS A satisfactory study of cells requires familiarity with the microscope and considerable skill in microscopic methods. Little can be wisely undertaken by elementary students, beyond the examination of prepared specimens, properly stained, which should be furnished by the instructor. Drawings should be made by the student in all cases. The cellular structure of animal tissues may be studied in the following preparations: — Blood. — A small drop of frog's blood in a little normal solution (.9% CELLS AND THE CELL THEORY 51 NaCL) examined with a 1/6 inch objective, will show blood cells, the red cells having nucleii. Cartilage. — Mounted sections of cartilage will show nearly rounded cells, embedded in a very thick mass of cell wall, the thickened cell wall forming the intercellular substance, or basis of the cartilage. Bone. — Mounted sections will show cells lying in irregular spaces, within a hard secreted mass of intercellular substance in which mineral salts have been deposited. The cellular structure of plants may be studied by the following prepara- tions:— Cork or wood sections show plant tissue made of numerous cells of varying shape. In these sections the cell walls only appear. A section of a growing root tip. Longitudinal sections of Podophyllum, which are particularly good, should be furnished. These sections, if properly stained, will show the cell contents as well as the cell walls. The protoplasm and nucleus may be seen and drawn. In particularly good specimens, stained with iron haematoxylin, the chromatin in the nucleus may be seen with an oil immersion, 1/12 inch objective. For the study of protoplasm Spirogyra is a favorable object. The student, after studying the normal specimen, should treat it with a little glycerine, which will cause the protoplasm to shrink away from the cell wall so that it can be seen. The movement of the protoplasm within the cell is best seen in the long internodal cells of Chara or Nitella. It may also be seen in the stamen hairs of Tradescantia. Ci'iary motion may be studied best by cutting off a bit of the edge of the gill of a fresh-water clam, and examining with a high-power objective. It may also be shown by scraping the roof of a frog's mouth with a scalpel and mounting the scrapings in a little normal fluid. BOOKS FOR REFERENCE WILSON, The Cell in Development and Inheritance, Macmillan Co., New York. BAILEY, Text-book of Histology, Wm. Wood, Philadelphia, Pa. STOHR, Text-book of Histology, P. Blakiston's Son, Philadelphia, Pa. DAHLGREN and KEENER, Principles of Animal Histology, Macmillan Co., New York. MELL, Biological Laboratory Methods, Macmillan Co., New York. HERTWIG, Die Zelle und Die Gewerbe, Gustav. Fischer, Jena. CALKINS, Protozoology, Lea and Febiger, Philadelphia, Pa. BERNARD, Some Neglected Factors in Evolution, G. P. Putnam's Sons, New York. CHAPTER III UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS IN order to become familiar with the general properties of living things, we will study the structure and functions of some of the simplest organisms. Those that are studied in this chap- ter are all microscopic, and belong to the group of unicellular organisms sometimes called animalculae. ANIMALS The first organisms to be studied are undoubtedly to be regarded as animals. AM(EBA Size and Shape. — The Amoeba (Gr. amoibos — changing) is a microscopic animal found both in fresh and salt water. The most common species averages about 1/100 of an inch in diam- eter, but the size varies in different species. With perseverance they may be discovered in nearly all bodies of water where there is mud and slime. One of the best methods of procuring them for study is to collect water plants (Ceratophyllum) or even pond- lily leaves, and to place them in dishes of water until they decay. After a couple of weeks or so a brown scum appears and an examination of this scum usually shows Amoebce in abundance. Under the microscope the Amoeba is seen to be a single cell without definite form, the same animal undergoing constant changes in outline. Lobes are thrust out first in one direction and then in another (Fig. 19), and as soon as one lobe is protruded the contents of the body begin to flow into it and may continue to flow until the whole body substance has passed into the lobe, other lobes being formed in the meantime. By a continual pro- trusion of such lobes and the flowing of the body into them, the Amoeba has a slow motion. These lobes are thus used as organs of locomotion and are called pseudopodia (Gr. pseudos = false -f pous = foot). 52 UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 53 There has been considerable speculation as to the forces which produce pseudopodia, and various attempts have been made to explain them by purely physical forces. It has been suggested that they are due to the adhesion of the sticky substance of which the animal is made, to the object upon which it rests. ec FIG. 19. — AMCEBA PROTEUS A, the animal in its natural condition; B, an animal that has swallowed a long filamentous plant; C, the animal in the state of division. cv, contractile vacuole; ex, remains of undigested food; ec, ectoplasm; p, protoplasm. en, endoplasm; Another suggestion is, that the pseudopodia are due to changes in surface tension produced by the currents in the body as they flow to and fro. Still another theory seeks to explain the forma- tion of pseudopodia by stereotropism (Gr. stereos = a solid + trope =a turning), the attraction of a solid body for living tissue, which is supposed to cause the body of the animal to flow from one point to another of the surface upon which it rests. There is also the theory of chemical attraction. 54 BIOLOGY However, the production of these pseudopodia cannot be satisfactorily explained by any of these means; enough careful study of the Amceba in motion has been made to show that the pseudopodia may be thrust out in any direction, either horizon- tally or vertically; and when thrust out vertically they may be bent forward until they come in contact with the surface on which the animal rests and then become attached. Their motion has to be explained by an active power of the living substance. This power on the part of the living substance has been called contractility, and it cannot be explained as due to any physical force like surface tension, adhesion, or chemical attraction, but is due rather to active contraction which must be regarded as a general function of the protoplasm of a living cell. Structure. — The body of Amoeba is made up of a transparent mass of protoplasm, in which there may be distinguished an outer clearer layer, called ectoplasm (Gr. edos = outside + plasma), and an inner, more granular mass called endoplasm (Gr. endon = within + plasma). No very definite line can be drawn between them, the difference being due chiefly to the presence of granules in the interior and their absence from the outer layer. These granules are in motion, slowly circulating within the animal, and thus showing the existence of currents in the protoplasm. When the pseudopodia are protruded, the first change is the protrusion of a lobe of the ectoplasm; after which the granules can be seen flowing into the lobe until finally the whole of the endoplasm may flow into the extruded lobe. Many of these granules represent food in various stages of digestion, some of them being digested food and others un- digested refuse. Among them may be found drops of clear liquid with a bit of digested food in their center. Besides these granules, two more definite bodies are always found. One (Fig. 19 ri), the nucleus, is a small rounded body near the center of the animal, but not fixed in position, since it moves with the protoplasmic current. This is one of the struc- tural parts of the animal, not, like most of the granules, merely UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 55 extraneous material, and is always present in the living animal. The other body commonly found is the contractile vacuole (Lat. vacuus = empty) (Fig. 19 cv). This is a clear, pulsating drop, at one moment appearing as a good-sized sphere, and the next contracting and disappearing, to reappear again. It is thought that when it contracts, its contents, which are liquid, are forced out of the Amoeba's body through minute openings that appear in its sides. These pulsations, which are fairly regular, plainly indicate the performance of some important function. Assimilation and Growth. — When the Amceba comes in con- tact with a small plant or other bit of food, the pseudopodia flow around and over it so that the food is taken bodily inside the animal. The food may be taken in at any point on the surface of the Amoeba's body, though more frequently it is engulfed by the anterior pseudopodia. As shown in Fig. 19 B, particles of food longer than the whole animal may be ingested. After a time the bit of food thus ingested begins to show signs of disintegration. It loses its sharp outline and becomes slowly softened and dissolved. This change is produced by the action of certain fluids which the animal secretes, and is a process of digestion. The nutritious portions become in time absorbed by the protoplasm and converted into new Amoeba substance; the last process being assimilation. The refuse finds its way eventually to the surface of the animal, a temporary opening- appears and the Amoeba crawls away, leaving the refuse behind it; Fig. 19 ex. Any part of the body may thus serve for the ingestion of food or the ejection of refuse, although the food is commonly taken in at the anterior end, and the refuse ejected from the posterior end. Respiration. — Amoeba is not only carrying on a process of assimilation, by which new substances are built up, but is also at the same time carrying on a process of disintegration, by which the complex substances are broken down. This latter is based upon oxidation or union with oxygen. As the result of oxidation there is always formed carbon dioxid gas (C02) as a 5C BIOLOGY waste product, which must be eliminated. The Amoeba is, therefore, obliged to absorb oxygen gas from some source and to eliminate carbon dioxid gas. This process of absorbing and eliminating gases is known as respiration. In the Amoeba there appear to be no special respiratory organs, although possibly the contractile vacuole performs this function. But the body of the animal is so small that special respiratory organs are unnecessary, since gas is readily absorbed directly through the surface of the body from the water in which the animal lives, and carbon dioxid is as readily eliminated into the water. A respiratory function is thus developed, but no distinct respira- tory organs. The elimination of carbon dioxid gas, since it is the getting rid of a waste product of metabolism, is not only part of the function of respiration, but belongs also to the func- tion of excretion. Excretion. — As the result of this disintegration there arise in the Amoeba disintegration products which are waste materials and must be eliminated from the body. These products are primarily three : carbon dioxid gas, water, and a product contain- ing nitrogen, and related to urea which is excreted by the kid- neys of higher animals. The function of getting rid of these waste products is called excretion. In Amoeba the gas and the water are • excreted directly into the surrounding water, either through the general surface of the body or by the contrac- tile vacuole. The urea is probably eliminated by the contractile vacuole. It should be clearly recognized that the elimination of the un- digested portions of the food, mentioned on page 55, is not excretion. These undigested parts of the food, though sometimes called "excreta," have never become part of the Amoeba's body and are simply foreign bodies that have been rejected as useless. True excretion, on the other hand, always refers to the elimina- tion of the products of dissimilation. Relation to Water. — Protoplasm requires water for its activi- ties. Ordinary active living matter contains 60% to 80% of UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 57 water, and some forms of protoplasm much more, certain organisms containing over 95%. When dormant, protoplasm may remain alive with a far smaller percentage, dried seeds containing as little as 8%. Some animals also may be dried (dessicated) and still retain their vitality for a long time. This is true of many of the microscopic, unicellular animals and also of some of the higher types (e. g., Hydatina; see Fig. 116). In all such cases life activities are suspended but will be resumed when the animal imbibes water. Irritability. — The Amoeba has no sense organs nor does it have any nervous system. It is difficult or impossible to deter- mine positively whether it has any conscious sensations, but it certainly has the power of reacting when stimulated, thus showing that it possesses irritability. Reaction to contact (Thigmotropism) (Gr. thigma = touch + trope = a turning). — If the moving Amoeba is touched by a solid object, the part touched draws away from the object, new pseudopodia being thrust' out in another direction. If, however, the object be a particle of food, the animal is differently affected and the pseudopodia flow around it so as to engulf it. Reaction to chemicals (Chemotropism) (Gr. chemesa = chemis- try + trope ) . — If certain chemicals are brought in contact with the Amoeba, it moves off in some other direction. Sugar, lactic acid, sodium chloride, and many other substances have this effect. Reaction to heat (Thermotropism) (Gr. thermos = heat -{-trope). —The activities of the Amoeba are directly dependent upon tem- perature. At a temperature of freezing, no activities are mani- fest. If the temperature is raised the activities begin and become more active with the increase in temperature up to a certain point, about 85° F. If warmed still more, they become less active, and when heated to about 90° F. the activities cease en- tirely. At about 105° F. the protoplasm is coagulated and the animal killed. If a warm or hot object is brought near an active Amosba the animal moves away from it. 68 BIOLOGY Reaction to light (Phototropism) (Gr. photos - light -f- trope).— If a strong light is directed upon an Amoeba from one side, it will move away from the light. A strong, white light may cause the animal to stop moving. Reaction to electricity (Electropism) (Eng. electro -f- Gr. trope).— If an electric current is passed through an Amoeba, it contracts on the side of the positive pole of the current and moves toward the negative pole. In all these cases the Amceba reacts to a stimulus. But there are other things which are irritable and react to a stimulus in a purely mechanical fashion. Gunpowder is also irritable, since it will react to heat with an explosion. A locomotive is irri- table, since it will react to a touch upon its throttle valve. The Amoeba certainly reacts in a more complex and more varied manner, but the question inevitably arises whether the action may not be simply that of a bit of machinery responding to its appropriate stimulus. There is no definite answer to this ques- tion that can yet be given. Reproduction. — As the Amoeba by assimilation converts its food into new protoplasm, it inevitably increases in size. If this went on without interruption there would be no limit to the size of the animal. But after growing for a time, a constric- tion appears in the middle of the body which deepens until it finally divides the animal into two parts; Fig. 19 C. Each -of the resulting parts is like the other and each like the original, except in size. It is the nucleus that seems to take the lead in this process of division, which is one of great complexity. This will be described in the next chapter, for it goes through the complicated series of changes known as karyokinesis (Gr. karyon = nucleus + kinesis = movement) described on page 85. As a result of this division there arise two animals, evidently alike, each of which now moves away and lives an independent life. This method of reproduction, by which the animal divides into two practically equal parts, is called fission. A second method of reproduction sometimes occurs in UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 59 Amoeba. This is very unusual, however, and has been seen by only one observer (Sheel). In this method the animal draws in its pseudopodia, assumes a spherical form and secretes around itself a thin shell called a cyst. Inside this cyst the nucleus divides into many parts, some five or six hundred nuclei thus finally arising by division. After this the rest of the substance divides so that each nucleus finally becomes surrounded by a little protoplasm, the contents of the cyst coming thus to con- sist of some hundreds of little bodies, each with its nucleus. Eventually the cyst bursts and the little cells escape, each being now a minute Amoeba, which has only to grow, to be like the original. This method of reproduction is also evidently a divi- sion. It is a type of division called spore formation. The whole process takes two and a half to three months, and the condi- tions which bring it about are unknown. FIG. 20. — SINGLE-CELLED ANIMALS RELATED TO AKKEBA A, Difflugia, an Ama>ba-\ike animal with a shell made of pebbles; B and C, Podophrya and Acineta, animals with stiff protruding tentacles of protoplasm; /, food; D, Arcella, an Amoeba-like animal with a secreted shell. PARAMBCIUM Paramedum can usually be found in the same localities as Amoeba and can easily be obtained by allowing lily pads to decay in a dish of water. A quantity of living organisms soon 60 BIOLOGY appears in the scum that forms on the surface, and among them may be seen some minute white specks, just visible to the naked eye, each one of which is a Parame- dum; Fig. 21. Like the Amoeba, it is a single cell, and like the Amoeba also, it is made up of protoplasm consisting of an outer, somewhat clear ectoplasm and an inner, more granular endoplasm. The Paramedum has a body which, although flexible, is somewhat rigid and elastic, and, unlike the Amoeba, always tends to preserve a definite form. It is elongated, somewhat blunter at one end than the other, and in its motion carries the blunt end forward. The protoplasm has no power of protruding pseudopodia, and the animal therefore does not change its shape like the Amoeba. Upon one side, posterior to the middle of the body, there is a groove extending obliquely backward. This is the oral groove (og), at the bottom of which there is an opening leading to a short tube which extends through the ectoplasm into the endoplasm. The opening is the mouth, and the tube is known as the oesophagus or gullet; oe. Locomotion. — The whole of the outer surface of the animal is covered with numerous, fine, threadlike projections of protoplasm, protruding from the ectoplasm into the water. These are called cilia and are capable of rapid motion back CV ex FIG. 21. — PARAMECIUM AURELIA ci, cilia; cv, contractile vacuole; ex, excreta; m, mouth; mic, micronucleus ; mn, macronucleus; mb, membranella; oe, 03sophagus; og, oral groove. UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 61 and forth. Ordinarily in life, they are directed somewhat back- wards, and as a result of this position, when they beat back and forth they cause the propulsion of the animal forward through the water with a uniform motion. When the cilia are directed forward, their beating back and forth will cause the animal to move backward. At the same time with their back-and-forth motion they beat slightty to one side, causing the animal to rotate slowly on its long axis as it moves either forward or back- ward. Exactly how these cilia are able to move is not known, but a power of automatic vibration is always characteristic of these organs. Lining the tube called the oesophagus, leading from the mouth, there are special cilia, longer than the rest and united to form a vibrating membrane known as membranella ; Fig. 21 mb. The function of this mass of fused cilia is to guide the food from the mouth down through the oesophagus into the body cavity. The direction in which the cilia point, and con- sequently the direction of the motion they produce, are affected by a variety of external condi- tions, for the Paramecium, like the Amoeba, is irritable and its motions are regulated by the surrounding conditions. Structure. — The ectoplasm of the Paramecium is somewhat clearer than the endoplasm, but it contains large numbers of minute threadlike organs known as trichocysts (Gr. trix = hair + cystis = bag); Fig. 22 tr. These may be discharged from the animal; and they ap- pear to be organs of offense or defense, since they apparently contain a small quantity of poison by which the animal may kill or paralyze its prey or its enemies. On the very outside of the ectoplasm is an extremely thin mem- FlG. 22. — A BIT OF THE OUTER EDGE OF THE PARAMECIUM (HIGHLY MAGNIFIED) (Modified from Maier.) CM, cuticle; ec, ectoplasm; en, endoplasm; fv, food vacuole; tr, trichocyst. 62 BIOLOGY brane known as the cuticle (cu), through which the cilia pro- trude. This is ordinarily invisible and can only be seen under special conditions. It is a protective covering which makes the body a little more resistant than it otherwise would be. The endoplasm fills the rest of the body and is very highly granular, containing large numbers of food masses in various stages of di- gestion. The nucleus is double, showing a large macronucleus* (Fig. 21 win), and near it a small micronucleusf, mic. These two bodies lie close together near the mouth and hold fairly constantly their relative positions in the body of the animal. Two contractile vacuoles (cv) are found in the common species of Paramedum, one at each end. These vacuoles connect with the different parts of the body by a number of minute radiating canals, six or ten in number, which extend in all direc- tions. Certain liquids are, apparently, poured into these canals from the living protoplasm and through them flow into the vacuoles, which increase in size until they reach a certain mag- nitude and then suddenly contract and discharge their contents to the exterior, probably through minute openings. The con- traction of the vacuoles is fairly regular, varying in rapidity with the temperature; the two vacuoles do not contract simul- taneously, but alternate with each other. These organs, as in the case of the Amoeba, are probably associated with the func- tion of respiration and excretion. Assimilation and Growth. — The food of the Paramedum con- sists chiefly of minute bacteria. These are driven into the mouth by the action of the cilia, and by the membranella in the ossophagus, and then guided down the oesophagus to its inner end. Here the bacteria collect in a little drop of water. The oesophagus then contracts and pinches off this little drop con- taining the bacteria, and thus forms what is called a food vacu- ole, which enters into the general mass of the endoplasm and follows the movement of the protoplasm around the body. The digestive juices are secreted and gradually digest the bac- * Gr. macros = large. f Gr. micros = small. UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 63 teria, the nutritious portions of which are absorbed by the body and assimilated into new Paramecium substance. The un- digested refuse portion is eventually discharged at the posterior end of the body on one side. There is no perrrmnent opening here, but whenever material is to be rejected a temporary opening appears, at the point shown at Fig. 21 ex, and the refuse material is discharged into the water. The process by which food is used, including the absorption of oxygen and the excre- tion of waste products, as well as the oxidation of the food itself, is essentially identical with that in the Amoeba. As the result of the process, the food material is eventually assimilated into new Paramecium substance, and the animal grows, increas- ing in size until it is ready for reproduction. Irritability. — Paramecium is totally lacking in sensory organs or in a nervous system, but like the Amceba it reacts to a variety of stimuli. If an injurious stimulus is applied to one side of it, the animal will reverse its cilia and move away from the irritat- ing stimulus. It may move backward or it may turn its forward end in any direction and move off to one side. It is attracted by certain chemical stimuli and repelled by others. It is affected by heat in the same way as the Amoeba. It is slightly affected by an electric current, but is not affected by ordinary light, although the so-called ultra-violet rays have an influence upon it. These various reactions give to Paramecia an appear- ance of conscious sensation, and it appears as if they had the power of volition to enable them to avoid irritating or unpleasant conditions. But the facts do not necessarily prove this, for it is possible that these reactions are ^only mechanical responses to stimuli, such as might be found in other machinery. The responses, however, are so complicated, and so resemble those of truly conscious animals, that it leads one to suspect that they are actually conscious functions. Reproduction. — The ordinary method of reproduction of the Paramecium is by division (fission) similar to that of Amoeba, although it is more complicated, since the animal is more com- 64 BIOLOGY .m plex in structure. The first step in the process is the elongation and division of the micronucleus into two parts, one of which comes to lie at each end of the animal; Fig. 23. This is followed by a similar elongation and division of the macronu- cleus. The oesophagus produces a little bud which develops into a new oesopha- gus, and then this and the old one move apart, so that the latter advances to the front part of the body, and the former lies in the posterior part. A new mem- branella develops in the oesophagus. Two new contractile vacuoles make their ap- pearance, one just in front of, and 'one just behind, the middle line of the body. Meantime a constriction has been mak- ing its appearance, which gradually deep- ens, cutting the animal into two parts by a cross division. The two halves thus produced separate from each other and swim away to live an independent life. It should be noted that in this reproduction each of the important parts of the animal divides, so that each of the two new individuals has a part of each organ which the original Para- medum possessed. This multiplication by division may go on almost indefinitely if the animal is properly fed and placed under favorable conditions. Ordinarily it will occur about once in twenty-four hours, although the frequency may vary, becoming greater or less with varying conditions of food and temperature. A continuous reproduction of this kind has been followed for over 2500 successive divisions. Whether it can go on indefinitely if the conditions were favorable is not known. It is known, however, that under ordinary conditions this power of reproduction gradually becomes less and less, and finally tends to disappear altogether. It is believed that in nature FIG. 23. — PARAME- C1UM IN PROCESS OF DIVISION m, mouth; mac, macro- nucleus; mic, micronucleus. UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 65 this disappearance of the power of multiplication and the nat- ural disappearance of the race is prevented by the occurrence of another process known as conjugation (Lat. con = together + jugare = to join). Conjugation. — Two individual Paramecia come together and place themselves side by side, adhering to each other as shown in Fig. 24 a. They do not actually fuse together, but remain at- tached. The micronucleus in each undergoes a series of changes which results in its dividing into several parts, three of which degenerate and disappear; c. Soon the fourth divides again into two, one of which is slightly larger than the other; d. The smaller part resulting from this last division passes over into the other of the two conjugating individuals, the two animals thus exchanging nuclear matter with each other, as shown by the arrows in d. This small piece of the micronucleus, thus exchanged by each individual, unites in each case with the larger piece of the nucleus remaining in the other individual, and the two combine to form a new nucleus, a fusion nucleus, shown at /. The animals now separate, each of them carrying off in itself a bit of the micronucleus from the other individual. The old macronucleus next disintegrates and disappears (f), and the fusion nucleus divides into eight parts (g) , three of which soon degenerate. One of the five that are left remains as a micro- nucleus, while the other four become macronuclei, at h. At this stage of the process each Paramedum has one micronucleus and four macronuclei. Next the micronucleus divides into two, and the entire animal divides at once into two separate parts, giving one-half of the micronucleus to each part. This gives two individuals, each with a micronucleus and two macronuclei ; i to k. The process is again repeated, the micronucleus and the whole animal, except the macronuclei, dividing; the result is two more individuals, each containing one micronucleus and one macronucleus; I to m. This brings the animal back to its original condition, and now the ordinary process of fission begins and may go on again indefinitely, both micro- and macro-nuclei 66 BIOLOGY FIG. 24. — CONJUGATION OF PARAMECIUM ption of the various stages, see text; m cleus; n, the micronucleus. (Modified from Maupas.) For the description 9f the various stages, see text; m, in all cases represents the macronu- "~ed fron UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 67 dividing with each subsequent cell division. Apparently the purpose of this conjugation is an interchange of the material present in the micronucleus; for it will be seen that after con- jugation each of the resulting animals contains nuclear material derived from the micronucleus of the other individual as well as from its own The Life Cycle of Paramecium.— We usually think of the life history of higher animals as marked off in definite life cycles. For example, from the egg of the hen develops the chick, which grows into an adult hen and produces another egg and thus starts the process over again. Such a life cycle we speak of as comprising a single generation, and by the term individual we refer to all the stages of the life of the organism between one point in the cycle and the next similar point. When we attempt to think of the Paramecium in a similar way, we find the case so modified that the terms are somewhat difficult to apply. But still in the Paramecium we can recognize a life cycle some- what similar to that of other organisms. We shall learn in a later chapter that the life of an animal like a hen begins with a single cell, which, dividing by a process similar to that we have just studied in the Paramecium, gives rise to a large number of cells; see Fig. 15. These, however, remain attached to form the individual which we speak of as the chick, which grows into the hen, and which is thus composed of large numbers of cells. This individual continues a separate existence and eventually a single cell is separated from it to form another egg and to start the process over again, in a new individual. Now if we compare these facts with those just seen in the Paramecium, we shall find that the life cycle of the Paramecium is as follows: Starting in the cycle at the point where two ani- mals separate after conjugation, there begins a series of cell divisions which rapidly increases the number of cells. The cells at once separate from each other, become perfectly independent, swimming apart as quite isolated animals, In this respect the development of the Paramecium differs very markedly from 68 BIOLOGY that of the higher animals where the cells remain attached. But the process of division is the same and may continue for a long time. Eventually, however, as we have already seen, this power of division by the simple process of fission becomes ex- hausted, and the multiplication tends to die out. We can per- haps compare this with the old age of a larger animal, for in old age we find division becoming less and less vigorous, until it finally ceases altogether and the whole generation of cells dies. Among the larger animals, to prevent the extermination of the race, a single cell, an egg, is set aside to start the process over again, thus beginning the new cycle. In the case of the Parame- tium, after the ordinary reproduction has gone on for a long time it becomes impaired in vigor and seems to be started over again by this process of conjugation. The process of conjugation, therefore, corresponds to reproduction by an egg in one of the larger animals or plants. Hence one life cycle of the Parame- dum lasts from one period of conjugation, through all the nu- merous successive divisions by ordinary fission, until again the conjugation occurs to start a new cycle. One generation, then, consists of all the members that arise between one conjugation and the next; and inasmuch as these animals may multiply almost indefinitely by ordinary division, it is evident that one generation of Parameda may consist of thousands of organisms scattered over a wide territory. It is evident, therefore, that the term individual in the case of the Paramedum cannot have the same significance that it has with the higher animals, since the individual of one of the higher animals would correspond to a combination of all of the different Parameda that arise from the division of any single cell that comes from a process of con- jugation, until again it enters into a process of conjugation with another cell. Conjugation thus starts a new generation or a new individual. We do not know how long a time may elapse between two successive conjugations in the case of a Paramedum, nor do we know the conditions which bring about the process. We are UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 69 even ignorant as to its exact purpose, although it apparently appears to be a process necessary to reinvigorate the race and prevent it from dying out under the ordinary conditions of environment. The process is evidently closely associated with sex reproduction in the higher animals and plants, which is to be taken up in a later chapter. We may even speak of the youth and maturity of a Paramecium; by the term youth meaning the period of rapid cell division that follows conjugation, and by maturity and old age, the period of slower cell division that appears later in the life cycle of the animal. Possibly we may say that the animal eventually dies of old age, by which we would mean that unless conjugation occurs the process of simple division is brought to an end by exhaustion. Whether old age, and therefore conjugation, are necessary in the life history of Paramecium is not yet settled. Experiments have seemed to show that under proper conditions fission may go on almost indefinitely, certainly up to 2500 cell divisions, without the necessity of conjugation, or without seeming to produce any impairment in the power of division. In the normal life of the individual it appears that conjugation is required, however, by some of the conditions of life. Paramedumy therefore, has a definite life cycle, although we do not know its possible length or the conditions which modify it. PLASMODIUM MALARIA As an example of a still more minute animal, we will study the malarial organism, Plasmodium malarice, which lives in the hu- man body. Human blood contains minute circular disks known as red blood corpuscles (see page 192), within which the malarial organisms may be found in persons who are suffering from malaria, or chills and fever. The organism first appears as an extremely minute body (Fig. 25 a), in shape somewhat like the Amoeba, though much smaller. It increases in size as shown by the successive figures a to e. After reaching a size which nearly fills up the red blood corpuscles, it breaks up 70 BIOLOGY ^T^Afc* £F f FIG. 25.— THE LIFE HISTORY OF THE MALARIAL ORGANISM This is shown in two cycles, the upper one taking place in the human red blood corpuscles, and the lower one in the mosquito. For description ol the individual stages, see text. (From various authors.) UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 71 into twelve to sixteen small spores, as is shown; / to g. The blood corpuscle now breaks to pieces and the spores are liberated into the liquid blood h. Each may then make its way into a new corpuscle and repeat again the history as already described. Although this animal in its general structure and shape is much like the Amoeba, its habits are totally different. While growing in the red blood corpuscles of the human body, it pro- duces the disease which is known as malaria, chills and fever, or fever and ague. The period when the chills occur corresponds to the time when the blood corpuscles have broken up and the spores are liberated into the blood. The organism may continue to repeat the above history time after time in the blood of the same person, the spores after being liberated entering into new corpuscles, and again repeating their life cycle almost indefinitely and prolonging the disease. There are three different species of the malarial organisms, distinguished by the different length of time required for their life cycles. The most common form takes 48 hours, a second species takes 72 hours, and a third is irregular. By the method of reproduction above described, this organism may multiply inside the blood of one person but is unable to pass to a second individual. Malaria is therefore not communi- cable as long as this process alone is repeated. But after a time, for some unknown reason, the organisms in the corpuscles assume two different forms shown in Figure 25 at g to i. One of them grows into a large rounded mass, while the other develops sev- eral long motile, thread-like bodies, which become detached. No further change occurs unless the patient is now bitten by a cer- tain kind of mosquito (Anopheles). If the blood of a patient is swallowed by this mosquito, the malarial organisms undergo a new series of changes. The thread-like bodies become de- tached from the mass that produces them, and one of them unites with one of the larger rounded masses, j and k. -This union is regarded as a sex union (see Chapter XII), the larger rounded mass being the female cell (or egg) and the thread-like body the male cell (or sperm) in the sexual union. After the thread-like 72 BIOLOGY body penetrates the egg, the nucleus it contains unites with the nucleus of the egg, shown at k and I. After this union the com- bined mass grows rapidly in size, I to o, and eventually breaks up into an immense number of minute spores, p, greatly in excess of those found at the stage g in human blood. These minute spores lodge in the salivary glands of the mosquito, and are ejected into the blood of the person bitten by the mosquito. Thus a new human individual is inoculated with the spores, which find their way into the blood corpuscles of the new victim and produce the disease. It is not the most common mosquito (Culex) that is concerned in this history, but one that is ordi- narily less abundant, a species called Anopheles. From these facts it follows that malaria will not occur in any locality unless this particular mosquito is present; and further, that only the mosquitoes which have previously bitten malarial patients will be able to carry the infection. It will thus be seen that the malarial organism passes through two stages in its life cycle, reproducing itself in each by the production of spores, though the spores are of two different kinds; and that at one stage there is a union of cells of unequal size, which may probably be regarded as a true sex union. All stages of its life are passed within the bodies of other animals, and it is thus wholly parasitic. The three different species of the malarial organism have similar life cycles, though differing slightly in details. The malarial organism passes through two stages, in its life cycle, each in different animals. Such a complicated history, in which there is more than one distinct stage, is known as a metamorphosis (Gr. meta = beyond + morphe = form). Many other animals have a metamorphosis, one of the best-known examples being that of the butterfly, which passes through the well-known states of egg, caterpillar, cocoon, and butterfly. Another example is the frog; see page 286. A metamorphosis is thus found both among higher animals and also among the lowest. UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 73 CHILOMONAS This is an example of a still more minute organism found very abundantly the world over in water among decaying leaves. From Figure 26 it will be seen that its structure is extremely simple. It has a slightly elongated oval body, with a little depression at one end, at the bottom of which food is taken into the animal, the depression serving as a mouth. There are no internal indications of organs, except a small nucleus. At one end are two filaments called flagella (Lat. flagellum = a whip), which have the power of lashing to and fro. By means of their lashing the Chilomonas is driven through the water. Chilomonas multiples by simply dividing FIG. ' 26. — into two, essentially in the CHILOMONAS A very mi- same manner as Amceba. nute, flagellate, unicellular ani- mal, found in PANDORINA stagnant water. Pandorina is an animal very similar in its general structure to Chilomonas, except that it is made up of a number of cells grouped together, instead of a single individual body; Fig. 28 A. The method by which this group is formed is simple. The animal starts as a single cell, which divides, but IVJ. *-' I . -1. VY V/ kJJLJ.-* VJTJJAJ * i.imJ-i-.**-' - -I • • . . i • J_ 1 /* ANIMALS, RELATED TO after division the parts, instead of CHILOMONAS separating at once, remain attached, A,Gymnodinium; B,Ceratium. i 11 • /• • i and there arises a group of sixteen cells attached together. They secrete a little mass of jelly around themselves and the flagella projecting through this jelly enable the whole spherical mass to be rotated as a unit. The individual members are somewhat independent of one another, but are attached so as to form one single unit. Such a group is called a colony. FlG. 27.— TWO SINGLE-CELLED 74 BIOLOGY Multiplication. — Reproduction of Pandorina is of two kinds: 1. Each of the cells of the colony divides into sixteen parts, which, however, remain attached together, mak- ing a cluster of sixteen groups of sixteen cells each. Then the whole colony breaks up, and each group of sixteen cells forms a new colony liv- ing independently of the others; Fig. 28 B. Thus, by simply dividing, the original colony produces sixteen others. 2. By the second method of reproduction a conjugation occurs. The cells of a colony break into either sixteen or thirty-two parts, and then the whole mass breaks to pieces, each cell separating, not only from the colony but from its sister cells. Among the hundreds of cells thus formed some are smaller than others; Fig. 28 C and D. After swimming around for a while one of the smaller and one of the larger cells unite with each other; Fig. 28 E and F. The combined mass then secretes a red shell or cyst about itself and remains dormant for a time, show- ing no signs of motility, H. Later, however, it resumes its activity and may divide into two or three parts, which then escape from the cyst and swim around for a time as single cells, called swarm spores, /. Eventually each divides into sixteen cells which remain together, forming a new colony like the, original, J H FIG. 28. — PANDORINA, A COMMON FRESH- WATER, COLONIAL, UNICELLULAR ANIMAL A, the animal in its adult condition. B, showing the method of reproduction by simple division, each cell dividing into sixteen parts and the whole colony breaking up into sixteen colonies. C to J shows the successive stages of reproduction accompanied by conjugation ; C, the larger of the unit- ing cells; D, the smaller ones;E, their conjugation; //, the dormant condition within the cyst. For de- scription, see text. UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 75 INTERMEDIATE ORGANISMS The organisms thus far described are always classed as ani- mals. We will now study two similar organisms, which stand midway between animals and plants. They are closely related, and yet one of them is not infrequently classed as a plant, while the other is almost always placed with the animals. PGRANEMA Peranema is a microscopic organism found in stagnant fresh water; Fig. 29 A. It is elongated and tapers slightly in front. At the narrower end, which is carried forward in locomotion, there projects a long motile flagellum, by the motion of which the animal is moved through the water. At the base of this flagellum is an opening in the animal, constituting a mouth, leading into a short cesophagal tube. At the bottom of this tube is a peculiar little rod-shaped organ, which apparently serves as a suck- ing organ for seizing food. Near by is a clear contractile vacuole. The proto- plasm of which the body is made is ex- FIG. 29.— Two SINGLE- tremely flexible, and the animal, instead CELLED ORGANISMS RE- of retaining its shape, shows a variety of irregular wavelike contractions pass- ing from end to end. A nucleus is present, and the animal moves either mother respects they are much by the motion of its flagella or by creeping somewhat after the fashion of the Amoeba. As it possesses a mouth and an resophagal tube, it lives on solid SEMBLINGBOTH ANIMALS AND PLANTS A, Peranema; B, 76 BIOLOGY food and thus resembles Paramecium and the other animals already described. EUQLENA Euglena (Fig. 29 B) greatly resembles Peranema in shape and structure. Like the Peranema, it has an elongated body, taper- ing, however, at both ends. One end carries a long, motile flagel- lum by means of which the animal moves through the water. It is made up of flexible protoplasm and goes through a series of contorted motions similar to those seen in Peranema. One or more contractile vacuoles are found near the base of the flagel- lum. The animal moves about either by its flagellum or by the creeping motion noticed in Peranema. It has also a reddish "eye spot" near the front end. Evidently, these two organisms are very closely related. In two respects, however, there is a striking difference, which has led to the classification of the Euglena by some biologists among the plants instead of among the animals. The Euglena probably possesses no true mouth and does not take in solid food, though this is disputed. Moreover, this animal is green, and since green coloring matter is one of the distinctive characters of plants, its presence in Euglena has led to much controversy regarding the classification of this organism. Peranema with its mouth and the animal habits should evidently be classed with the animals, whereas Euglena, with its green color, would naturally be classed with the plants; and yet their similarity would lead to classing them together. A further consideration of this subject will be given in a later chapter. PLANTS Although there is a difference of opinion in regard to the classification of Euglena and Peranema, there is none in regard to the organisms which are now to be described. The following organisms are always recognized as plants, although some of them, for reasons that will be given later, have certain charac- UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 77 ters that have caused biologists, in the past, to group them with animals. Modern scientists, however, are unanimous in opinion, grouping the following organisms among the plants. PLEUROCOCCUS Pleurococcus appears like a green stain, growing in abundance upon damp tree trunks, fence posts, or even damp rocks. Upon scraping off some of the material and examining it with a microscope it is found to consist of a great num- ber of small green cells. These (Fig. 30) are spherical, and contain no visible internal organs except a nucleus. The cells are found massed together into irregular bunches, but are not really attached together. As they grow in size they divide by fission in two parts, each of which divides subsequently, the new in- dividuals sometimes remaining at- tached, to form irregular masses which are easily shaken apart. No other method of reproduction is known. It is possible that this little plant is really a stage in the life of some higher plant whose develop- ment is not yet known, since it has been shown that some of the more complex plants have a stage in which they are simple green cells like Pleurococcus. Concerning this organism, however, nothing is known positively except that it occurs abundantly in damp places and, so far as known, has no other phase of its life than that already noticed. FIG. 30. — PLEUROCOCCUS a, a single cell; 6, one showing division by fission; c, a later stage of division. The plant in its grow- ing condition is bright green. 78 BIOLOGY SACCffAROM YCES— YEAST The yeast is a plant slightly smaller than Pleurococcus but resembling it in its general shape, although it differs in some important respects. It is made up of single cells, usually slightly oval in shape, although some- times they are elongated and occasionally spherical; see Fig. 31. These organisms are ex- tremely minute in size, not being more than 1/4000 of an FIG. 31.- YEAST CELLS inch in diameter. They are so showing budding and formation of groups small that almost no internal structure can be seen, although each one of them possesses a nucleus and a small vacuole which is not contractile; Fig. 32. As each of these bodies possesses a nucleus, it is a cell, and thus we see that the yeast is made up of clusters of single cells. Reproduction. — The method of reproduction of yeast is by the growth of buds on the side of the old cell. The bud appears first as a swelling, which grows until it is the size of the FIQ 32>_YEAST CELLS MORE HIGHLT original cell, and may then MAGNIFIED AND WITH INTERNAL break away and become an STRUCTURE SHOWN independent cell (Fig. 32), n, the nucleus; v, the vacuole; Of Several Of them may re- *» shows spores in the spore sac or ascus. _ • 11 u J j. 4-1^.^ t The figures show that in budding the nucleus mam attached together tor divide8j Kone portioil of it pa8Sing*into the bud some time, forming a group and the other of more or less independent cells. This process is called budding. UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 79 A second type of reproduction sometimes occurs in some species of yeast. Under conditions not yet clearly understood, the contents of a yeast cell breaks up into two, three, or four parts which become surrounded by thick walls; Fig. 32 s. These are called spores, or ascospores, because held in an ascus (Gr. ascus = sac) or sac, and eventually they are liberated by the breaking of the sac. Each spore is tnen capable of starting a new series of generations of ordinary yeast cells. The spores can resist drying and therefore serve to protect the yeast from adverse conditions. A comparison of Figures 30 and 31 will show that yeast and Pleurococcus greatly resemble each other in structure; but there is one important difference between them, for Pleurococcus is green and yeast is colorless. This difference in color makes a very great difference in their life; see page 131. Whereas Pleurococcus may grow luxuriantly upon a fence post, and even bare rocks, feeding upon the gases of the air, yeast is unable to live and grow unless it is fed upon some organic matter, like sugar. While yeast cells may be found widely distributed in the air, in the soil, and in the water, they grow only where they find organic food to eat, and chiefly in solutions containing sugar, like fruit juices, etc. Elsewhere, in the soil or air, while they may be alive, they are dormant. The chief function of yeast in nature is to convert sugars into carbon dioxid and alcohol. Sugar is produced in great quanti- ties by various fruits and vegetables, and is eventually attacked by the numerous yeasts that are floating in the air. After the yeasts have acted upon it, the sugar disappears and in its place can be found a gas, carbon dioxid (CO2), and a liquid, alcohol (C2H6O). This is called fermentation, and it is used extensively in the fermentative industries which produce alcoholic beverages, like beers, wines, ales, brandies, etc. The fermentation by yeasts is also made use of in the raising of bread. The yeast growing in the midst of bread dough produces bubbles of carbonic acid gas which cause the solid heavy dough to become light and 80 BIOLOGY spongy. The bread made from such dough is full of holes, and is more palatable and digestible than bread cooked from dough that has not been rendered light and porous (i.e., unleavened bread). In the case of bread raising and beer making, the yeast as a rule is intentionally planted in the material which is to be fermented. In the making of wines or the making of cider, yeast is not planted. In these cases, the grape juice or the apple juice is allowed to stand undisturbed, and the yeasts that are floating around in the air, known sometimes as "wild yeasts," have an opportunity of getting" into the juices, where they grow and produce fermentation. Thus although no yeast has been added to these materials, the fermentation is brought about by yeast exactly as if the yeast had intentionally been added. BACTERIA The simplest of all known living organisms are the Bacteria. These consist of the extremely minute organisms shown in Figure 33. Some of them are spher- ical, some are in the form of short rods or long threads, and some spiral. They are so minute that practically no o oo cooo FIG. 33.— BACTERIA A, rod-shaped form, Bacillus or Bacte- rium; 1, Diphtheria bacillus; B, spiral forms, Spirillum; C, spherical forms, Coccus; 2, Streptococcus; D, the method of multiplica- tion by division ; E, the formation of spores, s. FlG. 34. A DIAGRAM SHOWING THE RELATIVE SIZE OF THE POINT OF A FINE NEEDLE AND BACTERIA The small dots at the tip of the needle represent bacteria. internal structure can be seen. Some of them are not more than 1/50,000 of an inch in diameter; see Fig. 34. Some UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 81 FIG. 35. — BACTERIA WITH FLAGELLA A, flagella are distributed over the whole body, a condition called peritrichic; B, flagella grouped together in cluster at one end, called Jophotrichic; C, a single flagellum, monolrichic* bacteria (see Fig. 35) have minute flagella, which by lashing to and fro cause them to move. Beyond the points shown in the figures, there is very little to be said concerning the struc- ture of bacteria. Reproduction. — Bacteria all multiply, by fission, each dividing into two parts, which again divide when they have grown to the size of the parent cell. Spore Formation. — Some species of bacteria produce spores in the following man- ner: After growing for a time by division the contents of a single bacterium collect into a rounded mass which becomes surrounded by a hard resisting wall; see Fig. 33 E. This is set free by the breaking of the bac- terium that holds it and is then capable of starting a new series of generations. This clearly resembles the ascospore formation in yeast, except that there is no actual multiplication of indi- viduals, one bacterium giving rise to one spore only. The spores have resisting walls and are able to stand drying and a fairly high degree of heat. Their function is thus that of protecting the race from destruction by drying and heat rather than that of multiplication, the latter function being performed by the process of simple division. Bacteria are very widely distributed in nature. They are found in the air, in the soil, in all bodies of water, and, in fact, practically everywhere. They play an extremely important part in the life processes of nature through their relation to all forms of putrefaction, decomposition, and decay. The bacteria are important agents in maintaining the continued fertility of the soil, making it capable of producing crops year after year. A few species live as parasites within human bodies *Gr. peri = around Gr. lophos = tuft Gr. monus = one trix = hair. & BIOLOGY and th«ee of animals. These are pathogenic bacteria or disease germs. They cause many of our most serious contagious diseases like typhoid fever, tuberculosis, diphtheria, blood poison- ing, etc. Thus, although they are extremely minute, bacteria are agents of great importance in the world. It is hardly possible to imagine anything more simple in structure, but at the same time of greater importance, than bacteria. LABORATORY WORK The best method of obtaining material for laboratory work is to place in a number of glass jars or shallow dishes pond-lily leaves, leaves of other plants, algae of various kinds, or any other decaying organic material from ponds and ditches. Fill the dishes with water and allow them to stand undisturbed from one to several weeks. Various kinds of microscopic organisms will appear in the different dishes, from which the desired organ- ism can be chosen. Amoeba. — A brown scum will usually appear in a few days on the surface of the water covering the decaying organic material which is likely to contain Amoebae. When this scum is scraped from the leaves and studied under a 1/6 inch objective it will usually disclose small specimens of Amoeba. The animals should be studied alive and without any special treatment, since they are sufficiently transparent, and slow enough in their movements to show all the points in their anatomy, and nearly all the features mentioned in the text may be seen without difficulty. Paramedum. — These may be found in abundance in the scum from the decaying pond weeds after they have been left for a week or more. Many white, moving bodies, just visible to the naked eye, will be found in a drop of this scum, which should be studied with a 1/6 inch objective. The chief difficulty in studying them is due to their constant motion; various methods of holding them quiet may be used. A bit of filter paper under the cover glass will sometimes hold the individuals quiet in its meshes, or they may be held quiet under a cover glass by supporting it on a small bit of paper, just thick enough to hold them without crushing them. The animals are to be studied alive, and a little patient examination of several specimens will usually show most of the points of structure mentioned in the text. To bring out the nucleus, a very weak aqueous solution of methyl green should be run under the cover glass. If the solution is not too strong it will stain the nucleii green, before affecting the rest of the organism. Animals UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS 83 in the state of division may readily be found. Conjugation, however, is rare and cannot be studied by a class. The other unicellular animals mentioned in Chapter II may be commonly found with Amceba and Paramedum. They cannot always be obtained, however, and the student will often be obliged to omit them. Euglena should not be omitted, however, if any appear in the dishes of decaying pond weeds. Pleurococcus. — The best method of obtaining this for studyis to find some fence post or log which is covered with a green growth. This material scraped from the wood will usually prove to be a mass of Pleurococci. No special method of study is needed except to place a small quantity in a drop of water and study with a 1/6 inch objective. The structure can be readily seen and cells may be found showing division by fission. Yeast. — A cake of ordinary compressed yeast furnishes excellent material. A small quantity should be rubbed with a little water in a watch glass. A minute drop of this material diluted still further in water, and studied with a 1/6 inch, will show the structure of the yeast except the nucleus, which can only be made out by special methods. Many cells showing buds may be found in a fresh yeast cake. Such a yeast preparation usually contains grains of starch, which may be distinguished from the yeast by running a little iodine solution under the cover glass, which will turn the starch blue. The starch has nothing to do with the yeast, being added to the cake to give it body. A few drops of the yeast emulsion should be planted in several large test tubes containing a fermentable liquid. Pasteur's solution is best, but a little diluted molasses will serve. Pasteur's solution contains the following ingredients : — Water 837.60 c. c. Grape sugar 150 gms. Ammonium tartrate .......... 10 " Potassium phosphate 2 Calcium phosphate .2 " Magnesium sulphate .2 " 1000 If these tubes are placed in a warm place, 80° to 90° F., fermentation will soon begin, and after a few hours bubbles of CO2 may be seen rising through the liquid. After 12 hours a little of the scum or the sediment will show the actively growing yeast. This growing yeast should be carefully compared with the fresh, dormant yeast in the yeast cake. Bacteria, — Only a little work can be done without special methods which are complicated and difficult. Bacteria may be shown, however, as follows: 84 BIOLOGY Spread a bit of any decaying matter (the decaying pond weeds will do very well, or a bit of tartar scraped from the teeth) in as thin a film as possible upon a slide, dry in air or fix by heat by passing it twice through a gas flame. When thoroughly dry flood the slide with a solution of fuchsin or methylene* blue and allow to stain for two to five minutes. Then wash the stain off in running water, and place a cover glass over the stained mass on the slide. The bacteria appear under a high power objective as minute stained dots, or short rods. They are much smaller than yeast cells, and are only just visible with a 1/6 inch objective. Higher powers are needed to study them. BOOKS FOR REFERENCE BRONN, Klassen und Ordnung des Thierreichs, C. F. Winter, Leipzig. DAVIDSON, Practical Zoology, American Book Company, New York. HEGNER, Introduction to Zoology, Macmillan Co., New York. HEGNER, College Zoology, Macmillan Co., New York. HERTWIG, Manual of Zoology, translated by Kingsley, Henry Holt & Co., New York. JORDAN and PRICE, Animal Structures, D. Appleton Company, New York. MARSHALL, Microbiology, P. Blakiston's Son & Co., Philadelphia. PARK, Pathogenic Bacteria and Protozoa, Lea & Febiger, New York. PARKER, Elementary Biology, Macmillan Co., New York. PARKER and HASWELL, Text-book of Zoology, Macmillan Co., New York. PRATT, Invertebrate Zoology, Ginn & Co., Boston. *Methylene blue solution is made as follows: — Saturated alcoholic solution of methylene blue . . . 15 c. c. Potassium hydrate (1 : 10,000) 50 c. c. To make a 1 : 10,000 solution of KOH, add 1 c. c. of a 10% solution ,to 99 c. c. of water and then add 5 c. c. of this to 45 c. c. of water. CHAPTER IV CELL MULTIPLICATION AND THE CELLULAR STRUCTURE OF ORGANISMS BEFORE undertaking the study of the multicellular organisms we must study in detail the process by which cells multiply. We have already seen that the Amoeba, Paramecium, and other single-celled animals and plants have the power of dividing. Indeed all active, growing cells have the power of multi- plying by division. Although division seems a very simple process, in reality it is unexpectedly complex. The internal changes in the cell during division have been made out only by long study. While they differ in many small details, all cells agree in certain broad general facts. The process known as karyokinesis or mitosis (Gr. mitos = thread) is alike in outline in most cells and is as follows : — CELL DIVISION OR KARYOKINESIS * The Resting Cell. — In Figure 36^4. will be seen a cell in the condition of rest, before it has passed into the stage of division. It will be noticed that the centrosome is in the form of two minute granules, and that the chromatin inside of the nucleus is in the form of a diffused network. No other factors need concern us at the present time. 1. Prophase. — The first stage in the division involves both the nucleus and the centrosome. In the nucleus the chromatin assumes the form of a long thread sometimes known as the spireme. This condition, however, is only preliminary to the breaking up of the thread into a number of short pieces which are called chromosomes (Gr. chroma = color + soma — body) ; Fig. 36 B. The number of chromosomes which arise in the nucleus varies with different organisms but is constant for each species of organism and is always an even number. In the *As here described karyokinesis applies chiefly to animal cells. 85 BIOLOGY type represented in Figure 36, is invariably four. G FIG. 36. — DIAGRAM SHOWING THE SUCCESSIVE STAGES IN THE PROCESS OF KARYOKINESIS A, the resting cell before it enters into the process of cell division; H, the completed proc- ess after the cell has divided into two parts; ce, the centrosome; ch, the chromatin. For description of the different stages, see text. spindle, known as the equatorial chromosomes and the separation the number of chromosomes The second part of the first stage consists of the separation of the two gran- ules of the centrosome as shown at B. As these parts separate, they are seen to be connected by fibers form- ing what is called the spin- dle. The granules continue to move away from each other until they finally come to lie at opposite poles of the nucleus, form- ing the amphiaster (Gr. am- phi = both -f aster = star) as shown at D. They are still connected by the fibers of the spindle, which now pass into the nucleus itself; the nuclear membrane in the meantime has disap- peared. At the end of this phase the chromosomes have assumed a position midway between the two granules, lying on the mid- dle of the spindle, and at right angles to the line con- necting them, at E. They thus form a sort of plate be- tween the two poles of the plate. The formation of the of the centrosomes may take CELL MULTIPLICATION 87 place simultaneously, or one of them may precede the other; the relative order of these changes varies and is a matter of no especial importance. 2. Metaphase. — The second stage in cell division is a very important one and is really the key to the process. Each of the chromosomes splits lengthwise into two identical halves, which at first are parallel, as at D. This splitting of the chro- mosome into identical halves is for the purpose of dividing equally the chromatin material, so that the two cells which are to arise from the original cell may each contain one-half of the chromatin rods of the original cell. The fact that the chromosomes split lengthwise is of significance, for it is mani- fest that if the thread splits lengthwise, the two halves will be essentially identical, while if it should divide crosswise, the two halves would not be necessarily alike. In the equa- torial plate, at E, these eight chromosomes become slightly flattened and are drawn more closely together. 3. Anaphase. — In the third stage, the two halves of each chromosome begin to move apart. As shown at F, four of the chromosomes move away from the equatorial plate toward each of the two centrosomes. There is little doubt that the minute fibers which connect the poles of this spindle are con- cerned in the separation of these chromatin threads, though exactly how they work is not known. Finally, the separate halves of the chromatin thread are brought close to the minute granules lying at the two ends of the spindle, at G. 4. Telophase. — The last stage in the division simply com- pletes the process, for the essential feature of division has already occurred. The chromatin threads, which have come to lie near the pole of the spindle, now combine and form a network, at G, much like that present in the original nucleus, and a nuclear membrane forms around this mass of chromatin material at H. The minute granule within the center of the spindle pole is divided in two, either now or later; and thus a complete nucleus is produced with a centrosome beside it, 88 BIOLOGY containing two granules, at H; this nucleus is an exact repe- tition of the one with which we started. Meantime a division plane forms, passing through the cell midway between these reconstructed nuclei, and the division of the cell into two parts is now completed. There are thus produced two cells, identical with each other and identical with the original cell, each with similar chromatin material, since each contains half of the original chromosomes. By this process, therefore, the chromatin of the nucleus is continuous from one cell gen- eration to another. It will be evident that the essential purpose of this cell division is the splitting of the chromatin material into identical halves. It would seem much simpler for the cell to divide immediately into two parts without this long process; but this might not make the two parts equivalent. In order that they may be equivalent, the cell adopts the complicated process of karyokinesis. In the case described, the two final cells are practically of equal size; but even in instances where the cells finally produced are of very unequal size (Fig. 121), the amount of chromatin in each is the same. Since, therefore, the essential purpose of this process of karyokinesis is the splitting of the chromatin, it is evident that this material must be of extreme significance in the life of the cell. When we combine this knowledge with the fact mentioned in Chapter II, that the cell can carry on its life processes only when it has nuclear material, it becomes manifest that the nucleus, instead of being a negligible part of the cell, is really the cen- tral feature of its life. Nuclear Division without Cell Division. — As a rule, almost immediately after the nucleus completes its division, the body of the cell divides so that a cell does not contain more than a single nucleus for any length of time. Occasionally, however, the division of the cell body is delayed and the nucleus divides a second time, and perhaps several times, before the cell body divides, the result being one mass of protoplasm containing CELL MULTIPLICATION 89 several nuclei. In most instances the division of the cell is simply delayed and takes place later, so that finally the con- dition of a single nucleus in each cell is resumed. This occurs in the dividing egg of insects, for example. In some instances, however, the cell body does not divide at all, and the continued division of the nucleus produces a connected mass of proto- plasm with many nuclei. This occurs, for example, in some molds shown in Figure 42 E, in which there is no sign of cell division, although there are many nuclei. Such a condition is called a syncytium (Gr. syn = together + cytos = cell) and is sometimes described as acellular. This multicellular state with incompleted cell division is rare, for in most instances the division is completed promptly. Amitosis. — While division by karyokinesis is the common method of cell division among all organisms, there are some instances where cells divide without going through these stages. This is most likely to occur in the old age of the cell when its vitality begins to de- cline. In these cases, the nucleus di- vides directly ; sometimes being simply pinched into two parts (Fig. 37), some- times being compressed into a middle plate which divides into two halves and then separates, and sometimes forming two nuclear membranes in- side of the original membrane which then ruptures and permits the escape of the new nuclei. In these cases, it frequently happens that, though the nucleus divides, the cell body does not divide, so that 'there re- sults a cell with more than one nucleus. This process of di- vision is called amitosis (Gr. a = without + Lat. mitos = thread), and it is thought to indicate a decline in the vigor of the cells. d FIG. 37. — DIAGRAM SHOW- ING THE PROCESS OP NUCLEAR DIVISION BY AMITOSIS (Modified from Wheeler.) 90 BIOLOGY UNICELLULAR AND MULTICELLULAR ORGANISMS All of the organisms thus far studied have been made up of single cells, each cell being independent and capable of carrying on all life processes within itself, although many of them are quite complex, having several organs and much variety; see Fig. 38. In contrast to these unicellular organisms we shall find organisms made up of large numbers of cells (multi- cellular organisms). All of the larger and higher animals and plants in the world are made up of great numbers of cells, each having the same general structure as the uni- cellular organisms we have already studied. These larger organisms begin their life as single cells and become multi- cellular by the division of their cells into many parts. There is no doubt that the ~ multicellular organisms of the world must have been de- rived originally from the unicellular organisms. Intermediate Types.— While the organisms de- scribed in the last chapter are called unicellular, there are some of them to which this term cannot be ap- plied with strict accuracy. Pandorina (Fig. 28), for example, consists of a group of sixteen cells at- tached in a spherical, gelatinous mass. Each of these masses of sixteen cells has been derived from a single cell by divi- sion. It is a question whether this organism should be called unicellular or multi- cellular. It is certainly made up of more than one cell; but FIG. 38. — BURSARIA. ONE OF THE LARG- EST AND MOST COMPLICATED OF THE SINGLE-CELLED ANIMALS /, food; m, mouth; mb, membranella; mac, macronucleus. CELLULAR STRUCTURE OF ORGANISMS 01 on the other hand the cells are all alike, are all capable of carrying on the various functions of life, and may be more or less independent of each other. Vorticella and Carchesium. — Other examples of types inter- mediate between unicellular and multicellular forms are shown in Figures 39 and 40. The Vorticella, shown at Figure 39 A, FIG. 39. — Two SPECIES OF UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS Showing the formation of colonies. A, a single-celled Vorticella; B, the process of divi- sion; C, a single cell of Carchesium; D, a colony of Carchesium, produced by the incom- plete division. Vorticella always separates after division, but Carchesium remains attached as shown at D, cv, contractile vacuole; oe, O3sophagus; m, mouth; mac, macronucleus; mic, micronucleus. is unquestionably a single-celled animal, bell-shaped and pos- sessing cilia, a mouth, oesophagus, vacuole, and a macro- and micronucleus; the whole is attached to a stalk containing a muscle which enables it to contract. This single cell divides in a normal manner (B) and after division the parts separate BIOLOGY to become independent animals. In Figure C is shown another cell much like Vorticella, possessing the same shape and similar organs. In this animal, after the cells divide, they do not separate but remain attached to a common stalk, and subse- quently divide again and again, the result being a group of similar cells connected by a branching stalk, D. This animal is named Carchesium, and such a cluster is called a colony. In this colony the members are independent, each carrying on for itself all of the functions of life and each contracting and expanding by itself independently of the rest. A third species is found resembling Carchesium except in one respect. In this animal, Zoo- \ \ ' ' i •' '•/;/// / v thamniwn, there is a 1 ' ' 'i/ &&•••/ / ^^ common muscle ex- tending through the stalk and its branches. When this muscle con- tracts, all the members of the colony contract simultaneously. These three animals are evidently closely re- lated; but Vorticella is SL true unicellular animal, Carchesium a cluster of independent cells at- tached together, and Zoothamnium a similar colony in which the members are not wholly independent but have a vital connection. There are many other animals which are in a similar way made up of colonies of cells, alike in structure and function. Several of these are sho\/n in Figure 40. In all cases the ani- mals start their life as single cells which become colonies by the method of incomplete division. All these are commonly classed among unicellular animals and called Protozoa (Gr. FIG. 40. — COLONIES OF UNICELLULAR OR- GANISMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL CELLS ATTACHED TOGETHER A, an animal with its pseudopodia protruding; in the other specimens only the shell is visible. These ani- mals belong to the group of Forminifera, whose shells form chalk cliffs and limestone rocks. CELLULAR STRUCTURE OF ORGANISMS 93 protos = first + zoon = animal), although they are not strictly unicellular. The same principle is illustrated by many of the lower plants, of which a single example will be given. Ulothrix. — One of the common fresh-water pond scums, found everywhere in ditches by the roadside, is made of a green plant, Ulothrix; Fig. 41. Ulothrix consists of a long, slender thread formed by a row of nearly cylindrical cells, placed end to end; Fig. 41 A. The individual threads are barely visible to the naked eye. In each one of these cells rnay be seen green coloring matter, chlorophyll (Gr. chloros = green + phyllon = leaf), and each cell contains a nucleus. The cells are identical from one end of the thread to the other, differing only slightly in size, and each of them is capable of carrying on all the functions of life independently. The reproduction in Ulothrix is interest- ing; and, like some or- ganisms already studied, it shows two quite distinct methods. The first and simplest is as follows: The contents of one of the cells breaks up into several parts, which, after a time, escape upon the bursting of the plant's cell wall. As they come out, each is seen to be provided with four little flagella and is thus enabled to swim. They are called zoospores (Gr. zoon = animal) ; Fig. 41 a. After swimming for a time they settle down, lose their cilia, and FIG. 41.— PLANTS MADE UP OF COLONIES OF SINGLE CELLS A, Ulothrix. a, shows the process of multiplica- tion by the formation of zoospores; b to /, show the formation of sex cells, their conjugation with each other; g, their subsequent division into spores; h, a single spore which grows into a new thread, like the original shown at large A. B, Pediastrium. 94 BIOLOGY each begins to develop into a new filament like that from which it originated. The growth into the new filament is by division; the cells after dividing remain attached together in the form of a long chain. The second method of reproduction is by conjugation and reminds us of that in Pandorina. In this case, the contents of some of the cells break up into a large number of parts instead of a small number, and these, by the bursting of the cell wall, are finally liberated into the water ; Fig. 41 c. They are then found to possess two flagella, instead of four like the zoospores, and by means of these they swim around. These small spores are, however, unable to grow into new threads.* After the spores have been swimming about foi some time they come in contact, as shown in Figure 41 d, and fuse together, the fusion being identical with that already described in Pandorina; see page 74. There are thus formed conjugation spores known as the zygospores (Gr. zygon = yoke). These zygospores, after a time, produce by division several more spores which, upon becoming free, soon begin to divide and grow into new filaments like those with which we started .. This kind of reproduction is very similar to that of Pandorina and clearly suggests the sexual reproduction which occurs in higher organisms. In the organisms thus described, we have examples which cannot properly be called unicellular, nor on the other hand can they be called multicellular; each one of these cells carries on by itself all the functions of the organism, whereas in multi- cellular organisms, as we shall presently see, the different cells have different functions to perform, and the cells that make up the individual are not all alike as they are in the forms already described. We must look upon the Pandorina and Ulothrix as intermediate between the unicellular and the multicellular forms. In this way they illustrate the general * Sometimes, however, they do grow into very short threads which are much smaller than the original. CELLULAR STRUCTURE OF ORGANISMS 95 biological principle that sharp lines dividing groups can hardly ever be drawn, and it is almost always possible to find inter- mediate forms connecting widely separate types. True Multicellular Organisms. — Multi cellular organisms are always made up of more than one cell; but the fact that they consist of many cells is not enough to define them accurately. A brief account of the manner in which multicellular organisms develop will explain the meaning of the term. In all cases they begin as a single cell, Which may be either an egg or a spore. This cell divides into two parts, these into four, and so on, the number of cells increasing indefinitely; but after dividing, the cells remain attached instead of separating. After a while some of the cells assume a variety of types, i.e., they become differentiated in form and function, and play different parts in the life of the organism. Such a differentia- tion of cells occurs in all true multicellular organisms. Hence we may define a multicellular organism as one composed of many cells which show a differentiation in structure and function. With this differentiation of cells, tissues appear for the first time. Cells with similar structure and function are commonly grouped together, to form a tissue. The cells with special contractile power, for example, form muscle tissue; cells with power to secrete bone form bony tissue; and those in which conductility and irritability are particularly developed are grouped together to form nervous tissue; and so on. Tissues are, of course, impossible among unicellular organisms, but univer- sal among multicellular organisms. With the multiplication of cells and their differentiation, there also appears the formation of true organs. Among the unicellular animals and plants there may be certain parts of the cell, like the mouth and nucleus, set apart for certain functions, and these are, to be sure, cell organs. But they are not organs in the sense in which the term has been used among the multicellular animals, where groups of cells, usually of various kinds, are aggregated to form distinct parts with 96 BIOLOGY definite functions, so that an organ contains several tissues grouped together to form a complex structure. In the study of multicellular organisms, which follows in the later chapters, it will be seen that some of them have only a few simple organs, while others have many complex organs. Those which are of simple structure and have few organs we call low organisms, while by high organisms we refer to those whose structure is complex. PEN1CILLIUM, A SIMPLE MULTICELLULAR PLANT As an example of a multicellular plant with very slight complexity, we will study one of the common molds, which may be found growing upon almost any moist food the world over. It may usually be obtained in abundance by placing a bit of bread or a slice of lemon in a dish, covering it so that it will be kept from drying, and allowing it to remain in a warm place for a few days. The object will soon become covered with a mold (Penidllium) which after a day or two assumes a greenish-blue color. This organism is somewhat difficult to study under the microscope because it is so massed together that special methods have to be taken for preparing the specimens. The best method is to plant some of the spores upon a little jelly which has been hardened on a glass slide, and then study the spores under the microscope every day and notice the method by which they sprout and eventually form the complete plant. Structure. — The structure of Penidllium may best be under- stood by studying Figure 42. It is made up of a mass of deli- cate, branching threads, extending in various directions. These threads are white or colorless and very minute. In the com- mon species of Penidllium they are hardly visible to the naked eye, although in some species of molds they are slightly larger, and in others they are large enough to be plainly seen. These threads, which are known as the mycelium (Gr. mykes = fun- gus), have the function of assimilation, and absorb nourish- CELLULAR STRUCTURE OF ORGANISMS 97 ment from the substance upon which the molds are growing. Although the threads are very delicate, they can by growth force their way through the substance upon which they are feeding until they penetrate into the bread, or slice of lemon, FIG. 42. — VARIOUS MOLDS A, a colony of Penicillium, showing the fruiting spore-bearing masses arising from the mycelium; B, a bit of the colony more highly magnified; C, one of the fruiting masses, form- ing spores; D, a colony of Mucor; E, the sporangia of Mucor, with the spores emerging, and showing also the mycelium below not divided into cells; F, a bit of the colony of Asper- gillus, showing a third method of formation of spores. or decaying apple, for some distance, and the material thus becomes permeated with the mycelium. Careful study of the threads of this mycelium with a high magnifying power shows that they are made up of many cells. Cross partitions divide the threads at intervals and separate the consecutive cells; Fig. 42 B. The contents of each cell include protoplasm and a nucleus. There is no differentiation of the cells, all in 98 BIOLOGY the mycelium being essentially alike, although a single plant may contain hundreds of these cells in its growing, branching mycelium. Reproduction. — The only noticeable differentiation of cells that is seen in Penidllium occurs after the plant has grown for a few days and is ready for multiplication. There may then be seen arising from the mycelium minute branches that extend vertically into the air instead of growing horizontally over the surface of the object upon which the mold is nourishing itself. These rise from the mycelium, simply as branches, and are known as aerial hyphae (Gr. hyphe = web) ; Fig. 42 B and C. The ends of these hyphae branch into a number of finger-like processes, which extend vertically, parallel with each other, as shown at C; after a time these branches divide by constriction into rows of minute balls. These little spheres eventually break off from the plant and then, blown by the wind, are scattered far and wide. Each of them is capable, under proper conditions of jnoisture and temperature, of developing into a new plant. They are evidently spores, this particular kind of a spore being named conidia (Gr. konis = dust). The conidia are bluish in color and they cause the mold, which is at first white, to assume a distinct blue tinge, giving to this plant its common name of blue mold. They are extremely light and may be blown for a long distance before settling to the ground. When- ever they do settle upon any moist place they germinate; each spore produces a new thread which in the course of a few days becomes a new, branching mycelium and thus forms a new mold. The conidia produced by a single plant are very numerous and so light that they may be carried for a long time in the air. Indeed, the air is at all times more or less filled with them, in summer and winter alike; and it follows that any moist material which will furnish them with food, like bread, or pieces of lemon, or the surface of any fruit, if exposed to the air for a short time, will be sown with these little spores, and in a few days will begin to show signs of molding. So CELLULAR STRUCTURE OF ORGANISMS 99 widely scattered are these floating mold spores that it is hardly possible to expose any moist organic substance even, for a few minutes, without its becoming inoculated with some of them and showing, a few days afterwards, the growth of molds upon its surface. Penidllium has a second method of multiplication which is rarely seen. It occurs only under special conditions which are not understood, and it has not been observed by many bota- nists. It consists in the formation of minute sacs, within which spores are formed, usually four or eight in number. These sacs are known as asci and the spores are ascospores. Even- tually the sacs burst, the spores come out and are then capable of developing into new plants. This method of forming spores is evidently similar to that already described in Yeast (see Fig. 32 s), and shows that yeast is closely related to the molds. The same method of spore formation is found in a large number of other plants (lichens, cup fungi, etc.) and is used as a basis of classification for a class of Fungi called As- comycetes (Gr. ascus = sac + mykes = fungus). It must be no^ed, however, that not all of the molds form spores in this way. The one shown in Figure 42 D has a method of repro- duction by conjugation. OTHER SPECIES OF MOLDS Molds are very abundant in all parts of the earth wherever there is much moisture, and any bit of organic material left to itself will be sure to show signs of their growth in course of time. Many species of molds, which to the naked eye closely resemble each other, may be distinguished by careful microscopic study. In all cases the plant is a branching, colorless mycelium, similar to that described in Penidllium. In a few species, however, the mycelium is not divided into cells by partitions, as in Penicillium, but the whole thread forms one continuous mass called a syncytium; Fig. 42 E. The chief method by which the molds are distinguished from 100 BIOLOGY each other is not by the structure and shape of the mycelium, but rather by their method of producing spores. Penidllium is one of the more common, but there are many other species in which the spores are produced by different methods. Three of these methods of spore formation are shown in Figure 42 C, E, and F. In some cases the spores are formed in a sac called a sporangium, as at E. In others they are borne upon a globular head, not inclosed in a sac; see F. Other species show various methods; but in all cases the method of spore formation is quite distinctive, and a careful microscopic study of the different forms makes it possible to separate them into species according to their methods of producing spores. Molds play a very important part in the life processes in nature. The term mold is not a proper scientific designation for these plants, but a popular name, covering a variety of plants of similar form and structure, but with many different botanical relations. That they belong to different groups is proved by the fact already mentioned that they have different methods of reproduction, some of them forming ascospores, while others form spores by a process of conjugation, which, as we shall learn later, is a type of sexual reproduction. LABORATORY WORK The laboratory work that can be done by an elementary class upon karyokinesis is very limited. Mounted preparations should be furnished by the instructor. For this purpose the young growing root tips of Podo- phyllum are excellent. If these are collected in the spring and carefully preserved, sectioned, and stained in iron haematoxylin, they will show all stages of cell division. Longitudinal sections are. best, and they should be studied with a 1/12 immersion objective to make out the details. By patient study of a few sections thus prepared the various steps in karyoki- nesis may be made out. If the instructor can furnish other examples of dividing cells the student should make comparisons. Many tissues of animals and plants may be utilized. CELLULAR STRUCTURE OF ORGANISMS 101 Carchesium. — Colonial forms of Vorticella-\ik.e organisms, either Car- chesium or Zoothamnium, may usually be found in aquaria in which various fresh- water plants are kept. The dishes which have been prepared for the culture of Amceba and Paramecium will frequently show them. If they are obtainable they should be studied. No special methods are necessary, the colonies being small enough to be placed under a cover glass and studied alive. Staining with methylene green is useful to bring out the nuclei. Ulothrix or Spirogyra. — One of these forms should be studied as an example of filamentous plants. Either of them may be found in ponds or ditches by the roadside. They are to be studied without any special preparation, the fresh form showing most points perfectly well. The shape of the cells and of the chlorophyll bodies should be noticed. The nucleus may usually, though not always, be seen without any treat- ment. A little glycerine added underneath the cover glass will cause the protoplasm to contract from the cell walls. Staining with methylene green will show the nucleus if it has not been seen without this. If material is at hand to show the conjugation, it is desirable to have the student study threads of conjugating Spirogyra and compare with the conjugation of Paramecium described in the text. The reproduction of Ulothrix by for- mation of spores is so difficult to obtain that it is impractical to furnish material to a class for study. Penicillium and Other Molds. — Molds may be easily obtained by allowing bits of lemon, banana, bread, etc., to remain for a few days in a closed jar in a warm place. The general appearance of the molds can be studied on the surface of these articles. For a more careful study it is necessary to study the colonies growing from spores. A simple method is as follows: Prepare a culture medium from dried beans by placing a pint in about twice as much water as is necessary to cover them. Allow to stand 12 hours and add enough water just to cover the beans. Then strain off the liquid from the beans and filter. To the filtrate add 1% of agar and boil so as to completely dissolve the agar. Place the material in test tubes, about 10 c. c. in each, and plug the mouths of the tubes with cotton. Place in a wire basket and sterilize by steaming for three-quarters of an hour on three successive days. To use this culture medium, melt several of the tubes of agar and pour each into a petri dish, allowing the agar to harden. When thoroughly hard, remove with a platinum needle a minute quantity of the spores, which appear on the mold on the lemon or bread, and just touch the surface of the agar with the spore-laden needle tip in several places. This will sow the spores. Place the petri dish (covered to prevent drying) in a warm place. This dish may then be studied from day to day by putting it under a microscope, and the sprouting of the spores, the 102 BIOLOGY ' growth of mold colonies, and their production of spores can be followed in detail. Several kinds of mold will usually start to growing on the lemon etc., and may be distinguished by their color. The different species will show differences in spore formation. Sketches of the colonies and their method of spore formation should be made. The type which will be most commonly found are Penicillium, Aspergillus, and Mucor; Fig. 42. CHAPTER V THE CASTOR BEAN, A COMPLEX PLANT THE plants hitherto mentioned do not possess flowers and belong to what are called the flowerless plants or Cryptogams (Gr. cryptos = concealed + gamos = mar- riage). As an example of the higher multicellular plants we will describe one of those producing true flowers, i. e., one of the flowering plants or Phanerogams (Gr. phaneros = open + gamos) . For this purpose we will study the castor bean. THE CASTOR BEAN (RIC1NUS COMMUN1S) The castor bean (Ritinus communis) is the plant from which castor oil is ob- tained; it is also used as an ornamental foliage plant on account of its large, beautiful leaves. Other plants may serve for this study, but this one illustrates especially well the structure of the higher plants. The seeds may be obtained at seed stores and will readily sprout in moist sawdust. GROSS STRUCTURE Figure 43, which represents a young seedling of the castor bean about two weeks old, illustrates the general struc- ture of other multicellular plants, since the higher plants are essentially alike in 103 MULTICELLULAR P-. FIG. 43. — A YOUNG SEEDLING OF THE CASTOR BEAN, THREE WEEKS OLD s, the stem; r, the roots; f, expanded seed leaves; p, permanent leaves. 104 BIOLOGY this respect. It consists of a stem connecting two expanded surfaces, the one ending in the leaves, and the other dividing under the soil into fine rootlets which bear root hairs. Plants obtain their food partly from the air and partly from the soil, and this explains why they expand their branches into leaves in the air, and their roots into root hairs in the soil. The stem of the plant serves chiefly as a connection between the leaf and the root and as a support for the branches and leaves. STRUCTURE OF THE STEM The structure of the stem may best be understood by begin- cross section of a young stem, shortly after it has ning with the examination of ep emerged from the seed; see Fig. 44. * Fundamental Cells. - The bulk of the stem consists of a mass of ap- proximately round cells, which are called funda- mental cells, p. These cells are largest toward the center of the stem and grow smaller toward the outer edge. The large cells in the center form the pith. On the outer edge of the stem is a single layer of small rounded cells forming the epi- dermis (Gr. epi = upon + derma = skin), ep. Just beneath the epidermis are several irregular rows of cells, larger than the epidermal cells, known as the cortex (Lat. cortex = bark), co. At this stage the cortex on its inner edge is not very sharply marked off from the cells which fill the center of the stem, and form the pith. Fibrovascular Bundles. — A short distance within the cortex will be found several groups of especially marked cells, }b, FIG. 44. — A SECTION ACROSS THE STEM OF THE SEEDLING fb, the fibrovascular bundle; co, the cortex; ep, the epidermis; p, the general fundamental cells. THE CASTOR BEAN 105 known as fibrovascular bundles (Lat. fibra — fiber + vas = vessel). In the young stem there is a row of eight to ten of these groups, arranged to form a ring a short distance beneath the epidermis. The bundles do not actually touch each other, but the cells of the pith and the cortex are connected. v; i-.i < \9° Structure of a Fibrovas- cular Bundle.' — Figure 45 shows a highly magnified view of a cross section of one of these fibrovascular bundles. It consists of three parts : — 1. Running across the middle are several rows of small thin-walled cells known as the cambium layer, c (Lat. cambire= to exchange). These cells are full of active protoplasm and are the chief growing cells of the stem. 2. On the inside of this layer, and therefore toward the pith, is the xylem, x (Gr. xylon = timber), a somewhat FlG. 45. A HIGHLY MAGNIFIED SEC- TION OF A FIBROVASCULAR BUNDLE s, sieve cells; t, tracheids; x, is the xylem; ph, the phloem part of the bundle; a, accompanying cells; c, cambium layer; co, cortex; d, ducts; pa, parenchyma; st, stereome cells. triangular mass of cells, the walls of which are thicker than those of the cambium. Among them may be seen at least two kinds of cells; one of small size but with very thick walls forming the tracheids (Gr. trachea = windpipe) or wood cells, t, and the other of larger size with relatively thin walls, forming the ducts or vessels, d. 3. On the outside of the cambium, and therefore toward the epidermis, is a somewhat irregular mass of cells called the phloem (Gr. phloios = inner bark), ph, within which may be 106 BIOLOGY cost \ seen four kinds of cells. There are a few large cells called sieve cells, Sj and near them some small cells called the accompany- ing cells, a. Other cells still smaller and with thin walls form the parenchyma (Gr. para = beside + en = in + chein = to pour), pa, and a few cells, with very thick walls, are called the stereome cells (Gr. stereos = solid), st. The cells of the cambium do most of the growing; as they multiply they pro- duce new cells both on their inner and their outer edge, causing the bundles to increase in thickness by additions between the xylem and the phloem. Figure 46, a longitudinal section through a bundle, shows the real shape of the cells. The cambium layer is composed of slightly elongated ? ' f /? &• SP f P ce^s w^h scluare ends. Each of these cells con- tains protoplasm and a prominent nucleus, dif- fering in this respect from the majority of the cells of the bundle, which are empty arid represent only the cell walls from which the protoplasm has been removed. The xylem cells of the bundle, forming the wood proper, show several types. The large ducts have peculiarly marked cell walls. Some of them show rings forming thickenings on the inside of the cell wall, or the thickenings may take the form of a spiral, sp. Other ducts show dots or pits and various peculiar markings, d. The smaller cells, the tracheids, t, are much narrower than the ducts, but have relatively thicker walls. Some have square Phloem Xylem FIG. 46. — LONGITUDINAL SECTION OF A FIBRQVASCULAR BUNDLE a, accompanying cells; c, cambium cells; co, cortex; d, ducts; p, pith; s, sieve cells; sp, spiral ducts; st, sterome cells; t, tracheids or wood cells. THE CASTOR BEAN 107 ends and others have ends tapering to a point, the cells dove- tailing to form the hard, resisting part of the stem; the phloem outside the cambium layer also contains several kinds of cells. Some of them are large and have oblique ends which are per- forated by apertures that place one cell in communication with the next above and below. Because of these openings, these cells are called sieve cells. It is through these cells that the food supply is transported through the plant from the leaves. Close to the sieve cells are smaller cells, the accom- panying cells, a, which are long and slender. The phloem also contains many rather narrow cells with square ends called parenchyma cells, and a few small, short cells with very thick walls known as stereome cells. The same longitudinal sec- tion shows that the pith, p, is made of short, square cells with very thin walls. Evi- dently the pith is a soft tis- sue and the strength of the stem is due to the hard and resisting fibrous cells in the bundles. Outside of the bundles, directly beneath the epidermis, it will be seen that the cells of the cortex, co, are much like those of the pith, hardly longer than they are broad, with thin walls and square ends. The relation of the fun- damental cells to the fibro- vascular bundles is better shown in Figure 47, which shows how the bundles extend through the stem and strengthen it. The bundles evidently consist of very different material from that found in the pith FIG. 47. — PERSPECTIVE VIEW OF A PIECE OF A YOUNG STEM, SHOW- ING THE FIBROVASCULAR BUNDLE EXTENDING LENGTHWISE IN THE STEM FOR SUPPORT fb, fibro vascular bundle; P, pith. co, cortex; ep, epidermis; 108 BIOLOGY and cortex. They are mostly long, narrow cells with com- paratively thick walls, which are hardened by the deposition of woody substance. The name fibrovascular is appropriately applied, since they are principally made up of fibers mixed with vessels. The strength of a stem depends upon the density of these bundles, and the thickness of the walls of the tracheids. Of all this mass of cells only a few are filled with living protoplasm. The cambium cells are always alive and the sieve cells may contain protoplasm. The other cells contain proto- plasm when they first form, but when they are fully grown most of them are only the empty cell walls. This is particularly true of the wood cells of the xylem. Protoplasm is more usually found in the phloem and the cortex than in the true wood. Arrangement of Bundles in an Older Stem. — An examination of a slightly older stem shows that the bundles increase in width and finally fuse. In Figure 48 it will be particularly noticed that the cambium layer of one bundle has grown until it comes in con- tact with the cambium layer of the next, and thus forms a cambium ring extending around the stem a short dis- tance within the cortex separating the outer portion of the stem, which is now called the phloem or bark, from the inner part, the xylem, or wood proper. Later the other parts of the bundles fuse, forming a complete ring of woody tissue and a complete ring of bark separated by the cambium. Remembering that this cambium layer is made up of actively growing cells, it is easy to see how a stem of this kind may fo c co FIG. 48. — CROSS SECTION OF AN OLDER STEM, SHOWING CAMBIUM FUSED TO FORM A COMPLETE RING, C (In other respects as in Fig. 43.) THE CASTOR BEAN 109 FIG. 49. — DIAGRAM SHOWING THE METHOD BY WHICH THE CAMBIUM LAYER PRODUCES WOOD CELLS ON ITS INSIDE AND BARK CELLS ON THE OUTSIDE be, the cells of the bark; c, cambium cells; we, the wood cells. increase in size. As the cells of the cambium layer divide, new cells are formed between the bark and the wood of the old bundles. Some of these new cells are formed inside of the cambium layer, and outside of the xylem, as shown diagram - matically in Figure 49. Other cells are formed on the outside of the cambium and inside C of the old phloem layer. These new cells soon assume the form of new wood cells, new tracheids or ducts on the inside; while those outside the cambium assume the form of sieve cells, parenchyma, etc. It thus comes about that the plant is producing new wood cells in the form of a layer outside the old wood ring, and new phloem cells in a layer inside the old phloem ring. The wood grows by addi- tions upon its outer surface and the bark by additions to its inner surface. Since the cambium forms a complete ring, this method of growth evidently will produce a complete ring of wood around the stem, and since the cambium cells con- tinue to produce new cells during the whole of their active life, they will continue to add new layers of wood on the out- side of the old wood. The wood ring, which at first is only a thin layer just inside the cambium, becomes thicker and thicker as the growth continues. As it becomes thicker, the stem, of course, increases in diameter, and, since the cambium always remains on the outside of the wood, the stem may keep increasing in size as long as the cambium cells are able to de- velop new cells to be deposited as wood cells on the outside of the old wood. In the same way the cambium deposits masses of cells on the inner side of the phloem of the bundles, 110 BIOLOGY and the bark also increases in thickness by growing on its inner side. This growth is, however, not so vigorous as is that of the wood, and the bark does not increase in thickness so much as does the stem. Since too the new cells of the bark are deposited on the inner side, the older parts of the bark must stretch to cover the increasing diameter of the growing stem. When a stem becomes of considerable size the outer bark will be found to be rough and broken by the expansion of the stem which it covers. Some plants, which have but one year's growth, form a single ring of wood as described, and die at the close of the season. Other plants, like large trees, do not die, but live year after year; and each year the cambium layer adds new masses of cells outside of those previously existing. In plants that live in regions where the climate changes with the seasons, the cells formed by the cambium layer are larger at certain seasons of the year than at others. In temperate regions, the wood cells formed in the spring are larger and relatively thinner walled than those formed later in the season. During the winter, growth ceases entirely; but as soon as spring comes again, a FIG. 50. — SECTION ACROSS AN EXOGENOUS STEM OF FOUR YEARS' GROWTH, SHOW- ING THE FOUR RINGS OF WOOD new layer of large cells will be deposited on the outside of the last ring that was deposited in the fall. The result of this is a series of rings easily recognized when a cross section of a stem is made; Fig. 50. Since each ring indicates ordi- fe, bark; c, cambium layer; w, wo2 is in plants, as in animals, a waste product which must be excreted. It is thus seen that plants carry on two opposite processes. By photosynthesis CO2 is utilized, starch is formed and 0 is set free; by metastasis O is used, starch is destroyed and C02 is set free. During the ordinary life of a plant in daylight, although both processes are going on simultaneously, photo- synthesis is much more vigorous than metastasis, and much more starch is made by the plant than is used, so that oxygen is constantly eliminated. Photosynthesis, since it takes place only in sunlight, can occur only in the daytime, while metastasis, requiring no sunlight, can go on in the night. The process of metastasis goes on fully as well, and certain phases go on better, 134 BIOLOGY in the darkness than in the light. As a result, green plants in sunlight and in the daytime give off a surplus of oxygen, while in the night they are giving off carbon dioxid but no oxygen. Oxygen gas is a material that is utilized by animal life, while carbon dioxid gas is a waste product of animals as well as plants. Hence it has been said that, in the daytime plants are useful in a living room, while in the night-time they are harmful. There is really no foundation for this claim, since the amount of carbon dioxid given off by a few plants in a room is so slight that it is of no practical significance in its bearing upon animal life. In nature, however, the plant and animal life balance each other; while animals absorb the oxygen given off by plants, they them- selves give off carbon dioxid that is utilized by plants; and thus the condition of the atmosphere is kept practically constant so far as concerns its content of both oxygen and carbon dioxid. In general, plants manufacture far more starch than they need for their own life. The surplus is stored in some form as starch, sugar, fat, proteid, or some other material, and upon this surplus the whole animal world is nourished. All ordinary green plants carry on this process of photosyn- thesis. Fungi, illustrated by bacteria, yeasts, molds, mushrooms, etc. (Figs. 32, 34, 42), all agree in lacking the green chlorophyll and are for this reason sometimes called colorless plants. Since they have no chlorophyll they are unable to carry on the process of photosynthesis, unable to utilize the energy of sunlight and manufacture starch. But they must have energy as well as green plants for their life, and are therefore dependent upon the latter for their food. The Fungi are commonly found growing and feeding upon organic foods, and are quite unable to utilize the minerals of the soil and the gases of the air. They are usually found, therefore, in the midst of masses of decaying organic refuse, on dead tree trunks, in manure heaps, growing from rotting leaves, etc. They feed upon the remains of past generations of green plants, having, as we shall see later, a very important part to play in nature's food cycle. PLANT PHYSIOLOGY 135 PHOTOSYNTHESIS AND METASTASIS CONTRASTED The relation between these two functions of plant life may be better understood by the following contrast: — PHOTOSYNTHESIS Takes place only in green cells. Takes place only in light. C02 is absorbed and used up and oxygen given off. Carbohydrates are formed. The plants grow in weight. The energy of sunlight is stored ; see Chapter XV. METASTASIS Takes place in all living cells. Takes place equally well in darkness. Oxygen is absorbed and used and CO2 given off. Carbohydrates are destroyed. The plants lose weight, but may increase in size. The stored energy of sunlight is liberated and used. The forces concerned in starch making and the building of proteids and other materials are ordinary chemical and physical forces. While we cannot cause these particular chemical com- binations to occur in our laboratories, and do not understand them fully, we do know enough about them to prove that they belong to the ordinary forces of chemical affinity. In starch making the atoms are combined in ordinary proportions, and there is no reason for thinking that any other factors are con- cerned besides those of chemical affinity. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS OF PLANT LIFE Besides the processes of photosynthesis and metastasis, the only other prominent function of plant life is reproduction. The two functions of motion and coordination, which are very prominent in animal forms, are very slightly developed among plants. 136 BIOLOGY Motion. — The most striking distinction ordinarily recog- nized between animals and plants is the absence of the power of motion in plants and its presence in animals. This distinc- tion, however, is by no means a sharp one, for motion is not wholly lacking in plants. Many of the lower types of plants are capable of locomotion. This is confined largely to the micro- scopic forms, and in some plants it is present only in their re- productive spores. For example, Ulothrix (see page 93) is a motionless organism in its ordinary adult form, but produces reproductive spores, called zoospores, which swim rapidly in the water. Among other microscopic plants, locomotive power is found even in the adult life of the animal. This is true of Osdl- laria, Diatoms, and some other organisms ; Fig. 68. Among the higher plants no active type of locomotion is found, although many of them are constructed in such a way that they may be carried to and fro by motile animals. Even among the highest plants, however, a certain amount of motion is developed in the different parts of the plant. Among the flowers of the highest groups of plants, motion is developed in certain parts ot the flowers for the distribution of pollen. In most of the highest class also, careful study has shown that the leaves are constantly in a state of slow motion, waving to and fro during the growth of the plant in sunlight. Of course the leaves are almost always moved by the wind, but quite independently of air currents they have a motion of their own which can be detected by a careful recording apparatus. It is thought that this motion is due principally, perhaps entirely, to the unequal evaporation of water on different sides of the stem. At all events it is so slight that it can hardly be considered true motion, and it certainly FIG. 68. — THREE PLANTS HAVING THE POWER OF MOTION A and B, Diatoms, which move readily through water; C, Osdllaria, which simply waves back and forth. PLANT PHYSIOLOGY 137 is not locomotion. In addition to this, some plants have the peculiar property of closing their leaves in the night. The leaves droop and close themselves in such a way as to present a small surface for evaporation. This motion is sometimes spoken of as the sleep of plants. It is not developed in all, but it is more common than has generally been believed. Thus, while it is believed that plants do not as a rule possess the power of motion and, except in the lowest forms, no power of locomotion, it is not absolutely true that motion is lacking in the vegetable kingdom. Speaking in general, however, plants are characterized by absence of motility. Coordinating Functions. — Plants have nothing whatever that corresponds to a nervous system in the sense of possessing nerves or nerve fibers which coordinate the different parts of the body. There is practically no coordination between the functions carried on in the different parts of the plant. True sensory functions are also lacking from plants. In a general way the protoplasm of plants, as well as that of animals, is sensitive. All protoplasm reacts under certain stimuli and is therefore sensitive. Moreover, there are some of the higher plants which react so quickly and so strongly to certain stimuli that they are spoken of as sensitive plants. In the common so-called sensitive plant a touch upon the leaf will cause the leaf to close, and a slight touch of the branch will cause all the leaves on that branch to droop. Such a condition, however, is very unusual among plants, and in these cases it is incorrect to speak of the plants as sensitive in any proper" sense. There is no reason for thinking that the plant has any sensation, i.e., any true consciousness; and all that is meant by being sensitive in these cases is a quick ability to respond to an external stimulus. CHAPTER VII MULTICELLULAR ANIMALS: HYDRA FUSCA GENERAL LIFE FUNCTIONS OF ANIMALS THE life of animals is much more complicated than that of plants and the animal body is correspondingly more complex. It will make the study of multicellular animals more intelligible if at the outset we notice certain general functions of life that are exhibited by all higher animals. They are as follows: — Alimentation (Lat. alimentum = food). — The process of food getting is called alimentation. The organs concerned in it are those that take food into the body, those that digest it, and finally those that absorb it into the circulating medium. Circulation. — The process by which food and other ingredients are transported through the body is called circulation. Usually it is brought about by a circulating medium called the blood, by a series of tubes in which the blood is carried, known as blood vessels, and by a pump, or heart, designed to keep the blood in motion. In some of the smaller animals this system of organs is far simpler, neither blood vessels nor a heart being present; but some form of circulation is always found. Respiration. — The chief chemical process in the animal body is oxidation, i.e., the combination of the food with the oxygen. For this purpose, oxygen gas must be absorbed by the blood. As a result of the oxidation of the food another gas (CO2). arises, which is also taken up by the blood and must be eliminated, since it is a waste product. The function by which these two gases (O and CO2) are absorbed and discharged is called respira- tion. Respiration is thus a gas exchange that takes place be- tween the body and the surrounding medium. Metabolism (Gr. meta = beyond + ballein = to throw). — The foods taken into the body are eventually combined with the oxygen taken in by respiration and as a result new products 138 HYDRA FUSCA 139 arise, some of which are useful, while others are waste products. The result of the combination of food with oxygen is, that a certain amount of force is liberated in the same way that heat is liberated from coal when it is burned. This force varies according to the amount of activity of the animal life. The whole process of chemical change by which the food is used is called metabolism. Two distinct phases of it may be recognized : anabolism (Gr. ana = up) , the process by which complex sub- stances are built out of simpler ones; and katabolism (Gr. kata = down), the process by which complex substances are torn down into simpler ones. In animals the latter are more extensive than the former. Excretion. — The function of getting rid of the waste products of metabolism is called excretion. These products are no longer valuable but act as a direct poison to the body if allowed to remain. These waste products are solid, liquid, or gaseous. The gases are excreted by respiration, as just described. In higher animals the liquids are carried off by the lungs, by the skin, and by special organs called kidneys. It must be remem- bered that excretion does not refer to the passage from the intestines of the undigested food. This undigested food has never become part of the body and its passage from the intes- tines is not strictly excretion. There is apt to be confusion in the use of the terms, as the undigested food which passes through the intestines frequently goes by the name of excreta. In the strict sense, however, the excreta or faeces are not excretions. Motion. — Practically all animals possess some power of mo- tion and have special organs adapted for bringing it about. Support. — The living parts of an animal (protoplasm) are made up of a soft, jelly-like substance, too non-resistant to have the power to hold any particular shape. If the animal is small the resisting power of the jelly may be sufficient to preserve its shape; but in large animals it is necessary to have some hard support for holding the soft parts. This hard supporting sub- stance may be in the form of a skeleton or shell. 140 BIOLOGY Coordination. — The numerous activities of the animal body are brought into harmonious action for a common purpose. The function by which they are related to one another is known as coordination (Lat. con = together + ordinare = to regu- late), and the system of organs that produces this coordination is generally spoken of under the name of the nervous system. Reproduction. — This is the function of producing new individ- uals like the old, which prevents the species from disappearing from the earth. The nine functions thus outlined are necessary to the life of all animals. In a few of the lower animals, some of these func- tions are very slightly developed; and in quite a number of smaller animals we do not find any special system of organs devoted to some of these functions. For example, many small animals have no skeleton, and some of the very simple ones have no organs that can properly be called a coordinating sys- tem, since all of the functions of the animal take place in one small cell where no coordination is needed. But speaking in general, all animals, high or low, carry on all these functions. ANIMAL BIOLOGY In our consideration of animal Biology we shall study three animals, chosen to illustrate different grades of structure. Hydra will be an example of one of the simplest multicellular animals; the earthworm, an animal of moderate complexity; and the frog will be an example of the more highly complex types. HYDRA FUSCA: A SIMPLE MULTICELLULAR ANIMAL General Description. — The brown Hydra is a very common water animal and may be found in almost any pond on the under side of lily pads or pond weeds. Here it may be seen as a small reddish body, just large enough to be visible. Our common Hydra ( Hydra fused) is of a brown color, but another common species (Hydra viridis} is bright green. If the animal, still HYDRA FUSCA 141 attached to the lily leaf, be removed from the pond, placed in a dish of water and left undisturbed for a time, it will slowly ex- pand and assume the form represented in Figure 69 A. It shows then a slender body about a quarter of an inch or less in length, attached at one end to some other solid object. At the other end it bears a crown of tentacles, which in the brown Hydra are from five to ten in number, and in the green Hydra are from five to twelve. These tentacles are very delicate, hairlike bodies, which may be expanded to considerable length, as at A, but when contracted, shrink into minute knobs hardly big enough to be seen. Indeed, the whole body of the Hydra is extremely con- tractile, and though when undisturbed it may be a half an inch or more in length, on being disturbed it will contract into a small body no larger than a pinhead; see Fig. 69 B. Hydra seems at first to be a stationary animal, although it can move its tentacles slowly to and fro in the water. A careful examina- tion, however, shows that it has some power of motion; the ani- mal, creeping by means of its base, can move slowly over the object upon which it is fastened. Occasionally also it moves by turning end over end. It first attaches its tentacles to the object to which its base is attached. Then the base lets go its hold and is moved over and fastened again in another spot. The tentacles let go their hold and the animal straightens up. The movement is not unlike that of a boy turning a handspring. Structure. — In the midst of the crown of tentacles is a little conical projection, on the top of which is a mouth. This is star-shaped rather 'than circular, and opens into a cavity which fills the whole of the body of the Hydra and even extends into its tentacles. This cavity is the digestive cavity and is called the gastrovascular cavity; see Fig. C. Hydra is a true multicellular animal, made up of many thou- sands of cells which are not alike but show a considerable differ- entiation and have a division of labor among them. All of these cells, however, are arranged into two layers, one on the out- side called the ectoderm (Gr. ectos = outside + derma = skin), ec 14? BIOLOGY FIG. 69. — HYDRA A, an animal in its expanded form; B, the same animal contracted; C, a diagram of the longitudinal section of the animal, showing the internal structure; D, an epithelio-muscle cell; E, a bit of the body wall highly magnified showing the two layers of the body; F, a digestive cell; G, one of the nematocysts with its thread extruded; H, a second type of nematocyst with the coiled thread within the sac; /, nematocyst of the third type with its thread extruded; J, a bit of the tentacle, very highly magnified, showing the batteries of the nematocysts; K, two of the secreting cells of the basal disk. en, cnidocil; ec, ectoderm; en, endoderm; m, mouth; mes, inesogloea; o, ovary; s, spermary. HYDRA FUSCA 143 (Fig. C), and one on the inside called the endoderm (Gr, endon = inside), en. These two layers are found throughout the body, both the ectoderm and endoderm extending into the tentacles to their very tips. Hydra is thus a double sac with no space between its two layers. The layers of ectoderm and endoderm are not in actual contact with each other, but are- separated by a thin supporting layer known as a mesogloea (Gr. mesos = middle + gloia = glue), mes. By means of this intermediate layer, the ectoderm and endoderm are very firmly attached to form one solid mass, forming a body wall made up of two layers of cells. Ectoderm. — The ectoderm is made of two chief kinds of cells. The first of these is the epithelio-muscle cells; Fig. D. These are in the shape of cones, with their broad ends outward and their tapering ends toward the mesoglcea. At the tapering ends some long fibers protrude which extend over the body of the animal next to the mesogloea. The great contractility of Hydra is due to these fibers. The second type of cells is the interstitial (Lat. inter = between + sistere = to stand) cells. These are found between the first cells and are somewhat smaller than the epithelio-muscle cells. They are chiefly interesting because they produce a very peculiar type of organ possessed by Hydra known as the nematocysts (Gr. nema = thread + cystis = sac) . The nematocysts, or stinging cells, are little sacs scattered all over the outside of the body of the animal, especially in the tentacles. Each of these is an oval sac, one side of which is pushed inward like the finger of a glove inverted into its palm; Figs. G, H} and 7. This inverted portion is in the form of a long thread, much longer than the diameter of the sac, and is wound up in a long coil inside of it; Fig. H. Besides this thread the sac contains a liquid. The peculiarity of these cells is that under a proper stimulus the minute thread may be inverted from the sac as shown in Figure G. This inverted por- tion when discharged carries with it a small quantity of poison, and thus each thread serves as a little poison dart. The thread 144 BIOLOGY is not shot away from the animal, but only protruded to its length. If any small animal with thin skin comes in contact with the Hydra, some of these threads are discharged, the animal is hit by them, paralyzed by the poison, and then transferred to the Hydra's mouth by means of its tentacles. In Hydra these cells are so small that they cannot pierce the human skin and their sting cannot be felt; in some allied animals, like the jellyfishes or sea nettles, these cells, although the same in structure as those of the Hydra, are much larger and may pro- duce a severe sting. After the thread is once discharged, it can- not be withdrawn again into its sac; the cell thus becomes use- less. It is necessary, therefore, for Hydra to be constantly replacing them, and new nematocysts are constantly growing from the old interstitial cells. The special cell that produces the nematocyst is known as the cnidoblast. This is simply one of the interstitial cells which has for its function the production of these stinging sacs. In the brown Hydra there are three kinds of nematocysts. The larger one, G, is somewhat pear-shaped, and when its thread is protruded it has, close to the base of the thread, two or three slender barbs projecting backwards. When the thread is dis- charged from the cell these barbs are ejected first. It is thought that their function is to pierce the skin of the animal into which the poison is to be ejected. Close to the base of the thread is a minute little organ called the cnidocil (Gr. cnide = thistle) whose function is unknown ; Fig. G, en. It has been supposed that it helps to discharge the cell as a trigger does a gun. This is doubt- ful, for it is known that the cell is most easily discharged by changing the internal pressure, rather than by any mechanical touch upon this cnidocil. The second of the nematocysts in the Hydra, H, is smaller but more elongated. The thread when discharged is very different in shape, lacks the projecting barb, and, relative to the size of the sac, is much longer. The third cell is smaller still, I, oval in shape, and contains a thread that when discharged always coils up in a spiral form. It is thought HYDRA FUSCA 145 that this spiral coiling is to enable the animal to adhere to the minute spines or hairs of its prey by coiling around them in a corkscrew fashion. The nematocysts are scattered all over the body of Hydra except in its base. In some parts, especially in the tentacles, they are grouped into little bunches which project from the side and form tubercles; Fig. J. These little clusters are spoken of as batteries. The Basal Disk. — The base of Hydra is different from the rest of the body. It secretes a sticky substance by means of which the animal attaches itself to an object. This base has the power of causing the animal to glide very slowly over the object upon which it is attached, though the exact method by which this motion is produced is not known. In this part of the body the nematocysts are lacking, and the epithelio-muscle cells not only have muscle fibers but some of them have the func- tion of secreting a cement, and differ in appearance from those of the rest of the body; Fig. K. Endoderm. — The endoderm is about twice as thick as the ectoderm and contains cells of two kinds, known as the digestive cells and the secretory cells. The digestive cells are long and cup-shaped, and have, extending from their base next to the mesoglcea, fibers of contractile substance. At their inner or free end they bear two lashing flagella; Fig. F. It is interest- ing to note that the free end of these cells may be protruded in the form of pseudopodia, much like those already seen in the Amoeba, and that they are able to take into their bodies small solid particles of food which are then probably digested within the cells of the body itself. Thus Hydra has a function of digestion similar to that of the Amoeba, being able, to a certain extent, to take inside of its digesting cells solid particles of food and to digest them (intracellular digestion). The chief digestion, how- ever, is carried on by the other cells, the secretory cells. These are smaller than the digestive cells and lack the contractile fibers at their base. They produce a secretion which is discharged 146 BIOLOGY from their free surface into the cavity of the body, and is thus poured upon the food which is taken into the mouth and lies free in the gastrovascular cavity (intercellular digestion). Hydra has thus, in addition to a method of digestion which resembles that of the Amoeba, the power of producing a digestive secretion, which is poured upon the food in the general cavity, only the nutritious portions of the food being absorbed after digestion. This method of digestion, which is peculiar to the higher animals, is, in the Hydra, combined with the simple method of digestion characteristic of the PROTOZOA; and in this respect the Hydra represents a transition stage between the unicellular animals and the higher, multicellular forms. The function of the hairlike flagella on the endodermal cells appar- ently is to keep in circulation the liquids present in the body and thus to aid in bringing the digestive juices in contact with the food which lies in the cavity. This is the only trace of a circu- latory system that the Hydra possesses. Nervous System. — According to recent investigation, it seems that Hydra possesses a very simple nervous system, so delicate, however, that it requires special methods of study; and very little is known about it. There is a series of nerve cells near the mouth and another near the base of the animal, and these are connected with excessively delicate fibers passing over the body. There are sensory cells on the surface layer that are probably connected with the nerve cells, and some of the nerve cells apparently send nerve fibers to the contractile fibers of the epithelio-muscle cells. This system is, however, very simple and rudimentary, and is of interest chiefly as the simplest type of nervous system found among animals. Growth and Budding.— The food of Hydra consists mainly of minute water animals which are captured by means of its tentacles. The tentacles are protruded into water, and small animals, coming in contact with them, are paralyzed by the discharge of the nematocysts. The tentacles then transfer the food to the mouth. It is pushed into the gastrovascular cavity HYDRA FUSCA 147 and then, by the contraction of the body wall, forced downward to the basal end of the cavity. Here it is mixed with the diges- tive juices of the animals and slowly digested. In time the diges- tive parts are dissolved and absorbed into the cells that form the body wall and are assimilated. After all the nutritious por- tions have been digested and absorbed from the food particles, the undigested refuse is then ejected from the mouth by a sudden contraction of the body and opening of the mouth, which throws the ejected portions some distance from the animal. As the result of digestion and assimilation, the animal grows. After it reaches a certain size, rarely more than one-half an inch in length, the further growth shows itself in the formation of buds which appear on the sides of the old individual; see Fig. A. These buds rapidly increase in length, and after a time a circle of minute secondary buds can be seen at their tips. These secondary buds are rudimentary tentacles, for they in- crease in length till eventually they become new tentacles. In the middle of the circle of tentacles thus formed a small opening makes its appearance, which forms a new mouth at the end of the growing bud. After a time the bud itself separates from the body of the animal from which it grew and floats off by itself as an independent individual, identical in structure with the one from which it came, though somewhat smaller. In this way the Hydra reproduces itself indefinitely by budding (gemmation) as long as it has sufficient food and proper conditions for feeding and growth. If the conditions are favorable two or more buds may be seen arising from the same individual, and occasionally a secondary bud may be found arising from the side of the bud, even before it has broken away from the animal that produced it. In the case of the Hydra, however, these buds do not remain attached very long, but always separate; so that we never find the animals grouped together in great masses. While we may find one Hydra with one, two, or three buds, this is the extent of group formation. In closely allied animals, however, the budding may go on almost indefinitely, and groups are formed 148 BIOLOGY containing hundreds of members, all having arisen from the original by budding. This occurs among the hydroids which are common at the seashore, examples of which are shown in Figures 70, 72, and 73. In such colonies the individual mem- bers are called zooids. Polymorphism. — In the colonies of hydroids shown in Fig- ure 71 the members of the colony are all alike. It not infre- quently happens, however, that when one of these hydroids produces a colony by budding, the members (zooids) assume FIG. 70. — PARYPHA An animal related to Hydra, but forming colonies by budding. FIG. 71. — ALCYONIUM. AN ANI- MAL RELATED TO HYDRA WHICH FORMS COLONIES The individual members, which have arisen by budding, are imbedded in a lime base; p, one of the members of the colony more highly magnified. forms unlike each other. In Figure 72 will be seen a colony with two types of members; one of them possessing tentacles and adapted for feeding, and the other without tentacles but develop- ing the reproductive bodies inside of a case. One of these mem- bers is known as the nutritive zooid, nz, and the other as the generative zooid, gz. In some other types of hydroids the mem- bers which arise by budding assume even a greater variety of form. In the colony shown in Figure 73 there is a complicated HYDRA FUSCA 149 colony made up of at least five different types of members or zooids. Among them may be found members adapted to feed- ing, n; others having purely sensory functions, called tentacu- lar zooids, t; some adapted for reproduction, g; others in the form of bells with muscles which enable them to move about, called the swimming zooids, sw; and finally at the top of the colony e' FIG. 72. — CAMPANULARIA A colony of Hydroids showing a differenti- ation into feeding zooids, nz, and generative zooids, gz; e, e, eggs in different stages of development; e' the young embryo extruded into the water. . 73. - A SIPHONOPHORE An animal showing a high condi- tion of polymorphism; /, the floating zooid; g, the generative zooid ; n.the nutritive zooid; sw, the swimming zooid; t, the tentacular zooid. a single one develops as a gas bladder, /, which enables the animal to float in the water. All of these combine to form a colony. Where several different types are found arising by budcfeng from the same original stock the condition is spoken of as polymorphism (Gr. polus = many + morphe = form). Polymorphism is best illustrated in simple organisms, being well developed among the animals related to the Hydra; but the samp 150 BIOLOGY principle is found in a less developed extent in some of the organ- isms with a higher structure, though nowhere do we find it so highly developed as among the hydroids. Where polymorphism is developed the whole colony acts as a unit, and the colony, therefore, may be compared to a more highly complex organ- ism with its various organs. Polymorphism always arises as the result of asexual growth and not by sexual reproduction, and when it occurs the members of the colony always show a differentiation in function as well as in shape and structure. Regeneration of Lost Parts. — Hydra has a wonderful power of reproducing lost parts. If it is cut into two pieces, each part will develop the part that it has lost and becomes a new Hydra. Indeed, it may be cut into a large number of frag- ments, and every fragment is capable of growing and developing into a new form like that of which it was originally a part. If the small conical projection containing the tentacles is cut off from the rest of the Hydra, each piece will develop the part that it has lost. The animal may be split lengthwise into two or four parts and each will become a perfect animal. If a head is split in two and the parts slightly separated, each will develop its crown of tentacles and a two-headed animal will result. If an animal is turned wrong side out, it will adjust itself to new conditions and a perfect animal will soon be produced. This power of regenerating lost parts is found in many of the lower animals, but in no place is it better developed than in Hydra. In the higher animal the power of regenerating lost parts eventu- ally disappears entirely. It is very evident that this power must be of considerable advantage to the animal in the struggle for existence. In Hydra the power is so extraordinarily developed that a piece of the animal not more than one-hundredth of an inch in length is capable of reproducing all of the parts that are lacking and developing into a new animal. In some cases the new animal is produced by a multiplication of cells from these pieces, so that a fair-sized animal is developed; while in other cases the cells and fragments are remolded into new icdividuals HYDRA FUSCA 151 which are like the original in shape but much smaller in size. Some of the experiments described were originally performed long ago, by Trembley in 1740 ; but they have since been confirmed by other investigators. Sexual Reproduction. — By the method of budding Hydra may multiply indefinitely as long as it has plenty of food. It has also a second method of reproduction by a true sexual proc- ess. Under certain, not well-understood, conditions the animal produces outgrowths on its side, shown in Figure 69 C, which are the sexual glands, — ovaries, o, and spermaries, s. Within them are produced special cells, called eggs and sperms, which unite with each other in a manner similar to that seen in the cells of Pandorina (page 74). The significance of this repro- duction will be noticed in a later chapter. Hydra, as will be seen from the above description, possesses the systems of alimentation, metabolism, motion, and reproduc- tion. Circulation is wanting; respiration is carried on through the general surface of the cells; no excretory system is found, each cell probably excreting its waste products directly into the water; support is unnecessary in such a small animal; the rudi- ments of nerves suggest the beginning of a coordinating system. THE RELATION OF THE WHOLE ORGANISM TO ITS DIFFER- ENT PARTS With the appearance of multicellular organisms we also find that the entire animal has -now a life more or less independent of the life of its parts. The multicellular animal or plant lives a life as a complex, and in addition each cell has a life of its own; so that we can distinguish, in a multicellular animal, a life of the organism as a whole and a life of its separate cells. It is possible for the death of the organism as a complex to occur while the individual cells still remain alive. It is true that in the multicellular organism each of the individual cells is dependent upon the activity of the whole to keep it properly nourished and supplied with the necessary conditions of its life. The different 152 BIOLOGY cells that make up such organisms are not independent and can- not live long except when related to the other cells that make up the multicellular organism. Nevertheless, there is a certain amount of independence in the individual cells, especially among plants and some of the lowest animals; for in these we may remove only a comparatively small number of cells from the whole organism and these cells will still retain their vitality, still continue their power of growth, and under proper circumstances develop more cells which eventually become exactly like the animal from which they were obtained. This is especially true of Hydra, which can be cut into many pieces, each piece retain- ing the power of independent life, and in time becoming an inde- pendent and well-developed animal. In such low organisms the life of the organism as a complex has not wholly destroyed the independence of the individual parts. This is more or less true throughout the whole of the plant kingdom. Among most higher plants as well as the lower, small pieces separated from the parent plant will not die at once, but may, if put under proper conditions, develop into fully grown individuals like those from which the fragments were obtained. With animals, however, it is only among the lowest and simplest forms that a piece, containing a relatively small number of cells, can be separated from the rest and still be capable of developing into a new organism like the original, as in the case of the Hydra. As we pass to the higher animals this power of regeneration disappears, and among almost all animals, even of comparatively low structure, the independent life of the parts is lost, so that when one portion is removed from the complex that makes up the animal it no longer retains its power of life and growth. But even in these cases and among the highest animals, we do find that some parts may have more or less independent life when separated from the organism of which they are a part. In an animal like a frog, for example, the heart may be totally removed from the body and it will still keep up its life for many hours when put under proper condi- HYDRA FUSCA 153 tions, long after the frog itself has been killed. More remarkable is this power in the case of a turtle, for here even when the animal has its head entirely cut from the body, and the rest of the animal destroyed, the heart, if removed and kept under proper conditions, will keep on beating for at least two days. Still more remarkable is it to find that in the air passages of the turtle there are ciliated cells which have a special power of motion ; Fig. 14 C. During all the life of the turtle these cilia are in a state of active motion, and after the turtle is dead the cilia may continue moving for as long as two weeks. We thus see that among the higher organisms the death of the animal as a whole does not necessarily involve an immediate death of all its parts. The individual parts are, of course, closely dependent upon each other, and, at least in the higher organisms, the life of neither is capable of being long maintained without the other; but the life of the individual cell may frequently continue some time after the life of the organism as a whole has been brought to an end. From this it follows that the term death may have a different meaning in different connections. In speaking of the death of an animal, we may refer, and usually do refer, to the death of the animal as a whole, which means the destruction of the compli- cated mechanism that forms the animal organism. But we may also refer to the death of the individual parts, and in this case the exact time when the animal comes to its death is difficult to state. The animal as a whole may die on one day, while some of its parts may remain alive at least two weeks. In such instances it is not easy to say when death occurs. Never- theless, it is customary to refer by this term, not to the death of the individual parts or the individual cells which make up the animal, but to the destruction of the organism as a whole, which causes it to cease to act as a unit. Usually, therefore, death refers to the breaking down of the mecha- nism of which an organism is composed so that its parts do not act together. 154 BIOLOGY LABORATORY WORK Hydra. — Almost any pond will furnish Hydra, which may be found clinging to the under side of pond-lily leaves. If such leaves are placed in a dish of clean water, the Hydra will detach themselves from the leaves and cling to the side of the dish. For study, a specimen is to be detached from the dish, placed in a watch glass containing a little water, and examined under the microscope with a low-power objective. The general structure and motion of the animals may easily be seen. For the cellular structure of the body, stained, mounted sections should be furnished the student by the instructor. For a study of the nematocysts, a bit of the tentacles of a brown Hydra should be cut off with delicate scissors and placed on a slide in a small drop of water. A cover glass is placed upon the drop and gently pressed. This will crush the tentacle and cause many of the nematocysts to discharge their stinging hairs. The nematocysts may also be made to discharge their stinging hairs if a little weak acetic acid is added .to the water. A careful examination with a |-inch objective will show all three kinds of nematocysts, both discharged and undischarged. For comparison of Hydra with other Hydroids, preserved and mounted specimens should be furnished by the instructor, some of which should show colonies and others jellyfishes. BOOKS FOR REFERENCE COLTON, Zoology, Descriptive and Practical, D. C. Heath & Co.r Boston. PRATT, Invertebrate Zoology, Ginn & Co., Boston. MARSHALL and HURST, Practical Zoology, G. P. Putnam's Sons, New York. CHAPTER VIII MULTICELLULAR ANIMALS: THE EARTHWORM (LUM- BRICUS) THE earthworm is an extremely common animal the world over, being found buried in moist earth in practically all parts of the world. There are numerous species, differing from each other in minor details, but agreeing in their fundamental structure. The animals vary in size from those an inch or two in length, to some which are nearly a foot; and one species is reported two feet in length. Earthworms are of practical importance in stirring up the soil. They are constantly en- gaged in bringing soil from below to the surface, and depositing it at the mouths of their burrows. By this slow but constant action they are of much value to agriculture, constantly renew- ing the surface soil. ANATOMY Shape of Body. — Examined externally, the earthworm is an elongated animal, more or less cylindrical in shape, tapering, however, at the two ends; Fig. 74. The head, or anterior end, is more tapering than the other, the blunter one being the posterior end. One side of the animal is lighter colored than the other and slightly flattened, the opposite side being more rounded. When the animal is in its natural position on the surface of the ground, the flat side is kept undermost and the rounded and darker-colored side uppermost. We thus have an anterior and a posterior end, a ventral and a dorsal surface, and, consequently, a right and left side to the animals. The animal is, therefore, bilaterally symmetrical. Segments or Metameres. — The body of the earthworm is divided into a number of rings (Fig. 74) called segments or metameres (Gr. meta =• after -f meros = part). The number is not constant, being greater in the older and larger animals 155 156 BIOLOGY than in the younger ones, and increasing with age. Most of these rings are alike in shape and size, but a few of them differ slightly from the others. The first one at the anterior end is not a complete ring, but a minute pro- jection which is known as the prostomium (Gr. pro = before + stoma = mouth). It is slightly movable and is the most sensitive part of the animal. The second segment is not a complete ring, but rather in the form of a horseshoe, with the open part of the horseshoe above, and with the prostomium lobe fitting into the opening as shown in Figure 75. Underneath the prostomium and over the sec- ond segment is an opening, the mouth, m. The third segment is a complete ring, but rather small, and from this point backwards the segments are all alike in shape, increasing slightly in size until a maximum is reached, and from this point remaining essentially the same in size and shape to the posterior end of the body. A short distance back from the head there is a series of rings, from the twenty-eighth FIG. 74. — AN EARTHWORM, FROM BELOW AND FROM THE SIDE a, the anus; m , mouth; od, opening of oviduct; sr, opening of seminal receptacles; v, opening of vasdeferena; a, aetse. FIG. 75. — THE FIRST THREE SEGMENTS OF THE EARTH- WORM A, from the front; B, from the side; p, the prostomial lobe; m, the mouth. THE EARTHWORM to the thirty-fifth segments, known as the clitellum (Lat. clitellce = saddle) ; Fig. 74. These segments are larger than elsewhere and have a thicker wall and special functions. At the extreme pos- terior end the segments become smaller, and the last one has an opening which is the posterior opening of the diges- tive tract, the vent or anus, a. Be- cause of this ringed structure the earthworm belongs to a class of animals called Annulata (Gr. annulus = ring). Structure of the Body. — The body of the earthworm can be compared to a tube within a tube; Fig. 76. The outer tube is called the body wall, 6, and the inner tube the alimentary canal or the digestive tract. Between the body wall and the digestive sys- tem is a space filled with a liquid, this space being a true body cavity or coelom (Gr. koilos = hollow), c, differing thus from Hydra, that has no coelom. The body cavity is not, however, an open space extending from the anterior to the posterior end, but is divided by partitions into a series of chambers, with a chamber for each segment. The partitions are called septa (sometimes called dissepiments) . There are minute openings through each septum, so that the liquid that fills the body cavity may pass through; thus the different chambers are in communication with each other. FIG. 76. — DIAGRAM SHOW- ING THE ANTERIOR END OF THE EARTHWORM CUT LENGTHWISE THROUGH A VERTICAL MEDIAN LINE 6, body wall; od, oviduct; c, coalom; cr, crop; g, gizzard; m, mouth; mu, muscles; n, nephridia; o, ovary; of, (esophagus; ph, pharynx; s, septa; sp, spermary ; sr, seminal recep- tacles ; t, typhlosole. 158 BIOLOGY The Alimentary Canal. — The alimentary canal (enteron) is a straight tube extending from one end of the animal to the other, without any convolutions. It does, however, show several distinct regions. The mouth opens into a slightly swollen section known as the throat or pharynx, ph. The pharyngeal walls are muscular, with a radiating series of muscles that pass outward to be attached to the body wall, mu. The contraction of these muscles will cause an expansion of the pharynx and convert it into a sucking organ by means of which the animal draws food into its mouth. Behind the pharynx the canal contracts into a straight gullet or oesopha- gus, oe, which continues back to the fifteenth segment. Here it enlarges into a thin-walled crop, cr, which is followed in the fifteenth and seventeenth segments by a second enlarge- ment with thicker walls, called the gizzard, g. Beyond this the intestine extends in a straight line to the anal aperture or vent. The intestine is not a simple cylindrical tube but has its dorsal side folded inward to form a longitudinal ridge known as the typhlosole (Gr. typhlos = blind + solen = tube), ty (Fig. 81), whose purpose seems to be only to increase the amount of interior surface within the intestine. Circulatory System. — The circulatory system consists of two parts, the blood system and the codomic fluid. The blood system. — A series of tubes or vessels containing blood comprises the circulatory system. The blood of the earthworm is red, a very unusual condition among lower ani- mals. The red color is due to a substance called haemoglobin (Gr. haima = blood + Lat. globus = globe), which is dissolved in the liquid part of the blood, and is not contained in the corpuscles, as it is in the frog and higher animals. This blood is kept in constant motion in the vessels, forced along by their contractions. The chief vessels and the direction of the blood current are shown in Figure 77 and they are as follows: — Running anteroposteriorly, just above the alimentary tract, is a large longitudinal dorsal vessel, dv, with muscular walls. THE EARTHWORM 159 These muscles produce waves of contraction, which, arising at the posterior end, force the blood forward. In the posterior half of the body small branches pass from this tube into the intestine, ei, supplying its walls, and the blood then enters a rather large vessel in the typhlosole, from which it passes back by short tubes, ai, into the dorsal vessel. The greater part of the blood in the dorsal vessel flows forward to the seg- ments 6-11, where five large circular vessels arise from it, ht, which pass around the sides of the body to enter a sub- intestinal vessel, w, also extending lengthwise and lying be- Uv FIG. 77. — DIAGRAM SHOWING THE CHIEF BLOOD VESSELS OF THE EARTHWORM an, the anterior end; po, the posterior end of the body; dv, dorsal vessels; cv, circular vessels; ei, efferent intestinal; (Bourne and Benham.) ai, afferent intestinal; ht, hearts; snv, subneural vessel; vv, ventral vessel. neath the intestine. These circular vessels are called hearts, since they contract, and force the blood downward into the ventral vessel. When reaching the ventral vessel, part of the blood flows forward, in front of the hearts, and part of it back- ward. From this ventral vessel branches arise which pass out into the body wall and into other organs supplying the body generally with blood. After passing through the organs of the body wall, etc., the blood is collected into another set of vessels which pass into a third longitudinal vessel lying under the nerve chord, the subneural (Gr. neuron = nerve), snv Through this it flows toward the posterior end. In the intestinal region there arises from the subneural vessel, in each segment, a circular vessel, cv, which passes up around the body to empty 160 BIOLOGY into the dorsal vessel, dv, thus bringing the blood back again into the dorsal vessel. There are numerous other small ves- sels, some of which are shown in Figure 77, but the chief ones are those that have been described. The blood is forced onward by the contraction of the walls of the dorsal vessel and the hearts, which are provided with valves preventing any back flow when the contractions occur. The course of the blood is rather indefinite and the pure and impure blood are not distinctly separated from each other, as in higher animals. There are no true arteries or veins, and no true hearts. This blood is associated With respiration, and also carries nourishment from the absorbing organs in the intestine to the active tissues, and carries waste products from the active cells to the excreting organs. Coelomic or Perivisceral Fluid. — The chambers of the body cavity are filled with a fluid called the ccelomic or perivisceral (Gr. peri = around -fLat. viscera = internal organs) fluid, which serves also as a circulatory medium. The food that is absorbed makes its way into the body cavity and is partly absorbed by this fluid. This liquid is forced irregularly backward and forward through the cavity of the body by the motions of the animal, and the nutritious parts of the food which are dis- solved in it are thus directly carried to and fro and brought in contact with the living tissues of the body, that are bathed in this liquid. There is no distinct circulation of this fluid, and it cannot properlybe called a circulatoryfluid. It does, however, have some of the functions of the blood, since it carries to and fro a part of the material absorbed from the digestive tract. It corresponds more closely to the lymph of higher animals. Respiration. — The earthworm has no distinct respiratory system, but the blood vessels in their circulation in the skin are brought into a very close proximity with the air. Gases are readily exchanged through the thin skin, and respiration is carried on easily without any special respiratory organs except the minute blood vessels that lie beneath the skin. THE EARTHWORM 161 Excretory System. — Most of the excreted matter (with the exception of gases) is passed to the exterior by a series of tubes known as nephridia (Gr. nephros = kidney), one pair in each segment. Each of them (see Fig. 78) consists of a long tube, which begins in a segment of the body cavity as a minute funnel-shaped opening, i, and then passes through the septa, s, to the segment immediately behind. In the posterior segment, the tube is coiled back and forth in three distinct loops that differ in structure and function. Eventually the distal end passes through the walls of the body to the exterior, by a lateral opening, e, in each segment. These nephridia are very delicate organs and can only be made out by very careful study with a magnifying glass. Their function in excretion is as follows: The funnel opening in the anterior segment is „ __ .... ... FIG. 78. — A NEPHRIDIUM, COMPLETE guarded with cells provided with cilia, and some of the coils are also lined with cilia. The movements of these cilia produce currents in the liquid in the tube and force the liquids through the tube to the exterior. As a further result of the action of these cilia, solid particles of waste material, which may be floating in the ccelomic fluid, are forced into the tube and then through the tube, passing through its coils and finally reaching the exterior through its opening. The coiled walls of the tube are made up of thick active cells which are well supplied with blood vessels. These are secreting cells and resemble gland cells. They have the power of extracting waste products from the blood and excreting them into the tube which they surround. The materials enter the duct of this nephridium and are slowly forced along by the ciliary current, and finally carried to the i, incurrent opening; e, excurrent opening; s, septa. 162 BIOLOGY exterior. These nephridia have as their primary function the removing from the body of the waste products containing nitrogen, related to urea. Their function is thus similar to that of the kidneys of the higher animals, and indeed their structure is not unlike the kidneys of some of the ver- tebrates. The Coordinating or Nervous System. — The nervous system consists of a central system and a peripheral (Gr. peri = around Fia. 79. — DIAGRAM SHOWING THE NERVOUS SYSTEM IN THE FRONT END OF THE BODY eg, cerebral ganglia; com, commissures; m, mouth; oe, oesophagus; pr, prostomium; v, ventral cord. (Shipley and MacBride.) + pherein = to bear) system, the latter composed of a large number of nerves passing from the central system into the various regions of the body. The central system. — 1. The cerebral ganglia. These are two nerve knots or ganglia, sometimes called the brain, united together and lying above the pharynx in the anterior part of the body cavity; Fig. 79 eg. From them, extending down- ward and backward, a pair of cords or commissures (Lat. committere — to join together), com, pass around the phar- ynx and unite with each other below on the ventral side THE EARTHWORM 163 of the pharynx a short distance behind the mouth. 2. The ventral cord. When the two commissures have united they form a cord which passes to the posterior end in the median line of the body, closely attached to the body wall beneath the intestines; this is the ventral cord, v. In each segment the cord is slightly enlarged to form what is called a ganglion; see Fig. 80 vc. At the posterior end of the body this cord becomes smaller and finally terminates. The peripheral system. — The nerves which form the per- ipheral system are numerous. From the cerebral ganglion two large nerves arise, which soon divide into many branches and pass forward to the prostomium, giving it a very large nerve supply and making it a very sensitive organ; Fig. 79. From the commissures extending around the oesophagus arise the nerves that supply the second and third segments of the body. From the ventral cord in each of the segments, from the fourth to the posterior end of the body, there arise three pairs of nerves. Two pairs arise from the ganglionic enlarge- ment and one pair from the sides of the ventral cord behind the septum that separates each segment from the next. Reproductive System. — The only method of reproduction in the earthworm is by sexual process.* The two sexes are, how- ever, combined in the same individual, so that the earthworm is what is called an hermaphrodite; see page 251. Female reproductive organs. — In the thirteenth segment there is a pair of small glands called ovaries, situated on the ventral side of the body cavity close to the middle line; Fig. 80 ov. In the same segment is the opening of a funnel which leads into a short tube passing through the septa into the next posterior segment. Here it is slightly enlarged to form an egg sac, and from the sac a small duct extends through the body wall to the exterior, opening upon the ventral surface of the fourteenth segment. These ducts are the oviducts, od, and through them the eggs produced by the ovary pass to the *The earthworm has a slight power of regeneration of lost parts, but this power is far less developed than in Hydrg,, If it is cut into two pieces two individuals are formed. 164 BIOLOGY exterior. The openings of the reproductive organs may be seen in Figure 74. Male reproductive organs. — In the tenth and eleventh seg- ments there is a pair of glands, the spermaries, sp, in which are formed the male reproductive elements. In these two seg- ments their position corresponds to the position of the ovary in the thirteenth segment. They are very small glands and can only be seen by microscopic examination. Behind each of these sperm glands is a funnel-shaped, cili- ated opening, leading into a tube which passes through the septa into the next seg- ment, where it is slightly coiled, and then passes backward. The tubes from the two sperm glands on each side unite with each other in the twelfth segment to form a single duct, which passes back through the septa to the fifteenth segment, where it opens through the body wall to the exte- rior. This duct is known as the vas deferens (Lat. vasa = vessel -f- deferens = carrying FIG. 80. — DIAGRAM SHOWING THE REPRO- DUCTIVE SYSTEM OF THE EARTHWORM The numbers represent the number of segments, seminal receptacle seminal vesicles; es, egg sac; sr, seminal receptacles; ne, nephridia; ' ' OB, ovary; od, oviduct; sp, spermaries; vc, ventral nerve cord; vd, vasdeferens. down); Fig. 80 vd. In the ninth, tenth, and eleventh seg- ments are large sacs known as seminal vesicles, sv, which serve as a storehouse for the secretion of the sperm glands, before these secretions pass to the exterior through the vas def- THE EARTHWORM 165 erens. At the junction between the ninth and tenth, and between the tenth and eleventh segments, may be found two pairs of white sacs, each opening to the exterior by an opening at the junction line between the segments. These are the seminal receptacles, sr, and their function is to receive the secretions from the seminal glands in copulation. Copulation and Egg Laying. — Although the earthworm is an animal producing both male and female elements in the same individual, the habits of the animal are such that there is no fertilization of the egg by the sperm of the same individual that produces the egg, but a cross fertilization always occurs between two individuals. At the breeding season, which is early in the summer, two individuals place themselves side by side with their heads in opposite directions, and by means of the secretions from the glands in their skin there is formed a slimy covering that holds the two individuals in close contact (copu- lation). In this position, each transfers sperm material (see Chapter XII) from its sperm glands into the seminal receptacles of the other, after which they separate. During copulation, or immediately afterwards, a secretion is produced by the cli- tellum, which forms a band around the animal that extends from the twenty-eighth to the thirty-fifth segment of the body. At the close of copulation, after the animals have separated, this band is gradually pushed forward until it finally slips off over the head. As the band passes forward over the fourteenth segment a certain number of eggs are extruded into it from the oviduct; and when it passes over the ninth and tenth segments some of the sperm material from the seminal receptacles is also ejected into it. As it passes off over the head it closes up by its own elasticity. Inside of this band the eggs of each individual are thus mixed with the sperm from the other indi- vidual and cross fertilization occurs. This case holding the eggs and sperms is now known as a cocoon, and within it the eggs develop into earthworms. The cocoons are deposited in the soil and may be found early in the summer. .00 BIOLOGY MICROSCOPIC ANATOMY OR HISTOLOGY The body of the earthworm is made of large numbers of cells of great variety in form and structure. The cellular structure in some of the organs of the body can readily be made out under the microscope, but in others the cells can be seen only by special methods. The most important features of the histology are as follows: — Body WalL — The body wall contains several layers; Fig. 81. On the outside a very thin cuticle covers the whole body, 3 FIG. 81. — DIAGRAM REPRESENTING A OF THE EARTHWORM'S BODY of the nephridium; end; perforated, however, by numerous openings through which the various secretions pass. Inside of the cuticle is a somewhat thicker layer of cells mainly cylindrical in form, known as THE EARTHWORM 167 the epidermis, ep. Some of the cells are sensory cells; others have the power of secreting a slimy material which keeps the surface of the animal moist, and these are called gland cells; Fig. 82. Under the epidermis is a layer of circular muscles, cm, extending around the body, each muscle in the form of a very long, slender fiber, tapering at both ends. Extending around the bodj* as they do in a circular direction, their contraction will tend to constrict the body and reduce its diameter. Under this is a thicker layer of muscles, running lengthwise, the longitudinal mus- cles, Im. These are arranged in bundles and in a cross section they appear to radiate like a feather, but each longitudinal muscle fiber has the same structure as the circular muscles. By their contraction the animal's body is shortened. Under the longitudinal muscles is an ex- tremely delicate layer of flat cells forming a thin membrane bound- ing the body wall on the surface lying next to the body cavity. This is the peritoneal (Gr. peri = around + letnetn = to stretch) epithelium, per. Eight delicate bristles, called setae, extend through the mus- cle layers of the body wall and protrude through the skin, Fig. 81 s. They are arranged in four groups, two in each segment, and are attached by several minute muscles on the inner end. By means of these the setae may be slightly ex- truded, or moved to and fro so that the tips may be directed forward and backward. If the earthworm is pulled gently through the fingers, the projecting setae may be felt as a slight roughness on the skin. Motion. — The motor system of the earthworm is extremely Fie. 82. — HIGHLY MAGNIFIED SECTION OF THE SOX OF THE EARTHWORM 168 BIOLOGY simple and crude, consisting only of the two layers of muscles, longitudinal and circular, and the seta. The method of its action is as follows: By the contraction of the circular muscles the diameter of the body is reduced, and, inasmuch as the body cavity is filled with the perivisceral liquid, and liquids are incompressible, the contraction of the diameter of the body must necessarily increase its length. The ends are thus pushed apart; but the setae pointed backward act as anchors, and the pushing of the two ends of the body apart will tend to push the head forward, the rest of the body remaining practically stationary. After the contraction of the circular muscles the longitudinal muscles are contracted, thus shortening the length of the body and at the same time increasing its diameter. As the body shortens, the tail is pulled forward toward the head, the setae again serving as anchors to prevent the body from moving in the wrong direction. Thus by alternately con- tracting the circular and longitudinal muscles, the head is pushed forward and the tail is pulled up to the head. If the earthworm wishes to move backward, it needs only to contract the muscles connected with the setae and to point them for- ward, when they will serve as anchors to prevent the body from being pushed forward; and the alternate contraction of the two layers of muscles will make the animal move backwards. This alternate contraction of the muscles does not occur the whole length of the body at once, but sections -may contract or relax, causing waves of contraction to extend from one end of the animal to the other. This method of locomotion is very inefficient for an animal living on a flat surface, and the earth- worm is only able to move slowly upon the ground. In his underground burrows, however, where the animal nearly fills up the burrow, the method of locomotion is much more efficient and enables the animal to move with considerable rapidity. Alimentary System. — As shown in Figure 83, the alimentary canal consists of five layers. On the very inside next to the cavity of the intestine is a layer of epithelial cells (Gr. epi = THE EARTHWORM 169 upon + thele = nipple), ep, which secrete the digestive fluids and also aid in the absorption of the food. Just outside of these is a layer of blood vessels, v. A third layer consists of circular muscle fibers extending around the intestine, cm, and outside of this is a layer of longitudinal muscles, Im. A fifth layer on the outside consists of a thick coat of cells known as chlorogogen cells, c. These cover the intestine with a thick layer on its outer surface and also form the substance of the typhlosole, which, as shown in Figure 81, lies within the cavity of the in- testine. The function of the chlorogogen cells is not known, though it is probable that they have something to do with the absorption FIG. 83. — MAGNIFIED VIEW OF A of food and possibly have a SECTION OF THE ALIMENTARY CANAL function of secretion. On either side of the oesophagus in the tenth, eleventh, and twelfth segments are three pairs of white bodies known as calciferous glands (Lat. calx = lime -\-ferre = to bear), producing a lime secretion which is poured into the intestine. Its function is probably to reduce the acidity of the food, although very little is known about these glands or their uses. The Nervous System. — The microscopic study of the nerv- ous system of the earthworm, as well as of all higher animals, has shown that while there are several kinds of cells in ijb, the chief ones, and probably the only ones possessing nervous functions, are large cells called neurons. Neurons. — A single neuron of the earthworm is shown in Figure 84 A. It has a rather irregular rounded body, with a prominent nucleus, and from it arises a long process, much longer than appears in the figure. Side branches of this proc- c, chlorogogen cells; cm, circular muscles; ep, epithelium, lining the canal; Im, longitudinal muscles; v, blood vessels. (Modified from Sedgwick and Wilson.) 170 BIOLOGY ess may be seen near the cell body. Other much shorter processes arise also from the cell body and divide quickly into branches. The long fiber is called the axon or the nerve fiber, and the other branching projections are called dendrites (Gr. dendron = tree). Sometimes the axons at their outer or peripheral end break up into numerous branches known as A, a single neuron; B, a section of the ventral surface, showing the nerve cord and its connection with the muscles and dermis. arb, arborization of an afferent nerve; «/, sensory nerve fiber; mf, motor fiber; so, sensory organ. mn, motor nerve cell; arborizations (Lat. arbor = tree), arb. In such a neuron im- pulses enter the cell body through the dendrites and pass out through the axon. Similar neurons make up the nervous system of all animals which have been carefully studied. In shape the neurons are quite varied (Fig. 85), but in all cases there is a cell body with one or more branching processes arising from it; and an axon fiber of varying length extends outward from the cell. Vast numbers of these neurons are aggregated together to make the nervous system of the earthworm. The cerebral gan-. glia contain them in great numbers, and the many nerves shown in Figure 79 are formed chiefly of bundles of the axons of the neurons, whose cell bodies are either in the ganglia or at the THE EARTHWORM 171 outer ends of the nerves, in the prostomial lobe, etc. The ventral cord also is a mass of neurons, and since it is simpler than the brain it may be more easily understood and will illustrate better the relation of neurons to the rest of the body. The ventral cord. — A cross section of the cord shows it to be covered on the outside by a thin layer of epi- thelium, the perito- neum, inside of which is a muscular sheet containing a few blood vessels; Fig. 86. Near the dorsal surface of the cord are three clear rods running lengthwise, called giant fibers, g, containing nerve fibers. The cord itself is really two cords fused to- gether. Embedded in the cord may be seen many large cells, which are the bodies of the neu- rons making up the cord; and extending out to form the nerve fibers which arise from the cord are the axons of these neurons. FIG. 85. — NEURONS OF VARIOUS TYPES FROM HIGHER ANIMALS A, a complex of neurons from the cerebrum; B and C, neurons from the cerebellum; D, a single neuron from the cerebrum. n FIG. 86. — MAGNIFIED SECTION OF THE VENTRAL CORD OF THE EARTHWORM g, giant fibers; n, neurons; nf, nerve fibers; v, blood vessels. 172 BIOLOGY The relation of these neurons to the body may be seen from Figure 84. Most of the cells which appear so prominently in the cord have connections as shown at mn. Each has a complex of dendrites which branch in, the substance of the cord, and a single axon which passes out through the nerve to be finally distributed to the muscles. These neurons send impulses to the muscles and are called motor cells. Some send their axons to muscles on the same side, as shown in the figure, and others send theirs across the cord to the muscles on the other side of the body. These axons are known as efferent (Lat. ex = out + ferre — to bear) nerve fibers. Some of the axons do not pass out of the cord, but simply connect dif- ferent parts of the cord itself. The neurons which carry impulses from without toward the center are called afferent (Lat. ad = to + ferre = to bear) neurons. These never have their neuron bodies within the cord but somewhere outside it. Many of them take their origin in special cells called sense cells (Fig. 84 so), which are sensitive to certain external stimuli. The impulses excited in the cell pass over the axon to the ventral cord. Where the axon enters the cord it breaks up into numerous branches, or arborizations, arb, which spread out in the cord itself. The impulses entering by the axons may pass from the arboriza- tions to the dendrites of the motor cells and excite them to action. Hence a stimulus applied to the skin may produce a movement. The sense organs. — The cells at the end of the afferent nerves constitute the sense organs, and they are so constructed as to be influenced by different external forces. The earthworm has no eyes, although some of its sense organs appear to be slightly affected by a bright light. They have no ears and no sense of sound, though they are very sensitive to a slight jar. They have a sense of taste, located in the mouth, and also a sense of smell. None of the sense organs is visible to the naked eye, but they may be seen by microscopic study. The end of the THE EARTHWORM 173 prostomial lobe is the most sensitive part of the body; here the sense cells are most abundant and here the nerve supply is the largest; Fig. 79. LABORATORY WORK ON THE EARTHWORM Only large specimens should be used. These can be purchased from dealers in natural history supplies or they may be collected by searching with a lantern on a dark night, when they may be found stretched out on the ground and thus readily collected. A little care and experience is needed to do this without disturbing them, for they are very sensitive to the slightest jar and quickly retreat into their burrows. The specimens should first be studied alive, if possible, to see the con- traction of the dorsal blood vessel and the contractions of the body in locomotion. The setae may be felt by drawing the body gently through the fingers, and they can be examined under a lens. If the worms are to be dissected, or preserved for future use, they should be treated as follows: Place the worms in a shallow dish with wet filter paper torn into shreds. The animals will swallow it and as it passes through the alimentary canal it will carry the dirt from the canal. This part of the process is not necessary unless microscopic sections are to be made. If they are to be kept simply for dissection, they can be preserved at once as follows: — • Place a number of worms in a shallow dish with just water enough to cover them. Add a few drops of alcohol, and, after a few moments, add a little more. Continue adding the alcohol gradually until the ani- mals have become motionless and relaxed. This process should take at least two hours. Then transfer them to a large shallow dish containing 50% alcohol, straightening the animals out, and laying them side by side. After an hour replace the 50% alcohol with 70%; after a few hours change again to a fresh lot of 70% alcohol. Finally the animals are to be placed in 90% alcohol. It is important to keep them straight in this final hard- ening fluid, and this may be done by laying them out on rather stiff paper, without touching each other, and rolling them, putting about a dozen in each roll. This will hold them in proper shape, and the rolls may be stored in tall jars and will keep indefinitely. Animals so preserved will serve either for microscopic sections or for dissection. Sections should be made by the instructor and, after stain- ing, should be mounted and furnished the student for study. For dissection, the animal should be placed, under water, in a tray containing dissecting wax. The anterior end is pinned down and then, 174 BIOLOGY with fine scissors, an incision is made along the dorsal median line, from the head to the posterior end of the body. The body is then opened and the walk pinned out so as to disclose the internal parts. This should all be done under water. If carefully performed the internal parts may be easily worked out, a lens being used to show the smaller parts. To show the nervous system and the nephridia the alimentary canal should be cut through, behind the gizzard, and carefully dissected away in front. There will then be no difficulty in making out all the organs except the ovaries and spermaries. The ovaries may be found by careful study with a lens, but the spermaries cannot be found without special methods. The contents of the seminal vesicles and the ovaries should be examined with a microscope. One of the nephridia should be removed and studied with a low magnifying power. For the study of the histology, sections should be furnished by the in- structor. Animals preserved as above described are in good condition for sectioning. They should be embedded in paraffin and stained in picro- carmine. Sections through various parts of the body should be studied, and these should include at least sections through the cerebral ganglia, through the aortic arches, and through the posterior parts of the body show- ing the typhlosole. The study of these sections with both low and high powers will show the chief features of the microscopic anatomy. More detailed study of the histology is hardly feasible with elementary classes. CHAPTER IX MULTICELLULAR ANIMALS: THE FROG (RANA) GENERAL DESCRIPTION THE body of the frog is composed of a head and a trunk, but there is neither neck nor tail. The wide mouth extends far back to the end of the head. On the upper side of the head in front are two nostrils (nares) that open directly through the bones of the skull into the mouth. Farther back on either side of the head are the eyes, provided with two loose folds of skin which serve as eyelids. The upper lid is immovable, but the lower can be brought up over the eye for protection. It is called the nictitating membrane (Lat. nictare = to wink), is semi-transparent, and does not prevent sight wholly when closed. Behind the eyes are two round flat surfaces, which are membranes stretched over a shallow cavity in the skull. They are the tympanic membranes (Lat. tympanum = drum) and serve to collect sound waves and transfer them to the ears which lie within the head. The part of the body behind the anterior appendages or arms is called the abdomen, and the cavity within, which holds the stomach and intestines, is the abdominal cavity. The organs of the abdomen are sometimes called viscera. Of the two pairs of appendages, the fore legs are provided with only four toes, while the hind legs have five toes con- nected by a web. The hind legs are much longer than the fore legs and are the chief organs used in locomotion. The rest of the body is smooth, gradually tapering behind and end- ing abruptly just above the attachment of the hind legs. Near the posterior end of the body on the dorsal side is a good-sized opening, the cloacal aperture (Lat. cloaca — sewer), which serves as the common outlet of the intestine, the kidneys, and the reproductive organs. 175 176 BIOLOGY The whole body of the frog is covered with a smooth skin, which is always moist and is abundantly supplied with blood vessels, especially under the arms and on the side of the body. The skin is everywhere loosely attached to the underlying flesh and in certain rather large areas is not attached at all, large spaces being thus left between it and the flesh. These are lymph spaces and are filled with a clear liquid called lymph. When the skin is ex- amined microscopically, it is found to be made of two layers; Fig. 87. The outer layer, the epidermis, ep, is thin, while the inner layer, the dermis, d, is quite thick. The epidermis is made of several layers; the cells of the inner layers are large, rounded, growing cells, while the outer ones are flattened and lifeless. The epidermis increases in thickness from its inner side, and is constantly wearing away on its outer side. The dermis is a mass of con- nective tissue fibers, among which lie glands, blood vessels, nerves, and numerous pigment (Lat. pingere = to paint) cells which give the color to the skin. The Skeleton. — The frog has an internal bony skeleton. An internal skeleton is the most distinctive characteristic of the highest animals. Animals with such a skeleton are called vertebrates, a group comprising fishes, amphibians, reptiles, birds, and mammals. No other animals except verte- brates possess true bones. This bony skeleton gives support to the softer parts, gives form to the body, serves to attach the muscles, and enables them to produce the movements of the animal. The skeleton is made of about ninety articulated bones, i. e.t united together at the joints. Some of these form mov- FIG. 87. — SECTION THROUGH THE SKIN OF THE FROG ep, epidermis; d, dermis. (Modified from Howes.) THE FROG 177 able joints, in which a movement of the bones produces a movement of the body. In other joints the bones are firmly grown together forming the immovable joints. The bones of the skull, for example, are so firmly fused that they appear as a single bone; and the bone of the forearm (Fig. 88 r-u) is really made of two bones fused together. Two dis- tinct parts of the skeleton may clearly be seen: (I). the axial skeleton, consisting of the skull and spinal column; (2) the ap- pendicular skeleton, which forms the support for the arms and legs. The axial skeleton. — The spinal column is composed of nine separate bones called vertebrae; Fig. 88 B. Each ver- tebra consists of 9 centrum, c, and a neural arch, na, the arch inclosing the neural foramen (Lat. foramen = opening). From each side of the arch a process of bone extends laterally, called the transverse process (Lat. trans = across -f vertere = to turn) , tr. On the front and back of each vertebra are two smooth surfaces where the successive vertebrae rest upon each other, i. e., articulate (Lat. articulus = joint). They are the articular processes, or zygapophyses. In their natural position the nine vertebrae are joined together by their centra, the posterior surface of one touching the anterior surface of the next; Fig. A. The neural foramina are thus placed opposite each other, and all together form a tube which in- closes the spinal cord. The surfaces of the centra fit by a ball-and-socket joint, each of the first seven vertebrae having a ball on the posterior and a socket on the anterior surface, while the eighth is concave on both surfaces, and the ninth is convex on both surfaces. The nine vertebrae are much alike, but can be distinguished from each other. The first has no transverse process, while the centrum of the ninth has two convex posterior surfaces, and very large transverse proc- esses. From the posterior surface of the last vertebra a long slender bone extends backward to the end of the body, the urostyle (Gr. oura — tail + stylos = pillar); Fig. A, ur. The 178 BIOLOGY FIG. 88. — THE SKELETON OP THE FROG THE FROG 179 FIG. 88. — THE SKELETON OF THE FROG A, one-half of the skeleton shown from above. as, astragalus; mt, metatarsals; c, carpals; mx, maxilla; ca, calcaneum; na, nasal; cr, cms; o, opening for nerve; e, ethmoid; p, parietal; ex, exoccipital; ph, phalanges; /, frontal; pr, premaxilla; fe, femur; r-u, radio-ulnar; fm, foramen magnum; sq, squamosal; it, ilium; t, tarsals; hu, humerus; tr, transverse process; me, metacarpals; ur, urostyle. B, a vertebra from the end and from above. c, centrum; na, neural arch; tr, transverse process. C, the skull shown from below. con, occipital condyle; pt, pterygoid; «, Quadrate; *>. vomer. D, skull shown from the side. ex, exoccipital; g, quadrato-jugal; mx, maxilla; qu, quadrate; m, mandible; sq, squamosal. na, nasal; E, the hyoid bone. F , the shoulder girdle shown from below. co, coracoid; pr, precoracoid; gc, glenoid cavity; sc, scapula; h, humerus; st, sternum. ost, omosternum; (of, the pelvic girdle shown from the side. ac, acetabulum; is, ischium; il, ilium; pu, pubis. 180 BIOLOGY spinal cord extends into it, but soon passes out through two small openings, on either side, o, as two small filaments. This bone represents the tail found in allied animals (salamanders). The frog has no ribs and the transverse processes end abruptly at a short distance from the centrum. The skull. — In front the first vertebra is articulated with the skull, and the neural canal is continued into the skull through a large opening, called the foramen magnum (Lat. foramen = hole), fm. Inside the skull is a large cavity hold- ing the brain, the cranial cavity. The skull itself is com- posed of thirty-two bones, rigidly fused together to form a solid structure. These bones, which are shown and named in Figure 88 A and C, may be divided into three groups : 1 . The cranial bones, which form the roof, walls, and floor of the cranial cavity. The floor is made of the basioccipital and the para- sphenoid, ps; the walls are made of the parietals, p, the otic bones, and the exoccipitals, ex; and the roof is made of the supraoccipitals and the frontals, /. 2. The facial bones, which form the face. These are the nasals, na, the premaxillas, pr, and the maxillas, mx, above, and the vomers, vo, below. 3. The branchial (Lat. branchice = gills) skeleton. This part of the skeleton is made primarily of two V-shaped arches, lying below the cranium with the open part of the V above, next to the skull ; but the original relation of the V-shaped arches has become so modified that it is difficult to recognize. The first of the arches is the lower jaw or mandible; Fig. Z>, m. The closed part of this arch is in front where the two halves come together. At the back the two halves spread apart and pass backward to the point where the jaw articulates with the cranium at q. The lower jaw is from this joint held attached to the cranium by two chains of bones. One of them is made of the quadrate (Fig. D, qu), and the squamosal, sq, these two forming what is sometimes called the suspensorium. The other chain is made of two bones lying below the cranium, the pterygoid (Fig C, pi), and the palatine, pa. These are firmly fixed to THE FROG 181 the cranium below. The joint is also attached to the max- illa by a little bone called the quadrato-jugal ; Fig. D, q. Although in the adult frog these chains of bones are firmly attached to the cranium, they are at first free from it, and are really the upper parts of the arches below, rather than a part of, the cranium proper. The second arch is very rudimentary, only a small part of it being left in the frog. It is called the hyoid arch. Although in some animals this is also a well- developed V-shaped arch, all that is left of it in the frog is a flat plate, made partly of bone and partly of cartilage (Fig. E), which is so loosely attached to the skull that it is usually lost in prepared skulls. In the living frog it lies underneath the larynx, to which it gives support and rigidity. It is attached to the skull only by ligaments, without any bony connection. When the skull begins to form in the young frog the parts are soft, and only, as development proceeds, does true bone form. Part of the skull forms first as cartilage, a material that is harder than membrane but softer than bone. Later within this cartilage the mineral matter is deposited, forming true bone, and the bones thus formed are consequently called cartilage bones. These are the octipitals, palatines, pterygoids, and the mandibles. The other bones are formed first as mem- branes rather than cartilage. Within the membrane the mineral bony matter is laid down, and bones developing in this manner are known as membrane bones. The membrane bones are ihefrontals, parietals, parasphenoids, squamosals, nasals, vomers, premaxilla, and the maxilla. At its posterior end the skull is articulated with the first vertebra by means of two rounded, smooth surfaces which fit into two corresponding smooth depressions on the upper sur- face of the first vertebra. The articular projections are called the occipital condyles; Fig. C, con. Appendicular skeleton. — Each appendage consists of a girdle and the appendage proper. The shoulder girdle is a girdle of bones surrounding the body just back of the head, and 182 BIOLOGY holding the arm in position. It is shown from below and flattened out in Figure F. Each half consists of a scapula, sc (the dorsal part of which is made of cartilage), a coracoid, co, a precoracoid and a clavicle fused together, pr. At the place where the coracoid and the scapula come together is a smooth cavity into which the end of the arm articulates, called the glenoid cavity, gc. In its natural position the scapula is bent over the back, with the coracoids touching each other in the middle line below on the ventral side of the body. Be- hind and in front of them are two pieces of bone, the omo- sternum, ost, and the sternum, st. These two bones are re- garded as a part of the axial skeleton. The arm proper consists of the humerus (Fig. A, hu), the radius and ulna fused together, r-u, six wrist or carpal bones, c, and five fingers, of which the first is rudimentary. Each finger is composed of a metacarpal, me, and several phalanges, ph. The posterior appendages have a pelvic girdle, made of three pairs of bones, all united into one in the adult. One of them, the ilium, is long and runs forward to the trans- verse process of the last vertebra; Fig. A, il. At its posterior end each ilium joins the other two bones, the pubis (Fig. G, pu), and the ischium, is. At the point where the three bones meet there is a rounded cavity for the attachment of the leg, the acetabulum, ac. The pubes and ischia of the two sides of the body are fused together on the middle line, below the urostyle. The leg consists of a femur (Fig. A, fe), and the cms, cr, which is really composed of a tibia and fibula fused together. Following the crus are the bones of the foot, consist- ing of two slender bones, the astragalus, as, and calcaneum, ca; then come two extremely small tarsal bones, t, and finally a series of metatarsals, mt, and phalanges, ph. Muscular System. — Most of the bones of the skeleton are more or less movable one upon the other at the articulations. The muscles which move them are numerous and complicated. Each muscle is an elongated mass of contractile tissue, which THE FROG 183 ab, adductor brevis; al, adductor longus; am, adductor magnus; d, deltoid; ec, extensor cruria; gc, gastrocnemius; FIG. 89. — THE MUSCLES OF THE FROG FROM BELOW, THE SKIN BEING REMOVED The more important muscles are named as follows: — o, obliqus; p, pectoralis; r, rectus abdominis; ri, rectus internus major; a, submaxillaris; st, sartorius: t, triceps; to, tibialis anticus; tp, tibialis posticua; vi, vast»s ipt«rnus. 184 BIOLOGY is usually attached at the ends to two separate bones, the term origin being applied to the attachment nearest to the center of the body, and insertion to the attachment the farthest from the center; muscles pull in the direction of their origin. Since these muscles are numerous and attached to the bones at different places, they pull upon the bones in different direc- tions and produce a great variety of movements. Figure 89 shows the chief muscles of the frog. The names given to them are the same as those applied to the corresponding muscles in man. Joints or Articulations. — Where two bones come together they form a joint. In some cases the bones are so rigidly grown together that there is no motion between them, thus forming the fixed joints, like those that are between the bones which form the skull. In other places the bones are freely movable, forming the movable joints. All the movements of the body are produced at the joints. The bones at these joints are so connected that, while they are held firmly together, they are at the same time freely movable. The ends of the bones are generally more or less rounded, the end of one bone fitting into a rounded depression on the other. The ends of the bones are also covered by a layer of cartilage, which is quite smooth so as to prevent friction. This structure makes it possible for one bone to move upon the other without difficulty. All friction is eliminated, and movement of the bones is rendered easier, by a secretion of fluid which is poured into the joint from the synovial glands. This is called the synovial fluid. To prevent the bones from being pulled apart they are held together by bands of white connective tissue called ligaments. These are tough but flexible, and are attached to the two bones that form the joint. They are long enough to make the mo- tions of the bones free, but short enough to hold them in posi- tion and prevent their being pulled away from each other by slight strains. The bones are held firmly in position by the muscles. The muscles which move the bones usually have THE FROG 185 their origin on the bones above the joint, and their insertion on the bone below. The muscles end in bands of connective tissue called tendons that extend down over the joint to the insertion on the lower bone. The muscles are always tightly stretched in the body and always pulling upon the tendons. As a result the tension upon the tendons holds the two bones of the joint in firm contact. Outside of the muscles and tendons is the skin. The joint thus consists of smoothly moving bones, which are moistened by synovial' fluid, held in position by tightly drawn tendons, prevented from being pulled apart by ligaments that protect them against strains, and moved by muscles. The freedom of motion in the different joints varies with the shape of the bones at the joints. In some of the articula- tions, one bone ends in a ball which fits into a rounded socket of the other bone. In this type, the ball-and-socket joint, the bones are freely moved in any direction. The joint at the hip and that of the shoulder are examples of this type. In other joints the form of the bones is such that motion is possible only backward or forward. These are called hinge joints, and are illustrated by the joints at the elbow, the knee, the wrist, and by the separate joints of the fingers and toes. In some joints one bone moves around the other as on a pivot. No good examples of this are found in the frog, but in the human body the motion of turning the head, or turning over the hand so that the back or the palm is uppermost, are excellent illus- trations. It is evident that the movements of the body are dependent upon the free motion of the bones at the joints, and that the growing of the bones together at a joint, anchy- losis as it is called, will destroy all power of motion. Alimentary Canal. — The wide mouth (oral opening) leads into a very large cavity, the buccal cavity. There are teeth on the maxilla,. premaxilla, and vomer (Fig. 88 C, D), which are of use for holding, but not for masticating food. On the floor of the mouth is, a large muscular tongue, attached to 186 BIOLOGY .oe the base of the mouth in front, and free behind. Owing to this attachment, the back part of the tongue can be thrown out of the mouth for a considerable distance, serving as an important organ for capturing insects. Just back of the tongue on the floor of the mouth is a narrow slit, the glottis, leading into a tube, which passes to the lungs. Behind the glottis is a larger opening leading to the oesophagus, and hance to the stom- ach. The nostrils open in the mouth through the roof in front (internal nares); and a pair of openings in the back part of the roof leads to the ears, the eustachian openings. If a slit be made through the skin and flesh of the abdomen, passing forward on the ventral middle line through the sternum, and the body opened, most of the internal organs can be seen. The oesophagus passes directly backward about halfway to the end of the body, where it ex- pands into a large chamber, the stomach (Fig. 90 st), which extends obliquely across the body towards the right. The lower part of the l-» d stomach is called the pylorus ; this passes down into a small tube which FIG. 90.— THE ALIMENTARY makeg a u_shaped bend, called the TRACT OF THE FROG ^fo 4 and then formg gey_ blt bladder; oe, oesophagus; el, cloacal cavity; p, pancreas; eral COllS Which Constitute the UltCS- d, duodenum; sp, spleen; . gb, gall bladder; at, stomach; 11116, in. r inally the tube paSSCS into in, intestine; r, rectum. a large but short chamber, the rectum, r, which communicates with the exterior through the cloacal opening. In front of and to the right of the stomach is the large several-lobed liver. This secretes a liquid called bile, which THE FROG 187 passes by a duct into the gall bladder, gb, where it is stored for a while and from which it later passes through the bile duct into the duodenum, close to the pyloric end of the stomach. In the bend of the U formed by the duodenum and the stomach, is a slender, yellowish body, the pancreas, p, which empties into the duodenum by the pancreatic duct opening close to the bile duct. The lining of the whole alimentary canal is called the mucous membrane. The whole intestine is slung in position by a thin sheet of membrane, which passes around the intestine and then be- comes attached to the abdominal wall. This is the mesentery, and is really a fold of a large membrane that completely lines the body cavity, the peritoneum. The relations of the peritoneum, mes- entery, and intestine are shown dia- grammatically in Figure 91. In the mesentery are many nerves and nu- merous blood vessels which carry nutrition from the intestine. The mesentery surrounds not only the in- testine, but also the liver and the pancreas. In its folds below the stomach is a rounded red body, the spleen; Fig. 90 sp. Circulatory System. — The circula- tory system of the frog, like that of the earthworm, consists of blood in- closed in a network of blood vessels; but it is a more definite system and the blood flows in a more regular course. It con- sists of a true heart, and blood vessels. The heart is situated beneath the shoulder girdle, in front of the liver and is surrounded by a thin sac, the pericardium (Gr. peri = around + cardia = heart). The heart itself is made up of a sac divided into three chambers, the walls of which are masses of muscles. The fibers of these muscles run FIG. 91. — DIAGRAM REP- RESENTING A CROSS SEC- TION OF THE BODY bw, body wall; in, intestine; mes, mesentery; per, peritoneum. 188 BIOLOGY in every direction, so that when they contract (systole) the heart is diminished in size and the blood that is in the cavities is squeezed out; when they relax (diastole) the heart expands again and the blood flows into it. Figure 92 shows a diagram of the heart structure, cut open so as to show the interior of the cavities. At the anterior end are two cavities, the right and the left auricles, ra and la; the right, which receives blood from the body, being much larger than the left, which receives blood from the lungs. These two chambers are separated by a partition. At the lower side of the auricles each opens into the ventricle, v, the third and largest chamber below. The openings between the auricles and ventricle (shown by the arrows in Fig. 102), are guarded by valves, which are flaps of membrane, so situated that they allow blood to flow readily from the auricle into the ventricle, but close up at once if the blood starts to flow back into the auricle, as it would do when the ventricle contracts, did not these valves block the passage. The ventricle is a large chamber, partly divided by partitions. Leading out of it in front is a large blood vessel. This extends forward, on the ventral side of the heart, and at the anterior end of the heart it divides into two arteries, one turning to the right and one to the left. The large vessel is called the bulbus arteriosus, ba, and its two branches are the aortae, ad. This bulbus receives the blood which is forced out of the heart when it contracts. Within it, and at the beginning of the aorta?, are valves which control the flow of the blood, as will be described on a later page. On the dorsal side of the heart is a large thin-walled chamber, the ve- nus sinus (Fig. 92 B, vs), into which open the veins that bring the blood back from the body. This sinus opens into the right auricle, which thus receives all the blood which flows back to the heart from all parts of the body, except the lungs. The blood from the lungs empties into the left auricle by two small veins, one from each lung; Fig. 92 pv. The blood vessels ramify all over the body in a very complex 189 \ FIG. 92. — DIAGRAM OF THE CIRCULATION OF THE FROG The veins are represented in shaded lines and those entering the heart from in front are shown only on one side. A, the general circulation shown from below. a, abdominal vein; ao, aorta; 6, brachial; ba, bulbus arteriosus; ca, cceliac axis; co, carotid artery; CM, cutaneous artery; hv, hepatic vein; in, intestine; jv, jugular vein; I, lingual artery; la, left auricle; pro, pre vena cava; ptc, post vena cava; pu, pulmonary artery; pv, portal vein; ra, right auricle; rp, renal-portal vein; sp, spermary; v, ventricle. B, The heart from below, showing the venus sinus cut open. ao, aorta; puv, pulmonary vein; ptc, post vena cava; la, left auricle; pvc, pre vena cava; vs, venus sinus, ra, right auricle; 190 BIOLOGY system. The arteries, which take blood away from the heart, are thick-walled and elastic; while the veins, which bring it back again, are thin-walled. The distribution of the chief blood vessels is shown in Figure 92. The bulbus arteriosus soon divides into two branches that turn backward and finally unite with each other in the abdomen beneath the stomach. These two branches, the aortae, ao, give off in their course many vessels, the chief of which are the lingual to the tongue, I, the carotid to the head, co, the brachial to the arms, 6, and the coeliac axis to the organs of the abdomen, ca. After dividing many times into smaller and smaller branches, the arteries finally break up into an immense number of minute thin-walled vessels called capillaries (Lat. capillus = hair). These are microscopic, but of great importance, since all of the interchanges between the blood and the tissues of the body take place through them; Fig. 101. The blood, after passing through the capillaries, enters again into a series of vessels of constantly increasing diameter and finds its way back to the heart. These larger returning vessels are veins, and they unite with others, until finally a few large veins are formed which empty into the sinus; Fig. 92 B. The blood vessels thus form a closed system, and the blood that leaves the heart returns without leaving the vessels. The blood that goes to the intestine by the coeliac axis, ca, passes through two series of capillaries before again entering the heart. It first passes into capillaries in the intestine, where it receives nutriment absorbed from the food; then it is collected into a large vein, the portal vein, pv, which enters the liver, and breaks up into another system of capillaries; then, by the way of the hepatic vein (Gr. hepar = liver), hv, it enters into the large posterior vena cava (Figs. A and B, ptc), which leads to the venus sinus. This system of veins and capillaries in the liver is called the portal system. Part of the blood that goes to the legs also has a double system. It first enters the capillaries in the muscles of the legs, and on its way back a part of it passes THE FROG 191 through the kidneys, where it is again broken up into capil- laries. This is the course of the blood which returns from the leg through the renal-portal vein (Fig. 92 rp), but the rest of the blood from the legs is diverted to an abdominal vein, a, which enters the heart without passing through the liver. Both the liver and the kidneys have their own supply of blood from the aorta, as well as that received from the veins. The vessels thus far described are called the systemic cir- culation, in distinction from the pulmonary circulation, which is the circulation in the lungs. The lungs are elastic bags (Fig. 92), capable of much expansion when inflated with air, but collapsing if the air is removed. They are connected with the mouth by the larynx, which opens at the base of the tongue through the glottis. Through the glottis and the larynx air is taken into the lungs to purify the blood. The arteries which supply the lungs, the pulmonary arteries, pu, arise from the main arteries near the heart. From each of these an artery is given off to the skin under the arm, the cutaneous, cu. Since in the lungs the blood is purified by the oxygen of the air, and through the skin it is purified by the oxygen in the water, the frog can live either in the water or in the air, i. e., it is amphibious. The blood that is purified in the lungs enters the heart again by a pulmonary vein, puv, which flows into the left auricle. The pure blood in the left auricle is thus kept separate from the impure blood in the right auricle, but as soon as the auricles contract the blood of both auricles is forced into the single ventricle, and intermingles. Although the blood in the ventricle is really mixed, still the blood upon the right side of it, since it received blood directly from the right auricle, will con- tain more impure blood than that on the left side, which is connected directly with the left auricle. The pure and impure blood are kept partly separate by muscular partitions ex- tending irregularly through the ventricle. The blood is composed of a colorless liquid, called the plasma, in which float two types of corpuscles. The larger, the red 192 BIOLOGY corpuscles (erythrocytes) (Gr. erythros = red + cytos = cell) (Fig. 93 re), are oval in shape; their red color is due to the haemo- globin, which is in the cor- instead of in the as in the case of rc . , . 7:L .••. I* ~ in. mm FIG. 93. — BLOOD OF THE FROG, HIGHLY MAGNIFIED lu, leucocytes or white corpuscles; rc, red corpuscles. puscles, plasma, the earthworm. The white corpuscles (leucocytes) (Gr. leukos = white + cytos = cell), lu, are smaller than the red corpuscles, and are able to force themselves through the walls of the capillaries, and wander in- definitely through the tis- sues. There is a third type of very minute bodies in the plasma, called platelets, of which little is known. Lymph System. — Besides the blood vessels, the frog has a system of much smaller lymph vessels in the skin, the intestine, and other parts of the body. These are thin walled and filled with a colorless liquid, the lymph, and are so delicate the,t they can be seen only in specially prepared specimens. In places these vessels are connected with spaces between the tissues, lacunae, and with the large cavities of the body. In the intestine the lymph vessels receive a special name, the lacteals. Lymphatic glands are found in connection with the lymph vessels, and in the frog there are also two pairs of lymph hearts, whose contraction propels the lymph in its circulation. The Nervous System. — The nervous system consists of: (1) The cerebrospinal axis, (2) The cranial nerves, (3) The sympa- thetic system. Cerebrospinal Axis. — The brain and spinal cord are on the dorsal side of the animal, within the neural canal and the cavity of the skull; Fig. 94. The brain consists of several distinct parts. Beginning in front they are as follows: The THE FROG 103 olfactory lobes, ol, the cerebral hemispheres, ce, the thalamen- cephalon, th, the optic lobes, op, the cerebellum, cb, and the medulla oblongata, m. The cere- bellum is very small, and the me- dulla appears to be only an en- larged continuation of the spinal cord. In the latter there is a large triangular cavity, roofed over by a thin membrane con- taining blood vessels (choroid plexus) . The cavity is called the fourth ventricle, and it commu- nicates with other cavities in the brain. On top of the thalamen- cephalon is a small body, the pineal gland or the epiphysis, pi. The under side of the thalamen- cephalon is produced into a process directed backward, the infundibulum, which ends in another small body, the pituitary body or the hypophysis. The cerebrum and thalamen- cephalon together constitute the forebrain, the optic lobes form the mid-brain, and the cerebel- lum and medulla form the hind-brain. The relative devel- opment of these different parts varies widely in different animals, and in the higher vertebrates the cerebrum becomes much the largest part of the brain, this development reaching its maximum in the human species. From the posterior part of the medulla the spinal cord, sp, extends through the spinal column, tapering to a minute fila- ment, which extends a short distance into the urostyle. The brain and spinal cord are covered by two membranes, an outer FIG. 94. — THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM Shown in position in the skull and spinal column. cb, cerebellum; op, optic lobe; ce, cerebrum; pi, pineal body; m, medulla oblon- sp, spinal cord; gata; th, thalamen- ol, olfactory sac; cephalon. 194 BIOLOGY tough one called the dura mater, and a more delicate, inner membrane, the pia mater. The Craniospinal Nerves. — Twenty pairs of nerves arise from the brain and cord, — ten from the brain, and an equal number from the cord. Those from the brain, the cranial nerves, supply the organs of special sense and the muscles and other organs of the head, the heart, lungs, and stomach. They are as follows: — 1. The olfactory nerves, from the olfactory lobes supplying the nasal cavities. 2. The optic nerves. These two nerves arise from the optic lobes, cross each other to form the optic chiasm, and then each passes to the eye on the opposite side of the head. 3. Motor ocularis, supplying the muscles of the eye. 4. Patheticus, supplying the muscles of the eye. 5. Trigeminal, supplying the sides of the head (sensory). 6. Abducens, supplying the muscles of the eye. 7. Facial, supplying the sides of the head (chiefly motor) , 8. Auditory, supplying the ear. 9. Glossopharyngeal, supplying the pharynx and the tongue (sensory). 10. Pneumogastric, supplying the larynx, the heart, and the stomach. From the spinal cord arise ten pairs of spinal nerves, one between the skull and the first vertebra, and one between each vertebra and the next; Fig. 95. The first supplies the tongue (motor); the second and third unite to form the nerve going to the arm, the brachial nerve (Lat. brachium = arm); the fourth, fifth, and sixth supply the middle region of the body; and the seventh, eighth, and ninth unite by cross branches to form the sciatic plexus (Lat. plectare = to braid), from which arise the nerves that supply the leg, the sciatic nerve, which is the largest in the body; the tenth nerve supplies the region of the urostyle. Each nerve arises from the cord by two roots, of which the anterior root carries impulses away THE FROG 195 from the brain (efferent fibers), and the posterior root carries impulses toward the brain (afferent fibers). The Sympathetic System. — In the abdominal cavity, lying on each side of the spinal column, is a chain of minute nerve ganglia, ten in number, which are also connected with the spinal nerves; Fig. 95 sy. These constitute the sympa- thetic system. From these two chains of ganglia minute nerves are given off, chiefly to supply the intestine, the kid- ney, and the other organs of the ab- domen. Although connected with the spinal nerve, the sympathetic system is quite distinct and has special functions. The microscope shows that the nerv- ous system, like that of the earthworm, is composed of an enormous number of neurons, each with its cell body, dendrites, and axon. These are massed in the brain and cord, and there are many also in the ganglia outside of the cord. They are so situated that part of them carry impulses to the center, and part of them carry them in the reverse direction. Their numbers are greater and their re- lations more complex than those of the earthworm. The Sense Organs. — At the periph- eral end of all of the sensory nerves are found very complicated organs, con- structed so as to be affected by certain external stimuli. When they are stimu- lated impulses start from them and pass over the afferent nerves to the brain, where they become sensations. They are the sensory organs and are as follows: — FII vn. FIG. 95. — DIAGRAM SHOWING THE RELA- TION OF SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM TO THE SPINAL NERVES The sympathetic chain of one side only is shown. The spinal nerves are indicated by Roman numerals; sy, sympa- thetic nerve ; syg , sympathetic ified from Parker.) 196 BIOLOGY Olfactory organs. — Just within the nostrils are two little cavities occupied by the olfactory sacs. In these sacs the olfactory nerves are distributed, ending in delicate nerve cells, which are sensitive to odors; Fig. 96 A. Cornea umor\Iris .1 FIG. 96. — TERMINATION OF SENSORY NERVE CELLS A, Olfactory cells; B, cells in the retina, sensitive to the light, showing the rods on the left and cones on the right. (Dogiel and Gaupp.) -071 FIG. 97. — DIAGRAMMATIC CROSS SECTION OP THE EYE OF THE FROG ch, choroid coat; I, the suspensory ligament; on, optic nerve; (Retzius.) , retina; :, sclerotic coat. The eyes. — The eyes are large, spherical organs, planned after the structure of the vertebrate eyes in general. Figure 97 is a cross section of an eye showing the important parts. It is a spherical chamber, the walls of which are opaque, except in front, where they are transparent, and act like the dark chamber of a camera. The walls of the chamber are made of several layers. In the very front is the cornea, presenting a transparent curved surface. The back part, comprising about two-thirds of the chamber wall, is made of three layers. On the outside is a sclerotic coat, sc, composed of fibrous tissue and cartilage; next to this a thin coat containing pigment, the choroid, ch, and inside of this a still thinner retina, r, which THE FROG 197 is the sensitive part of the eye. At the back of the chamber is an opening through which the optic nerve enters, on. After entering the eye the nerve spreads out on the retina, where it is affected by the light entering the eye. The chamber of the eye is divided into two parts by a large spherical, transparent, crystalline lens, held in position by several bands of fibers, shown at I. Anteriorly the lens is partly covered by an opaque membrane, really a continuation of the choroid, which grows out from the wall of the chamber on all sides. This is the iris, and it covers the outer part of the lens, except in the middle, where the lens is not covered. This opening is the pupil, and serves to allow light to enter. The iris contains pigment cells, which give the eye its color. Each of the two chambers of the eye is filled with a transparent fluid. That lying between the cornea and the lens is the aqueous humor, and that back of the lens, which is rather more solid, is the vitreous humor. The retina, which lines the eye chamber, is an extremely complicated organ, made of hundreds of thousands of end organs of sensi- tive nerves. It is a complex of neuron bodies, dendrites, and axons (Fig. 96 B)t and is highly sensitive to the light, which is focused upon it by the lens. Attached to the ball of the eye are six muscles, by means of which it can be rotated in any direction: The ears. — The frog has no external ears. Just back of the eyes are two rounded, flat depressions, each formed by a mem- brane which covers the real ear. If the thin skin which covers this area be removed, a rather tough, flat membrane will be found beneath, which is the tympanic membrane proper. This membrane extends over a shallow conical cavity, called the tympanum or ear-drum. This cavity connects below with the mouth through the eustachian tube. Extending across this is a slender bar of bone and cartilage, called the columella. This is attached to the membrane at one end and connected with the inner ear at the other, and transmits vibrations of the membrane to the inner ear, the real organ of hearing. 198 BIOLOGY FIG. an \. THE INTERNAL EAR OF THE FROG an, auditory nerve; c, semicircular canals; (Retzius.) s, saccule; u, utricle. The inner ear, which is :he true sensory end organ of the audi- tory nerve, lies embedded in the bones of the skull. Its general appearance may be seen from Figure 98. It is quite a compli- cated organ, and the auditory nerve enters in and finally terminates in delicate endings, which are readily stimulated by the vibrations brought from the exterior through the membrane and the columella. The canals shown at c, the semicircular ca- nals, have a function related to balancing the body and keeping it in an upright position, i. e., equilibrium. Other senses. — The sense of smell is located in the nostrils. These openings lead into little olfactory sacs just within the bones, and the air which enters them passes through the bones into the mouth by openings on the roof of the mouth called internal nares. The ol- factory nerve is expanded in the olfactory sac, where vapors that may be in the air affect it. The sense of taste is situated on the tongue, within which are end or- gans sensitive to liquids. Only substances dis- solved in liquids are ca- pable of affecting these end organs; Fig. 99. The touch and pressure senses are located in the skin. Scat- tered over the body generally are numerous end organs, which n FIG. 99. — SECTION OF TONGUE OF FROG n, nerve ending; nc, nerve cells; ne, nerve trunk. (Gaupp.) THE FROG 199 form the termination of the sensory nerves. They are of different kinds, and doubtless have different functions, but all are associ- ated with what is in general called the sense of feeling or touch. The Excretory Organs. — Lying in the back part of the ab- domen near the legs are two flat, rather oval bodies, one on either side of the middle line, the kidneys; Fig. 92. Each is abundantly supplied with blood vessels, a fact which indicates important functions. Microscopic study shows them to be made of many coiled tubes, similar to the nephridia of the earth- worm. These tubes remove excreted products from the blood which passes through them. From the outer side of each a small duct, the ureter, passes backward toward the cloaca, where it empties into the bladder (Fig. 90 bl) , a rather large two- lobed sac, which may be filled with the urine secreted by the kidney, or may collapse when empty. It opens into the cloacal chamber, and its contents are discharged through the common cloacal opening. (In man a special duct, the urethra, leads from the bladder to the exterior.) Reproductive Organs. — The two sexes in the frog are in separate individuals, thus differing from the condition found in the earthworm. The male may be distinguished externally by a thick pad on the under side of its thumb, which is rather large in the spring, but small at other seasons of the year. The spermaries are found in the male at the upper end of the kidneys; Fig. 92 sp. They are two in number, rounded or oval in shape, and of a light yellowish color. Attached to them are usually several branching masses of yellow fat. The sperm produced in the spermaries are carried through some delicate ducts into the kidney. These ducts, the vasa efferentia, pass through the kidneys and empty into the ureters, which lie on their outer edge. The ureters in the frog thus serve for the exit of both the kidney secretion and the secretions from the spermaries. These ureters are, in some species of frogs, en- larged into a small sac just at the point where they enter the cloacal chamber, and in these sacs the sperms are stored until 200 BIOLOGY the frog is ready to discharge them at the time of copulation. These sacs are called seminal vesicles. Some species of frogs do not have such vesicles. In the females the ovaries are situated in a position cor- responding to that of the spermaries in the male; Fig. 100 ov. During the late spring and summer they are rather small, slightly folded, leaf-like or- gans, not much larger than the spermaries, though differ- ing in shape. In the fall of the year the eggs in these ovaries begin to grow, causing the ovaries to become greatly expanded. During the fall the ovaries are usually greatly swollen and completely fill the abdominal cavity, almost concealing the other organs. The oviducts that carry the eggs to the exterior are not directly connected with the ovaries. They are very much coiled tubes, o, lying beside the kidneys, each ending at its an- terior end in a funnel-shaped opening. From this opening the tube passes backward beside the kidneys, and, after making many coils, finally opens into the cloacal chamber at the back. Just before its termination it is swollen into a rather large, thin-walled cham- ber, the uterus, ut, in which the eggs may be stored for a time after passing through the oviducts before the final egg laying. These long ducts vary greatly in size at different seasons, FIG. 100. — REPRODUCTIVE ORGANS OF A FEMALE FROG, ATTACHED TO THE KIDNEYS ki, kidneys; o, oviduct; ov, ovary filled with eggs; ut, uterus; c, cloacal chamber. THE FROG 201 being small in the summer, but enlarging with the enlargement of the ovaries, and swelling greatly in the early spring pre- paratory to egg laying. In the walls of the oviducts are numer- ous little glands, whose function is to secrete material around the egg to form the shell or other protective covering. They are nidamental glands (Lat. nidus = a nest). It will be seen that the sexual organs and the kidneys are very closely connected. They lie close together, have a com- mon opening, and in the male the same duct, the ureter, serves for the exit of the sperms and the urine. A similar close rela- tion is found in other vertebrates, and a study of the develop- ment of the animals shows that their ducts are originally derived from the same organ in the embryo. The two systems together are known as the urogenital system. In the frog this system opens to the exterior with the intestine by the single common cloacal opening. In higher animals they may have separate openings. LABORATORY WORK UPON THE FROG For a detailed dissection of the frog, reference must be made to some of the numerous laboratory manuals. The brief general directions given below will be sufficient to illustrate the topics discussed in the text, and at least this amount of laboratory work is necessary to make the text properly intelligible. If the specimens are obtained alive they should first be killed with chloroform, and, while still fresh, all of the points in the external anatomy should be made out. Note should be made of the following: head; body; .absence of tail; the loose skin, attached, however, at certain points; arms; numbers of fingers; legs; number of toes; web between the toes; mouth; nostrils; eyes with eyelids; ears; cloacal opening. Open the mouth and note tongue; glottis; gullet. The dissection of the organs of the abdomen can best be made with a freshly killed specimen, but it may be done satisfactorily with animals preserved in alcohol or formalin. The dissection of the brain and spinal cord should always be made upon animals preserved in alcohol, since these organs are too soft to handle in fresh specimens. A mounted skele- ton of the animal should be at hand for study and comparison with the animal under dissection. 202 BIOLOGY The order of dissection given below is so planned as to make it pos- sible to do practically all of tlie dissection upon a single specimen. The specimen may be preserved in formalin and the work carried out at leisure. If the order given is followed, it is possible to have a large class working at the same time, and, when the work is finished, all of the important parts in the anatomy will have been made out, except the skull and the shoulder girdle, these having of necessity been destroyed in opening the body and in exposing the brain. If frequent references are made to the de- scription of the frog given in the text, the brief description here given will be sufficient to make a satisfactory dissection. Open the frog by a median ventral incision, made with scissors, ex- tending from the legs forward to the sternum, cutting through both skin and flesh. The blunt end of the scissors is then to be thrust under the sternum, and this girdle of bones is to be cut through. This will make it possible to open the abdomen, pinning out the flaps of the abdominal walls and the arms so as to expose the organs of the abdomen. If the frog is a freshly killed specimen, all of the subsequent study of the viscera should be made with the animal immersed in water. If the frog is a pre- served specimen, this is not so necessary. The organs of the abdomen may now be studied. The following parts should be made out without any further dissection, being disclosed simply by pushing the organs one after the other to one side, and they may bo examined conveniently in the following order: liver; heart; large arteries around the heart; veins entering the heart; stomach; intestine; gall blad- der; rectum; mesentery, which contains blood vessels that may be traced to the liver. In opening the body, if the specimen is a fresh one, there is danger that some of the blood vessels may be cut, making it difficult or impos- sible to follow the blood vessels. In order to work out the blood vessels satisfactorily, it is necessary to have an injected specimen. These may be bought of dealers in natural history supplies, or the injection may be done by the instructor. If the specimen is a female, the body cavity will, at certain seasons of the year, be filled with an enormously expanded ovary, filled with eggs. In order to make out the other abdominal organs, these must be removed carefully, so as not to injure the other parts. After they have been removed there will appear lying on either side of the back part of the abdomen the very much enlarged oviduct, showing as a much coiled tube. This should also be removed, note .being made of its connection with the cloacal chamber behind. If the ovary is not thus enlarged, or if the specimen is a male, it is not necessary to remove the reproductive organs to show the other features. THE FROG 203 With the organs all in position, now make out the rectum; the bladder; the spleen; the cloacal chamber; the kidneys; the spermaries; the ovaries and oviduct in the female, and the spermaries and vas deferens in the male. Remove the heart, liver, stomach, and intestines. This will disclose the lungs; the two systemic arteries uniting to form the dorsal aorta, which should be traced to where it divides to supply the legs; the nerves to the arms; nerves to the back; three large nerves arising from the back- bone and extending toward the legs, and finally uniting to form the sciatic plexus, from which arise the large nerves entering the leg. By lifting up the aorta gently, delicate branches of the sympathetic system may be seen and traced to their ganglia. One leg of the animal should be dissected to make out the muscles, nerves, bones, and joints. The muscles should be separated from each other and traced to their origin and insertion, special notice being taken of the long tendons extending from the lower muscles down to the toes. In the joints, note the freedom of motion of the bones; the tendons, which extend over them; the rather loose ligaments that unite the bones; the readiness with which the bones come apart when the ligaments are cut; the smooth surfaces of the ends of the bones; and the cartilage that covers their ends. (If there is time for more careful dissection, reference must be made to laboratory guides on the dissection of the frog.) Clean all of the soft parts from the bones of the leg, separating and identifying each bone. Examine the eyelids; the iris; the pupil. Make an incision through the iris and remove the lens; note the cavity of the eye behind the lens. Cut an incision through the tympanic membrane, noting the shallow cavity beneath it, the tympanic cavity, the bony columella extending across it to the skull. A bristle thrust into the bottom of this cavity will enter the mouth through the eustachian tube. Remove with a knife a bit of the -flat bone on top of the skull, exposing the brain; and then, with forceps and scissors, break away the bone so as to expose completely the brain and spinal cord down the back to the urostyle, taking care not to injure the soft parts. Identify all parts of the brain as described on page 193. The skeleton should be studied from another specimen. Remove all the soft parts from the skeleton, separating all the bones. Clean and iden- tify each (Fig. 88), and compare with the mounted skeleton. BOOKS FOR REFERENCE ECKER, The Anatomy of the Frog, The Macmillan Co., New York. HOLMES, Biology of the Frog, The Macmillan Co., New York. MARSHALL, The Frog, The Macmillan Co., New York. MORGAN, Development of Frogs' Eggs, The Macmillan Co., New York. GUYER, Animal Micrology, University of Chicago Press, Chicago. CHAPTER X THE PHYSIOLOGY OF AN ANIMAL HAVING now studied the structure of multicellular animals, we will consider briefly the functions of the various organs, with special reference to the frog. Alimentary System. — The primary purpose of the alimentary canal is the digestion and absorption of food. The food of animals is always organic, since animals are unable to utilize mineral substances upon which plants subsist. Animals feed upon the substances manufactured by plants: starch, the first product of photosynthesis, may serve animals for food, and the same is true of sugar, fats, and proteids. These foods are usually in a solid form when taken into the animal's mouth, and in order to be of any use they must pass from the alimentary canal into the blood vessels. Solid food is incapable of passing through the intestinal walls, and must be changed so that it can be dissolved in the liquids of the alimentary canal, a process called digestion. Digestion is brought about by digestive fluids which are secreted by digestive glands within the alimentary tract. The frog has no salivary glands such as man possesses, and the first digestive glands are in the walls of the stomach. These are microscopic in size and are called gastric glands. They are present in large numbers and secrete the gastric juice, which is poured directly upon the food after it reaches the stomach. A second digestive gland is the pancreas, lying just below the stomach and pouring its secretion, the pancreatic juice, by a special duct into the intestine, close to the stomach. This is mixed with the food just as it leaves the stomach and after it has been acted upon by the gastric juice. By the action of these two digestive fluids the solid foods are changed in their nature and rendered partly soluble. They are then dissolved in the intestinal liquids, becom- ing a thick, rather slimy mass of dissolved material. The different foods eaten by the animal are subject to different 204 THE PHYSIOLOGY OF AN ANIMAL 205 changes under the influence of the separate digestive fluids, those secreted by the stomach producing a different kind of digestion from those of the pancreas; but all aid in rendering the food soluble. Absorption. — The food is driven through the alimentary canal by the muscular contractions of its walls. These muscles are in two sets, one extending lengthwise and the other running around the intestine in a circular direction. By their contraction waves of constriction pass along the intestine, forcing the food slowly along. This peculiar writhing motion of the intestine is spoken of as peristalsis (Gr. peri = around + stalsis = a compression). As the food is pushed through the intestine its digestion and solution is completed and it begins to pass through the walls of the intestine into the surrounding blood vessels. As the intestinal contents pass onward more and more of the nutriment contained in the food is absorbed from it and enters the blood. The undigested and useless portions of the food pass on and even- tually, in the form of faeces, are voided through the cloacal opening. Circulation. — The food absorbed into the blood is now carried over the body in the blood. The liquid part of the blood, the plasma, is the circulating medium, the red and white corpuscles having special functions. The red corpuscles (erythrocytes) , which are by far the most numerous, give the blood its red color and are associated with respiration. The white corpuscles (leu- cocytes) , of which there are several kinds, have various functions, one of which is the removing of foreign bodies from the body and protecting it from the attacks of microscopic germs, or other irritating substances that may enter the tissues. The white corpuscles with this power are called phagocytes (Gr. phagein = to eat + cytos) ; they are able to leave the blood vessels, by forcing their way through the walls of the capillaries; Fig. 101 leu. They then migrate among the tissues and collect at any part of the body to guard it from an attack. The blood is kept circulating through the vessels by means of^ 206 BIOLOGY FlG. 101. — A SINGLE CAPILLARY Showing the corpuscles being forced through its walls. re, red corpuscles; leu, leucocytes; leu, a leucocyte that is forcing its way through the walls of the capillary into the surrounding tissues. the heart, which acts as a pump. In the frog's heart there are three chambers and the circulation is as follows: The blood which enters the heart from the body, which is impure blood, is received first into the venus sinus (Fig. 92 B, vs), and from here it en- ters the right auricle; Fig. 102 ra. At the same time pure blood enters from the lungs and skin, and is received in the left auricle. Now the two auricles con- tract and force the blood into the single ventricle v, through the openings indicated by the arrows in Figure 102. The ventricle thus receives both pure and impure blood, the pure blood being poured into its left side and the impure blood into its right side. These two kinds of blood are partly mixed, excepft for a fraction of a second, when they are sep- arate from each other. They are kept from mixing too quickly by several muscular bands stretching from the walls of the heart. But almost at the same instant that the ventricle is filled it contracts, and its contained blood is forced into the large artery, the bulbus arteriosus. This artery, as will be seen from Figure 102 ba, opens on the right side of the ventricle and consequently will receive first the blood which entered the ven- tricle from the right auricle, which is impure blood. Thus impure blood passes first into the arteries, to be followed by mixed blood and finally by the purer blood that comes from the. left side of the ventricle, and hence from the left auricle. With each con- traction of the heart there enters the arteries first a little impure blood, then a little mixed blood, and finally a little pure blood. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF AN ANIMAL 207 ao- ba- From Figure 102 pu, it will be seen that the first branch of the artery passes to the lungs. In the bulbus arteriosus are valves so arranged that the first blood passing from the heart with each beat goes to the lungs; after these are partly filled the next blood passes through the blood vessels shown at ao, down to the arms and to the lower parts of the body; and finally the last of the blood that comes out with each beat of the heart passes up into the head through the ar- tery, co. Thus the most impure blood passes to the lungs, where it is pu- rified, the mixed blood goes to the lower parts of the body, and the purest blood goes to the head and brain. The separation of pure and impure blood in the frog is not complete, but the arrangement just de- scribed is such as to send the most impure blood to the organs which pu- rify it, and the purest blood to the brain where the purest blood is needed. The two auricles are separated from the ventricle by valves, va, opening mechanically in one direction, in such a way that when the heart beats the blood is forced onward and never backward. The blood passes out through the arteries and is carried by the numerous branches into the various parts of the body, the small branches breaking up finally into minute twigs called capillaries, that are distributed in great abundance in every active organ. FlG. 102. — A DIAGRAM OF THE HEART OF THE FROG TO EXPLAIN ITS CIRCULATION no, aorta, passing to the posterior part of the body; ba, bulbus arteriosus; co, carotid artery going to the head; la, left auricle; pu, pulmonary artery passing to the lung; ra, right auricle; v, ventricle; va, valves separating auricles and ventricle. The arrows show the passage from the auricles to the ventricle. (Modified from Parker and Haswell.) 208 BIOLOGY While passing through these capillaries, the food materials, absorbed by the blood from the alimentary canal, and the gas absorbed from the lungs, pass from the blood into the tissues where they are needed. In this way the food and oxygen are supplied to the active tissues of the body. At the same time waste products, which have been produced in the active tissues, are returned to the blood, so that the blood, after passing through the capillaries, goes back to the heart as impure blood. After reaching the heart the impure blood goes to the lungs, where part of its impurities are passed off into the air. Lymph System. — A part of the circulatory system is called the lymph system. As the blood is flowing in the capillaries some of the liquid plasma soaks through the walls of the capillaries out into the tissues. When it reaches the tissues it is no longer called blood but lymph, and is a colorless clear liquid which bathes every living cell. This lymph contains, dissolved in it, the nutriment absorbed from the intestine; and, since it now actually bathes the living cells, these can take from it directly the nourishment they need for their activities. Into this lymph the living cells also excrete all the waste products that have resulted from their life processes, the lymph receiving all the wastes of the body. The gases, which comprise part of this waste, pass at once into the blood by diffusion; but the other materials remain dissolved in the lymph and finally reach the blood by the following course: The lymph gradually collects in tiny spaces, lacunae, scattered over the body, and from these flows into little vessels connecting with each other, called lymph vessels. These small vessels unite together to form larger ones and the larger vessels finally empty into the veins. The vessels around the front end of the body converge to two minute sacs lying deeply imbedded near the third vertebra; and the vessels in the hind part of the body converge into similar sacs situated over the hips, near the lower end of the urostyle. These four sacs have muscular walls and pulsate, and are called lymph hearts. When they beat they force the lymph into the veins THE PHYSIOLOGY OF AN ANIMAL 209 which lie near them and with which they are connected. In this way the lymph, which originally came from the blood plasma by dialyzing through the walls of the capillaries, returns into the blood; thus all the secreted products from the living cells pass into the blood, either directly as in the case of gases, or indirectly by passing first into the lymph and then emptying with the lymph into the blood vessels. NOTE. — A similar lymphatic system is found in all higher animals, but its course is different from that in the frog. In man, for example, the lymph rises by diffusion through the capillaries, and collects in lacunae and lymph vessels in a similar manner. But there are no lymph hearts. The lymph vessels unite to form quite large vessels, and all eventually empty into the large veins in the neck. There are two chief trunks of these vessels, one bringing the lymph from the upper parts of the body and emptying into the right jugular vein, and the other, a much larger one, bringing the lymph from the lower parts of the body and from the alimen- tary canal and flowing up through the thorax, to empty finally in the left jugular vein. This latter lymph vessel is called the thoracic duct. Respiration. — The impure blood from the heart passes through the pulmonary artery to the lungs (Fig. 92), a part of it going into a small branch, the cutaneous, cu, which carries it to the skin. The lungs are air sacs connected with the mouth. Just back of the tongue we have already noticed the glottis, which is a slit leading into a small cavity holding the vocal cords, whose vibrations cause the various sounds produced by the animal. This cavity is the larynx and it lies just under the throat. At its inner end it opens at once into the lungs, since the frog has no windpipe (trachea) such as is found in animals with long necks, like man. The air enters the lungs through the larynx and, filling them, comes in close contact with the blood, which is distributed in finely divided capillaries in their walls. The blood that goes to the skin through the cutaneous artery is distributed in fine capillaries and brought into close con- tact with the oxygen which is dissolved in the water in which the animal lives. The haemoglobin, which gives the red color to the red cor- 210 BIOLOGY puscles, absorbs large quantities of oxygen as the blood is flow- ing through the lungs and skin. The oxygenated blood then passes from the lungs back to the heart and is pumped out through arteries to the tissues. Here the red blood corpuscles give up their oxygen, and at the same time the blood absorbs carbon dioxid (CO2) from the tissues. When the blood, there- fore, leaves the capillaries on its journey back to the heart, it has left behind its oxygen and taken in its place carbon dioxid, which it gives up when it next reaches the lungs or the skin, at the same time taking up oxygen. The process of respiration is therefore a system of gas exchange. Metabolism. — In the living tissues the food and oxygen are chemically combined, an oxidation of the food taking place. The chemical changes that occur are numerous and result in the formation of new materials for the body, producing growth , development of muscular activity, and all of the other phenom- ena of life, and finally resulting in the appearance of waste products. The waste products are chiefly three : (1) a gas, carbon dioxid (CO2) ; (2) a liquid, water (H20) ; (3) a solid, called urea (CON2H4), which contains the nitrogen. Although the urea is solid under all ordinary conditions, it is dissolved in the liq- uids of the body, since it is soluble in water, and is therefore in a state of solution while in the body. These three waste products are not only valueless but distinctly harmful, and it is necessary for the body to get rid of them. The series of chemical changes which finally results in waste products is called metabolism. Excretions. — The elimination of the waste products of me- tabolism is known as excretion. The carbon dioxid gas passes into the blood, and when the blood reaches the lungs the gas diffuses from the blood into the air. The waste water also passes into the blood and is passed off from the body through the kid- neys, the lungs, and the skin. The urea finds its way into the blood, and as the blood flows through the kidneys (Fig. 92), they take the urea from it. They then pass it through their ducts dissolved in the urine, and it goes to the bladder and THE PHYSIOLOGY OF AN ANIMAL 211 then passes to the exterior with the faeces, the one cloacal opening serving, in the frog, for the exit of undigested food as well as for the urine. Support. — The skeleton serves to support the softer part of the body. Motion. — The motion of the frog is accomplished by the muscles. The muscles are numerous, and each has its own special attachment to the bones; Fig. 89. Every muscle pos- sesses the power of shortening, but has no other function; and the ordinary muscles are attached to two bones in such a way that when the muscle shortens one bone is moved upon another. All the motions of the body are produced by the short- ening of the different muscles. Many of the muscles are in pairs, one of each pair serving to bend a joint, the flexor, and the other straightening it, the extensor. The details of their actions we cannot consider here, but it will readily be seen that with the many muscles present in the frog's body a great variety of motions can be produced. The selection of the proper mus- cles to produce any desired motion is a complicated process, some motions indeed requiring the orderly selection of a large number of muscles, which must act together in perfect harmony. This power of selecting the muscles and causing them to act in unison and in harmony with each other is called coordination. The Coordinating System. — The nervous system of the frog controls all other functions. As already seen, it consists of (1) a central system, the brain and spinal cord; (2) the peripheral system, the latter composed of the nerves distributed over the body, and the various end organs of the nerves. The central system is really the center of activity, and the nerve fibers are merely paths for conducting impulses from one part of the body to another. Some of the end organs at the outer ends of the nerves receive impulses from the brain; others receive them from the exterior and transmit them to the nerves to be carried to the brain. The brain corresponds to the central station of a telephone system, which is connected with all parts of the city by wires hav- 212 BIOLOGY ing at their ends the individual telephones which may receive com- munications from the central system or send messages to it. So the central nervous system contains the intelligent, originat- ing force, and being in communication with every part of the body, controls all of the functions in such a way that they act in harmony. This central system has a series of efferent nerves, by which it sends messages outward, and a series of afferent nerves, by which messages are brought inward to the brain. The most important of the latter are the sensory nerves. Sense organs. — Each sensory nerve ends in a sense organ, so formed that it is excited by definite external stimuli. One of them, the ear, is stimulated by vibrations of the air; another, the eye, by vibrations of ether; others by a slight pressure or touch; others by heat; others again, by chemical substances, producing taste; and others by vapors in the form of gases, causing the sense of smell. Figure 96 shows the microscopic structure of some of these sensory end organs. In each case the end organ is started into activity by an external stimulus, and when thus excited an impulse starts from it over the nerve fiber and passes to the central part of the nervous system. In the central system, the stimulus produces what we call a sensa- tion, and this gives the brain a knowledge of what is going on at the outer end of the nerve. Sensation never occurs until the impulse reaches the brain. From these sensations the brain obtains information as to what is going on in different parts of the body, and upon this information, bases its knowledge and regulates the activities of the body. Reflexes. — The nervous system is made up of a mass of neurons whose connections with each other are inconceivably complex. These neurons, with their long axons, unite in har- monious activity the different organs of the body, and they do this by virtue of the fact that their axons, though distributed all over the body, all converge in the central system, where they can be associated together by the numerous neuron bodies that compose these central ganglia; Fig. 85. The courses taken by THE PHYSIOLOGY OF AN ANIMAL 213 these impulses after reaching the centers are complex in the extreme, and quite beyond our power to follow. They are ac- companied by sensations and by whatever of consciousness the animal possesses, and they * control the life and motions of the animal. The simplest of these connections may produce motion without any conscious- ness on the part of the animal. This is shown diagrammat- ically in Figure 103. Some ex- ternal stimulus excites one of the sense organs in the skin, s, and starts an impulse in the nerve fiber, which then travels quickly through the axon to its inner end, c, in the cord. The impulse then passes out of the axon through the arborizations, at c, to the neighboring den- drites of other neurons. These neurons may be motor cells, m, by which is meant that their axons, e, extend outward and FlG. 103. A DIAGRAM ILLUSTRAT- ING A REFLEX ACTION terminate in muscle fibers, as at mu. Hence the impulse that enters them, after passing out over the axon, eventually reaches a muscle fiber, and causes the muscle to contract. Such an action may take place without the impulse going to the brain, and would therefore not involve any consciousness or any sensation, for these latter functions occur in the brain only. Hence the animal might move if touched by an irritating object, without any An impulse that starts from the sense organs in the skin, s, passes to the spinal cord through the afferent nerve, a. Upon reaching the center, at c, the impulse may pass over to the motor cell, TO, from whence it passes downward through the efferent nerve, e, to the muscle fibers, mu. Part of the impulse from the c may pass up through the fiber, a, to the brain and pro- duce sensation. 214 BIOLOGY necessary consciousness on its part, as actually happens in sleep, for example. Such an action is called a reflex act, a name derived from the idea formerly held that the impulse starting from the sense organ was simply reflected back after reaching the cord. Although we know to-day that the impulse is not simply reflected back, but is profoundly modified in the cord, the name reflex is still retained for this type of reaction. Although a reflex act is not necessarily accompanied by con- sciousness or sensation, this is not always the case. From the diagram (Fig. 103), it is evident that the impulse, on its arrival in the cord, may not all pass into the motor nerve cell, but some of it may pass up through the fiber, a, toward the brain, and this part of the impulse, when it reaches the brain, will give rise to a sensation. The action that follows might still be the reflex, or it might be a truly voluntary one, started by the brain as the result of the sensation. Reflexes play a very large part in the life of all animals. Even in our own life many of our actions are thus reflexly performed without any special volition. Reproduction. — The eggs of the frog are only developed at certain seasons of the year. Late in the spring and early in the summer the ovaries are small, but toward the end of summer and in the fall the eggs begin to develop and cause the ovaries to expand until they almost fill the body cavity. When the frog goes into the dormant condition of hibernation (Lat. hibernare = to pass the winter), the female is usually greatly distended with the swollen ovary, and in this condition the winter period is passed. The oviducts have also enlarged and elongated, and remain so during the winter, while the animal is buried under ground. With the opening of the spring the frog emerges and resumes its active life, and in a few weeks reaches what is called the breeding season, which means the season for the discharge of the sexual products. As this season ap- proaches the eggs break out of the ovary and fall into the abdominal cavity. The funnel-shaped opening of each oviduct is provided with vibratile cilia (Fig. 100), and, probably by THE PHYSIOLOGY OF AN ANIMAL 215 their action, the eggs are swept into the opening, and then slowly pass down through the coils of the oviduct toward the uterus. As they pass along they are covered with a gelati- nous substance, which is secreted from the glands in the walls of the ducts and forms a layer around the eggs. When the eggs reach the uterus they are stored there for a time until the animal is ready to lay her eggs. With the approach of the breeding season the spermaries of the male also become very active and secrete sperm fluid. This passes down the ducts to be stored in the seminal vesicles, where it remains until the period of copulation. At the breeding season the male frog fastens himself to the female, who is about to lay her eggs, and remains firmly attached to her until she lays them, remaining thus attached for days or even for weeks in some cases (copulation). After the eggs are laid the male leaves the female and pays no further attention to her. When the eggs are laid they are rather slowly passed from the body by the cloacal opening, and at the same time the male ejects the sperm fluid from his body over them. The sperms themselves penetrate the jelly and eventually enter the eggs, producing fertilization. After the eggs are thus laid the ovaries and the oviducts contract and in a short time shrivel to a size much smaller than that which they had at the 'breeding season. This diminished size continues until late in the summer, when the ovaries begin to increase in size again with the growth of the ova, in preparation for the next breeding season. The eggs of the common frog are always laid in water and at first form a rather small mass of eggs with their surrounding j elly . But the j elly quickly absorbs the water and swells to many times its original size, inclosing each egg in a thick layer. This jelly appears to have two purposes. It is a protection to the eggs from the attack of birds and perhaps other enemies. It seems also to have the power of absorbing the sun's rays and holding them back from too great radiation, the result being that the egg is kept warmer than it would be without the jelly. This 216 BIOLOGY hastens the development, since its rate is dependent on tem- perature. Our common frog lays its eggs in irregular masses, which may be found in abundance in the spring months around pools of fresh water. The toad has somewhat similar breeding habits, but lays its eggs in long strings. Inside the jelly the fertilization of the eggs is completed and the development begins, and here the young remain until they are ready to hatch as young larvae. PHYSIOLOGY OF THE EARTHWORM The organs of the earthworm are much simpler than those of the frog. Some of the systems of organs found in the frog are apparently absent in the earthworm. There are, for example, no lungs nor other special organs devoted to respiration; there is neither heart nor system of bones for support. But although some of these systems of organs appear to be absent, their functions are not lacking. In other words, the earthworm has exactly the same functions of life as the frog, but carries them out in a simpler way. Respiration is carried on through the skin; the motions of the animals are confined to a writhing motion made by the muscles of the body wall ; the circulation of the blood is produced by the contraction of the blood vessels instead of by a heart; excretions are carried on through the skin and also by the nephridia. In short, the earthworm has the same general functions as the frog, only they are carried out on a simpler scale and by a simpler series of organs. Since its organs are simpler, we speak of the earthworm as having a lower organization than the frog. CHAPTER XI THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ANIMALS AND PLANTS: THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF ORGANISMS THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ANIMALS AND PLANTS IF we confine our attention to the larger organisms, the differences between plants and animals are very evident; but when we turn our attention to some of the lower members of each group, the differences are less evident and most of them disappear. A castor bean and a frog are very unlike, but Peranema and Euglena (Fig. 29) are so similar that it is hardly possible to say whether either of them is an animal or a plant. In their life functions, too, the higher plants and animals differ widely. Most of the general functions of animal life are possessed in a modified form by plants also; but since some functions are possessed by animals alone, a division of functions into two categories is frequently adopted. Vegetative functions are those possessed by both animals and plants. They are chiefly associated with food and growth, and are: alimentation, circulation, respiration, excretion, and reproduction. Animal functions are those possessed by animals and not by plants. They are motion and coordination. Both animals and plants have vegetative functions, but they are carried on quite differently in the two groups, resulting in a radically different type of life in animals and plants. The study already made of the biology of organisms enables us now to ask intelligently, What is the difference be- tween animals and plants? Although it is fairly easy to see the difference between a tree and a dog, when we come to extend the comparison to smaller and lower organisms it becomes more and more difficult to determine any distinc- 217 218 BIOLOGY tions between the two kingdoms. Indeed, when we analyze the subject to its limit, we find it impossible to draw any sharp line separating animals and plants, for there are some living things which show so few characteristics of either kingdom that we cannot determine with accuracy whether they belong to one group or the other. It is possible, however, to draw a general distinction between the two, and from this general distinction we can derive certain other secondary differences, which are more evident. The Fundamental Distinction. — The primary distinction be- tween animals and plants is in the process of photosynthesis. The plant kingdom alone has the power of utilizing the rays of the sun and manufacturing starch out of carbon dioxid and water: animals never have this power. From this primary distinction arise several other minor points of difference, more or less sharply separating these two groups. Secondary Differences. — A . Color. — Plants which have the power of photosynthesis are provided with the green coloring matter, chlorophyll. Animals, on the other hand, are not pro- vided with this coloring matter. B. Motion. — Since animals live upon solid foods, they have to search for it, and they are, as a rule, provided with motion. Plants, on the other hand, having no need to search for their food, since they find it in the atmosphere and soil, have not, as a rule, developed the power of motion. The various methods of motion developed by animals may be summarized as follows: (1) Amoeboid movement, as found in Amoeba, by means of lobes of the living protoplasm. It is confined to unicellular organisms. (2) Ciliated and flagellated motion, produced by vibratile, hairlike processes of the proto- plasm. Cilia are moderately short processes, and where found are usually present in large numbers. They are found in many unicellular animals and also in multicellular forms. Even the highest animals have cilia on the cells lining the air passages and various other ducts. Flagella are longer than DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ANIMALS AND PLANTS 219 cilia, and occur only in small numbers on any cell, one or two being the usual number. Higher animals do not have true flagella, except in their sperms; see page 250. (3) Muscular Movements. — In all animals above the unicellular forms cer- tain cells, or parts of cells, become specially modified for con- traction, thus becoming muscles. These develop into a system which produces the many types of locomotion possessed by animals. While plants as a rule are stationary, a few of them possess independent motion. Spores of many plants possess flagella or cilia; some of the lowest show amoeboid motion, and some have methods of motion not yet understood, like Diatoms and Oscillaria; Fig. 68. Among higher plants movements of different parts of the leaves, stamens, etc., are not uncommon. No muscles are developed, however, in plants, the motions being due to slow changes in the protoplasm, which are not well understood. An independent locomotion is unknown among any plants except those of the lowest orders. C. Sensitiveness. — In order to distinguish their food, ani- mals have developed sensitiveness and sensations. Plants not needing to distinguish food so accurately have not developed much sensitiveness. D. Structure. — As a rule animals have their bodies con- densed into a small compass, and are provided with an opening for taking in food, — the mouth, — which is connected with a digestive system. Typical plants, since they feed upon gases and water, which are distributed everywhere, have their bodies widely expanded into branches, leaves, and root hairs, in order to come in contact with a large amount of air and soil. They never have any mouths, since they do not take solid food, and consequently have no digestive system. The Income and Outgo of Animals and Plants. — An animal has an income as follows : — Proteids, obtained from animal or vegetable food, but all originally derived from green plants. 220 BIOLOGY Hydrocarbons (fats), derived from both animal and vege- table food. Carbohydrates, derived chiefly from vegetable foods. Water. Oxygen, taken from the air by the respiratory organs into the blood. Salts, of various kinds in the foods. The outgo of an animal consists of: — Carbon dioxid, excreted from the respiratory organs. Water, excreted from the skin, kidneys, and some other organs. Urea, excreted by the kidneys or their equivalents. Proteids, eliminated in the reproductive bodies. Salts, in various excretions. After an animal has reached its full growth, the income and the outgo practically balance. With some animals this period of equilibrium lasts a long time, perhaps for years. With others, growth may continue until death comes, in which case there is never any period of actual balance. The income of a plant consists of: — Carbon dioxid, from the air. Water, from the soil. Minerals, from the soil. The outgo of a plant consists of: — Oxygen, from the leaves. Water, from the leaves. Carbon dioxid, from the leaves and other parts. Proteids and various other substances, eliminated with dead leaves, branches, seeds, and other reproductive bodies. No Sharp Distinction between Animals and Plants. — The criteria above given are ordinarily sufficient to distinguish between animals and plants, and will separate typical forms; DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ANIMALS AND PLANTS 221 but when we come to consider low types, some or all of these distinctions disappear. There are, for example, many plants which have no chlorophyll (molds, toadstools, etc.), and hence have no power of photosynthesis; but they are, nevertheless, clearly plants, for no one would for an instant think of con- fusing them with animals, even though they do not contain chlorophyll. Some plants have independent motion, while some animals are stationary. Some plants are sensitive. The distinction of shape applies only to the higher organisms; for among the microscopic forms no distinction can be seen be- tween the shape of animals and plants, some animals having no mouth, and some plants, as well as animals, having their bodies condensed rather than expanded. Thus it appears that each of the distinguishing characters separating animals and plants breaks down when we come to apply it closely to some of the low forms of life ; until we have to admit that there is no absolute criterion separating the two kingdoms. Nevertheless, there is rarely any real difficulty in making the distinction. It is true that there is a difference of opinion as to whether a few of the very low forms should be called animals or plants; but when we take all of the above facts into consideration, it is only in a few instances that we are unable to say positively that any given organism is either animal or plant. Most of the difficulty is confined to the microscopic forms which are among the lowest organisms, and the fact that among these there is no absolutely fixed line between the two kingdoms is of special significance as suggesting the origin of the two kingdoms from a common starting point by a process of evolution. Organisms which possess chlorophyll, and consequently nour- ish themselves by photosynthesis, are sometimes said to be holo- phytic (Gr. holos = whole + phyton = plant) . In contradistinc- tion, organisms which have no chlorophyll and must depend upon others for sustenance are called holozoic (Gr. zoon = ani- mal). Animals are practically all holozoic, and green plants 222 BIOLOGY holophytic; but many plants are holozoic, a condition which is true of all Fungi. Protozoa and Protophyta. — Both plants and animals may be found among unicellular organisms, the unicellular animals being known as PROTOZOA (Gr. protos = first + zoon = ani- mal), and unicellular plants as PROTOPHYTA (Gr. phyton = plant) ; see Chapter III. Among such organisms there is some- times a difficulty in distinguishing between animals and plants, since any structure of a distinctive character is lacking. Even here, however, the majority of forms group themselves in one of the two kingdoms, so that they can readily be separated. There are, however, a few forms which prove a puzzle. Euglena (Fig. 29 B)y for example, has green chlorophyll, and is thus allied to the vegetable kingdom (holophytic); but it has also the power of motion, a mouth, and a red eye-spot. Peranema (Fig. 29 A)t however, which is clearly allied to Euglena, has no chlorophyll and no plant characters (holozoic). We may, with equal justice, call both animals or both plants, or perhaps one an animal and one a plant. The bacteria (Figs. 33-35) represent another group which has been difficult to classify clearly ; and for many years after they were first studied there was a considerable difference of opinion as to where they belonged. They have a method of life much like that of animals, but their general structure, their multiplication, their division to form long chains, and an occasional formation of spores, are points much more like plants, especially the Fungi. Continued study of the organisms has finally led to the conclusion that bacteria must be regarded as plants rather than animals, associated with the group of Fungi, and considered as resembling yeast and molds. A few such organisms as these are the only ones that present much difficulty in distinguishing between animals and plants, and even these can be called animals or plants with a consid- erable degree of certainty. While no sharp line can be drawn, the difficulty of separating them is really not very great, and even among unicellular forms it is rare that we cannot deter- DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ANIMALS AND PLANTS 223 mine satisfactorily whether to call an organism an animal or a plant. Metazoa and Metaphyta. — With the multiplication of cells and their differentiation we find that the distinction between animal and plant at once becomes marked, until there is no longer any similarity between them. Indeed, in all organisms above the Protozoa and the Protophyta, the two kingdoms are sharply separated, all multi- cellular organisms be- ing either so distinctly like plants or like ani- mals that the difficulty of distinguishing them disappears entirely. From this point up, plants usually not only possess chlorophyll, but also show a gen- eral structure which indicates that they are adapted for the absorption of gases from the air, of water from the soil, and for the purpose of carrying on the process of photosynthesis; while animals have a structure of body adapted for taking only solid or liquid food. The difference in the shape of the animal and plant body becomes so well marked that there is no longer any confusion between them. Even though we find large FIG. 104. — DROSERA, A CARNIVOROUS PLANT Small insects are captured by the hairs on the leaves, digested, and, in a measure, assimilated by the plant. 224 BIOLOGY groups of plants that have quite lost their chloropnyll (toad- stools, molds, etc.), there is no longer any difficulty in deter- mining that they are to be grouped with plants rather than with animals, in spite of their not having any green color- ing matter. When, too, we find a plant like the sundew (Fig. 104), which captures insects by means of the hairs on its leaves, and digests and assimilates them, we call it a "carnivorous plant" (Lat. caro (carnis) = flesh + vorare = to eat), but do not confound it with animals. The Metazoa (Gr. meta = after -f zoon = animal) and Metaphyta (Gr. phyton = plant) are sharply distinct. CONTRAST BETWEEN THE ACTIVITIES OF ANIMALS AND PLANTS The similarities and differences between animals and plants may be better understood if their properties are contrasted with each other in regular order. The following contrasts illustrate the distinction between these two groups : — 1. Alimentation. — In animals this system consists of a mouth, stomach, intestine, and digestive glands; food is taken into the body either as a solid or a liquid. In plants the system is poorly developed, consisting of root hairs for taking in liq- uids, and stomata for absorbing gases, but having no digestive organs. The foods absorbed are either liquids or gases, but never solids. 2. Circulation. — In animals circulation is brought about by a heart and blood vessels, or something corresponding to them. In plants the water absorbed from the roots ascends the stem, and passes out into the leaves by a process known as the ascent of sap, and the materials formed in the leaves are dissolved and eventually diffused throughout the plant, passing down- ward in certain of the cells of the stem. There are no real blood vessels, no heart, no blood, and no definite circulation. 3. Metabolism. — In animals metabolism is essentially destruc- tive. The animal uses as food organic compounds like carbo- DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ANIMALS AND PLANTS 225 hydrates, fats, and proteids; combines them with oxygen, and, as a result, produces as waste products carbon dioxid, water, and urea. The foods are broken to pieces, and the energy thus liberated is utilized; see Chapter XV. In plants the proc- ess is primarily constructive, but there is in plant life both a constructive and a destructive metabolism. By the former the plant uses carbon dioxid, water, and nitrates, which are combined in the plant to form organic substances, like starches, proteids, etc., and in the combination solar energy is stored away. As an excretion, there are produced oxygen and water. The destructive process of plants is essentially like that of animals: the compounds built up by the first process are destroyed by the second. The total amount of construction in green plants is greater than the amount of destruction, and therefore the green plants store away organic products which may subsequently be utilized by plant life. 4. Respiration. — Animals usually have lungs or gills filled with blood ; they always absorb oxygen, and eliminate the car- bon dioxid. In plants the respiration is carried on through the stomata of the leaves; when carrying on photosynthesis, plants absorb carbon dioxid and eliminate oxygen; when not carry- ing on photosynthesis, the gas absorbed is oxygen and the gas liberated is carbon dioxid. 5. Excretion. — In animals carbon dioxid is excreted from the lungs, water from the skin and kidneys, and urea from the kidneys. In plants there is no well-developed excretory system, although gases are excreted through the stomata, and certain other substances may pass out through the bark or through the roots into the soil. 6. Motion. — The muscles of animals develop a high degree of motion. In plants motion is very rarely developed, although it is not wholly lacking, some plants being well supplied with motile power. They do not, however, have muscles; and when they have motion, they use other forms of mechanism. 7. Support. — Animals usually have a skeleton of shell or 236 BIOLOGY bone, either internal or external. In plants the supporting structure is, as a rule, developed better than in animals, and consists of the great mass of wood or other resisting material found throughout the plant. 8. Coordination. — All animals, except the unicellular forms, have a nervous system, usually centering in the brain, which brings into coordination the various functions of life. In plants there is no coordinating system and practically no coordination of the different parts. Each part of the plant may live its life to a considerable degree independently of the others. 9. Reproduction. — The reproductive processes of animals and plants are very similar. Both produce eggs and sperms, and have a sexual reproduction; and in both there may be repro- duction by an asexual method, although in animals the asexual reproduction is less common than in plants. In the higher animals the power of asexual reproduction is lost, while in even the highest plants the process of asexual reproduction has commonly been retained. In the higher members of both groups, sexual reproduction by eggs and sperms is universal. THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF ORGANISMS The close relation of organisms to each other is evident, since all animals, as well as all colorless plants, are dependent upon green plants for their food. They vary greatly, however, in their methods of obtaining their food. Food Habits Plants may be divided into three groups, according to their methods of obtaining their food : — 1. Autophytes (Gr. autos — self + phyton = plant). — Plants which are not dependent upon organic foods, but are able to take care of themselves by subsisting upon the minerals from the soil, together with the gases from the air, are called auto- phytes. These include the green plants (holophytic) only; and strictly speaking, even these plants are in a measure dependent THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF ORGANISMS 227 upon others. The minerals that they absorb from the soil are available for plant life only after the bacteria and other soil organisms have acted upon them, the fertility of the soil depending upon its microscopic life. The autophytes, however, do not need organic food, and in this respect are much more independent than the other two groups. 2. Saprophytes (Gr. sapros = rotten + phyton = plant). — Plants which feed upon the dead bodies of other organisms are saprophytes. The plants usually included under this head are the Fungi* These constitute the scavengers of the world, and may be found everywhere in the soil or in bodies of water, where they consume whatever excretions of animals or plants there may be; or live upon dead roots, leaves, and branches; they live, indeed, upon various dead materials that have been derived either from animal or plant life. Such organisms are almost universally distributed over the earth, and they cause all decay and putrefaction, these two processes being the result of the destruction of organic material by Fungi. This class of organisms is ever at work around us, consuming the bodies of dead animals and plants. 3. Parasites. — Plants which live upon and feed upon other living organisms are parasites. In such cases we call the organism upon which they feed the host. Parasitism is very common among both plants and animals, nearly every species having special parasites feeding upon it. As a rule, the para- sitic plants lack chlorophyll and belong to the group of Fungi. Both saprophytes and parasites are holozoic. Animals have similar relations, although in some respects they are more complicated. No animals live a life quite inde- pendent of organic food, like the autophytes, since they lack chlorophyll. The great majority of animals are called free-living, but they feed upon dead organic material (vegetable or animal food), and in this respect resemble saprophytes. Quite a large number of animals also feed upon a living host, and are consequently parasites. "Under Fungi are included bacteria. 228 BIOLOGY Symbiosis Among both animals and plants, however, we not infre- quently find different individuals associated and living in mutual relations which may or may not be those of parasite and host. The term symbiosis (Gr. sun = with + bios = life), which may refer to either animals or plants (literally meaning living together), is applied to a variety of relations where two organisms live in close relation to each other, and is in con- trast to free-living conditions where organisms live separately from others. The purpose of symbiosis is not always the same. Sometimes it is to the mutual advantage of both members; sometimes it is to the advantage of one and the detriment of the other, in which case it becomes parasitism. In accordance with the relation of the two members of the group, svmbiosis may be divided into several types as follows : — Helotism. — In helotism (Gr. Helot = a slave) one organism is enslaved by the other; neither is especially injured, but one does the work for the other. Among animals the best example of this is among the slave-making ants, where one species of ants makes a slave of an- other species, the slave do- ing all the work for the slave-maker. Both indi- viduals carry on their life in satisfactory fashion, and neither is particularly in- jured by the relation. Mutualism. — When both members of a group obtain an advantage from associa- tion, it is called mutualism. As examples of this, may be mentioned the relation between domesticated animals, like sn FIG. 105. — AN EXAMPLE OP MUTUALISM A hermit crab cr, lives in the shell of the snail, sn, and an anemone, an, fastens itself to the outside of the shell. Both animals are bene- fited. THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF ORGANISMS 229 dogs, and the human race. Among lower animals the associa- tion of a hermit crab with a sea anemone is an illustration; Fig. 105. Here the anemone gains an advantage from being carried to and fro, while the hermit crab is protected by the nematocysts, which, as in Hydra (page 144), are abundant on the tentacles of the anemone, and which by their poison protect the crab from the attack of enemies. Mutualism is rather more common among plants than animals. An example is the common gray mosses (Li- chens) that grow on rocks FIG. 106.— CLADO NIA\ A COMMON LICHEN, or tree trunks; Fig. 106. GROWING ON ROCKS The microscope shows that , At B is show,n th.e y°un?. mycelium, beginning to grow around a single cell of the green alga. this plant is a combination of a fungus and a green plant; Fig. 107. In this association the green plant carries on photosynthesis, furnish- ing starch for both itself and the fungus; on the other hand, the fungus furnishes, for the benefit of the green plant, a lodging place and a con- siderable quantity 01 carbon dioxid and water, FlG. 107. A MAGNIFIED SECTION OF A LICHEN Showing that it is made up of a fungus, m, and which it Collects from cells of a spherical, green plant, a. tion, ^therefore, seems to be one of mutual advantage. An- other example is a group of bacteria which grows within 230 BIOLOGY the little nodules on the roots of plants like peas and beans. If the roots of peas, beans, clover, or similar plants, be care- fully removed from the soil, they will usually be found covered with little nodules ranging in size from the head of a pin to a large pea. These are found to be produced by bacteria which enter the roots and grow and multiply in their tissues. But the association is mutually advantageous. The bacteria are useful in collecting nitrogen from the air which the pea utilizes for its own benefit; and, on the other hand, the bacteria get the benefit of a lodging place and nourishment in the roots of the tubercle, and therefore are themselves benefited by the association. Commensalism. — In commensalism (Lat. cum = with + mensa = table) the two organisms live together without notice- able advantage or disadvantage to either. As an example, may be mentioned the small crab that lives in the oyster shell, doing no injury to the oyster and gaining no special advantage. Various vines which cling to trees offer another example. Some of these vines force their rootlets into the tissues of the tree and do it injury; these are true parasites. But other vines simply use the tree for the support of their weak, climb- ing stem, and neither plant is particularly benefited or injured by the other, except that the vine is enabled by its climbing habit to send its leaves up into the sunlight. Parasitism. — In parasitism the mutual relationship is such that one individual is benefited at the expense of the other. The host is always injured, while the parasite is benefited. Among parasites we recognize two types. Ectoparasites. — Parasites that live upon the outside of their host are ectoparasites. As a rule, they are not very harmful, though they may be so. Among them are some in which a parasitic life is only a part of their existence. The mosquitoes live chiefly upon various juices, but occasionally suck the blood of human beings. In a second class, like the bedbug, the animals live wholly upon the nutrition from their host, but do not THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF ORGANISMS 231 attach themselves to the host permanently. A third type, like the lice, lives wholly upon its host and has no life apart from it. While these ectoparasites may be trouble- some, they are not especially injurious, except when they transmit disease germs. Endoparasites. — Parasites that live within the body of the host are endo- parasites. They are numerous and pro- duce far more mischief than ectoparasites. Among them are those that produce vari- ous deadly diseases like trichinosis (Fig. 108), tuberculosis, diphtheria, etc. The Effect of Parasitism Parasitism occurs among both animals and plants. The number of species of parasites is very great, but cannot be estimated. Nearly all species of animals and plants have their own parasites, and some have several species of parasites infesting them. For this reason it is sometimes stated that there are at least as many species of parasites as there are species of non-parasitic organisms. The effect of the parasitism upon both host and parasite is profound, but natu- rally quite different. Upon the Host. — The parasite usually injures the host and is then spoken of as pathogenic (Gr. pathos = disease + -geneia = producing). The amount of injury varies widely. In some cases, the parasite produces disease and even the death of the host. Trichina is a parasitic worm (Fig. 108), which occa- sionally causes trichinosis in man, resulting sometimes in death. Certain flies occasionally make their way into the skull cavities 'A B FIG. 108.— TRICHINA A, a single worm showing its internal anatomy; B, worm coiled up in a bit of muscle of pork. If uncooked pork containing these worms is eaten they are set free in the intestines and a case of trichinosis results. 232 BIOLOGY of cattle, producing serious and fatal brain disease. Malarial organisms (Fig. 25) live as parasites in hiiman blood and pro- duce malaria. Various parasitic bacteria produce serious dis- eases in man, as typhoid fever, tuberculosis, diphtheria, etc. The same is true of plants. The various wilts, rusts, and blights are serious plant diseases, frequently spreading from plant to plant, and producing death and destruction of the host. AH are produced by parasites growing in the plant tissues. Fungi of various kinds are the cause of the greater number of plant FIG. 109.— A WILLOW LEAF ATTACKED BY "MILDEW" CAUSED BY A PARASITIC FUNGUS FIG. 110.— THE "BITTER ROT" OF CURRANTS Produced by the parasitic fungus (Gleosporium) . Most of the currants have dropped from the stem and the rest are rotted. diseases; Figs. 109 and 110. In other cases, the effect upon the host is far less serious. Some parasites may live upon a host without seriously affecting it. For example, a number of bacteria live in our intestines; they may be called parasitic, since they dwell within a living host; but instead of being injurious, THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF ORGANISMS 233 some of them are beneficial to our life, and therefore are not true parasites, according to the definition given above. Between these two extremes are many intermediate grades. As a yule, parasitism injures the host, and indeed, strictly speaking, para- sitism is a term that should only be used when one animal or plant feeds upon another, to the distinct detriment of the latter. Upon the Parasite. — The effect of parasitism upon the parasite itself is no less profound than its effect upon the host, but it is of a totally different nature. The general effect of parasitism is to cause degradation of the parasite. It is a general law of living nature that any organs which are not used, inevitably begin to degenerate. If an animal becomes a parasite upon another, it shows a general tendency to lose many of its original characters. For example, the tapeworm has become parasitic in the intestines of animals. Here it finds its food already digested by the digestive juices of the host; it has thus no need of a mouth, of digestive organs, or of any power of motion; and, in conformity with the above law of nature, having no need of these functions, it has lost them. The tape- worm has thus become degraded to a very simple organism, without digestive organs and with all of its systems of organs reduced to the lowest possible condition. Thus, parasites, depending as they do upon their host for their nourishment, lose their power of independence and become degraded. This is a biological law of great significance, — the law that failure to use any function results in its loss, — running through the whole scale of nature. It is exemplified in the human race in numer- ous aspects of civilized life, where one class of people depends upon another. In our highly organized cities this principle of loss of power as a result of disuse is as well illustrated as it is among animals, since in the city individuals are so mutually dependent that each one has practically lost his ability to live by himself unaided by others. The principle of the loss of function by disuse is one of the most fundamental and sig- nificant of the laws of nature. 234 BIOLOGY NATURE'S LIFE CYCLE Construction and Destruction. — From a general survey of the facts which have thus been explained, it will be seen that there is a grand cycle in nature, in which the life of animals and plants is concerned. All organisms need food, and the only explanation of the fact that the food supply has not long since been exhausted is the fact that the same materials have been used over and over again, passing from plants to animals and from animals to plants. The chemical processes going on in the living world are of two types: those of construction (synthetical), by which complex substances are built out of simple ones; and those of destruction (analytical), by which the complex materials are reduced to simpler ones. Green plants growing in sunlight manufacture starch out of the simple ingredients which they extract from the soil and the air, utilizing sunlight as a source of energy for this purpose. Though they are building up these materials primarily for their own life, they build more than they need, so that there is a large surplus. This surplus is utilized by animals and by the colorless plants. It is taken into their bodies as food, and serves them as a source of energy, as well as material out of which they can manufacture new substances, and grow. Eventually the material is broken to pieces in the animal body and reduced once more to a simpler condition. In this way animals utilize as food a part of the surplus manufactured by green plants, consuming the surplus of proteids, starches, etc. But other materials made by the plants, like wood and leaves, do not so readily serve as food for animals. These materials must usually be broken down into simpler compounds, or the sub- stance of which they are made would not get into a condition where it could again be utilized. This seems to be the special function of the Fungi. The Significance of the Fungi in Nature. — Special emphasis must be given to the significance of the Fungi in these de- structive processes. In order that nature's processes may THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF ORGANISMS 235 continue indefinitely, all kinds of material that have been built up into organic compounds by the green plant must be pulled to pieces again so as to be brought back into the simple condition in which the future generations of plants can utilize them. While animals use and break down much of the pro- teids, starches, and fats, there are some substances that ani- mals cannot utilize, and the Fungi are necessary to reduce these substances to a simpler condition. Bacteria everywhere in nature are constantly feeding upon many kinds of organic substances, but primarily upon those that contain proteids or other nitrogenous compounds. The yeasts have a special re- lation to sugar; most of the sugars made by plants, and not otherwise used, are consumed by yeasts in fermentation and are thus brought back to the original condition of carbon dioxid and water. Bacteria and yeasts as well as animals thus feed upon the same substances. But there is other material of harder nature, like wood and leaves, which does not serve as food for animals nor to any great extent for bacteria or yeasts. The molds, mushrooms, and tree fungi seem to be especially designed by nature to attack these hard materials and reduce them to a condition in which they can be destroyed. These larger fungi consist of a mycelium of delicate, branching threads. If one of these plants starts to grow on the trunk of a tree, the my- celium pushes its way through the bark and in among the wood fibers, and eventually grows through the whole substance of the tree, the part visible on the outside of the trunk being only the spore-producing portion that has come to the surface to distribute the spores to other trees. The mycelium, while growing within the wood, produces certain substances which soften the wood and in time disintegrate it, i. e., cause it to rot. A tree attacked by one of these Fungi in time becomes soft and so changed in its chemical nature that it can be utilized as the food of some insect. Eventually the trunk of the tree is converted largely into a soft, pulpy mass, until finally it is wholly decomposed. Its carbon and hydrogen unite with 236 BIOLOGY oxygen, forming CO2 and H2O, which pass off into the air or sink into the soil, while the other ingredients are incorporated with the substances of the soil to form food for the next genera- tion of plants. The Fungi thus have the extremely important function of bringing back into a primitive condition much of the material manufactured by plants which otherwise could not readily be disposed of. When we consider that bacteria are nature's agents for decomposing proteids, that the yeasts act in a similar way upon carbohydrates, and that the larger Fungi attack the great mass of vegetable material which is otherwise beyond the reach of animal life, we can see that the group of Fungi is of immense significance in nature. They form a connecting link between the products of one generation of plants and the next. Without their agency, organic material — proteids, fats, starches, leaves, woods, etc. — would accumulate, and in time vegetation would cease, because the earth would be covered with the remains of past generations, which would crowd life out of existence. The Fungi thus act as scavengers, cleaning up the surface of the earth and rendering nature's processes con- tinuous by ever returning to the soil the ingredients upon which subsequent generations can feed. The Food Cycle Complete. — Thus, as the result of the action of the Fungi and of animals, all of the surplus starch and sugar, all the fat, proteids, wood, and cellulose, and indeed all other materials which have been built up by the constructive processes of plants, are eventually broken down, and in the end reach a condition like that from which they started. Carbon dioxid and water are produced, as well as nitrates and certain other mineral salts. The carbon dioxid, being a gas, flies off into the air to join the store of this gas in the atmosphere; the water evaporates or sinks into the soil; and the nitrates and other mineral ingredients also find their way into the soil. These ingredients, again within reach of plant life, are seized by the green plants and built up into a new generation of plants to THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF ORGANISMS 237 make new starch, sugar, proteids, etc. The ingredients which feed one generation of plants may, after combination in the plant body, nourish a generation of animals, eventually return- ing to the same conditions as those from which they started. The cycle is thus complete, and there need be no danger of exhaustion of the food supply as long as it is possible for the same materials to be used over and over again by green plants, animals, and fungi CHAPTER XII REPRODUCTION: SEXUAL AND ASEXUAL METHODS GENERAL TYPES OF REPRODUCTION THE process by which reproduction is brought about is always fundamentally the same. In spite of all of the numerous modifications of the method in different animals and plants, they are all reducible to some form of division; the original animal or plant divides itself into parts, each of which is ca- pable of growing into an individual like the one from which it came. The numerous varieties of reproduction may be grouped together under two general types. In one of these the original organism divides itself directly into two or more parts by simple division. In the other the division is always compli- cated by the union of two parts with each other. In the latter case certain cells of the original organisms unite with each other, and the union is followed by a rapid division of the cells. The two types of reproduction are, therefore, (1) Division un- accompanied by cell union and (2) Division accompanied by cell union. The type of division in which cell union is found is often spoken of as sexual reproduction, and the uniting cells are the sex cells; the type in which the division is not accom- panied by cell union is called asexual reproduction. REPRODUCTION IN UNICELLULAR ORGANISMS Simple Division. — All of the single-celled animals multiply by the process of simple division; Figs. 19, 23. A careful study of the internal changes that are going on in the celk during this reproduction shows that they are essentially identical with those described on pages 85-89. In other words> there is a division of the chromatin material in the nucleus, followed by the formation of two nuclei, which again is fol- lowed by the division of the cell into two parts. After having 238 SEXUAL AND ASEXUAL REPRODUCTION 239 thus divided and separated from each other, each of the indi- viduals grows until it is ready to divide, and so the process goes on repeating itself. In most unicellular plants, the method of reproduction is essentially the same. Figure 30, for example, shows the reproduction in Pleurococcus, and Figure 33 in ordi- nary bacteria. These latter plants are so small that we cannot determine the internal changes that are going on, but can only see that the individuals elongate and then divide in the middle, into two parts. Recent study, however, seems to suggest that the changes are essentially like those occurring in the Amoeba, and at all events the process of reproduction is nothing more than the process of division. The reproduction of yeast by budding (gemmation) is only a modification of division; Fig. 32. The internal changes are essentially like those in the reproduction of the Amoeba or Paramecium; the first step is the division of the nucleus into two, one of which passes out of the original cell into the bud, while the other remains in the original cell. Thus, when the two cells separate, each has a nucleus that has come from the original nucleus, and, while the details of the process are somewhat different, it is as truly a cell division as in the other examples. Nearly all of the unicellular animals and plants show one of these two methods of reproduction; see Fig. 111. Reproduction by Spores. — When the organism breaks up into many parts, they are called spores. Examples of this we have already noticed among the unicellular organisms. In the yeast (Fig. 32 s), spores are formed within the yeast cells under some conditions; and Figure 25, which shows the life history of the malarial organism, indicates that one part of its history, namely, the cycle in the human blood, is an illus- tration of spore formation. In the malarial Plasmodium the spore formation which occurs in the human blood alternates with a second type of spore formation in the body of the mos- quito. This last process is, however, associated with celi union, as shown in Figure 25 j. Among unicellular animals 240 BIOLOGY spore formation is unusual, except in cases where it alternates with a cell union, as in Plasmodium. Among bacteria there is a spore formation of a peculiar kind. Here, as shown in Figure 33 E, each bacterium produces a single spore only, instead of several, and the spore forma- tion is really not a form of multiplica- tion. The cells formed are, however, called spores, although their function seems to be to resist adverse condi- tions rather than to reproduce the or- ganism. They have resisting walls and are capable of developing into new in- dividuals, thus agreeing with other spores except in the fact that one only is produced in a cell. Reproduction by Cell Union among Unicellular Organisms. — The process of cell division among single-celled or- ganisms may continue for a long time, producing an indefinite series of off- spring. Whether in any case this kind of division can really go on indefinitely we do not positively know. There are some organisms like yeast and bacteria, in which we have reason for suspecting that cell division may go on indefinitely if proper conditions can be maintained, and in which, up to the present, no trace of any other kind of reproduction has been found. It is believed by some that even animals like Paramedum, which conjugate occasionally, may, if proper conditions be maintained, go on dividing indefinitely. Whether this is true or not, it is certain that under ordinary conditions cell division in time becomes slower, and in Paramedum it has a tendency to come to an end, unless it is reinvigorated in some way. In nature such an invigoration is brought about by a fusion of cells with each other as already described; see Fig. 23, page 64. FIG. 111. — GONIUM. AN ORGANISM FORMED OP SIXTEEN CELLS UNITED BY JELLY A, view from the side; B, view from above and showing the method of reproduction by division of each cell into sixteen parts, which separate to form new colonies. SEXUAL AND ASEXUAL REPRODUCTION 241 It is probable that in most other unicellular organisms a similar cell union occurs under some conditions. As already described, it occurs in the malarial organism in the cycle that takes place in the mosquito; Fig. 25 j. The cell union that takes place is a true sex union, since there is a clear dis- tinction of male and female cells. While such a union of cells has by no means been found in ail unicellular organisms, it has been found in many, and we know that it is quite widely distributed. The studies of recent years particularly have shown one large group of unicellular organisms called the Sporozoa, which live as parasites on various hosts, and show a cell union resembling that of malaria. Another example of this will be given here in illustration of the phenomenon of cell union among single-celled animals. Monocystis. — In the earthworm may be found living a unicellular parasite known as Monocystis. This animal (see Fig. 112 A) is a single elongated t cell possessing a nucleus, but with no other visible organs. The animal has no locomotor organs, although it does have a slight power of motion. Its method of reproduction involves a cycle, in which a cell union alternates with a formation of spores without cell union, but in a complicated manner. When ready to multiply, two indi- viduals fuse with each other and become surrounded by a covering or cyst; Fig. B. Inside of this cyst both of the indi- viduals divide. First the nucleus divides into many parts (see Fig. C), and later the rest of the protoplasm divides and collects around the pieces of the divided nuclei, thus making many small cells. Now the new cells from one of these indi- viduals unite in pairs with the cells from the other. This step occurs within the cyst, but is shown separated from it in Figure Dj a, by and c, and it constitutes the cell union proper. When the cells fuse together their nuclei unite, forming a single nu- cleus, c, called the fusion nucleus, which divides into eight parts, at e, after which the whole cell divides into eight elon- gated cells (see /) known as sporozoites. Meantime a hard 242 BIOLOGY shell is produced around the eight sporozoites and the whole cluster of eight is called a sporoblast. All of this has occurred within the original cyst, which has by this time become filled with a large number of these sporoblasts, each with its eight FIG. 112. — MONOCYSTIS, SHOWING METHOD OP REPRODUCTION A, the full-grown animal; B, two individuals enclosed in a cyst; C, the division of the nucleus into a number of parts, the protoplasm not yet divided; D, successive stages of the fusion of thfe cells which result from division of the two animals in C; F, the cyst containing numerous sporoblasts; G, shows the sporoblast breaking open to allow the spores to emerge, which develop into adult animals. The stages represented in G occur only when the animal •caches another earthworm. sporozoites within; see Fig. F. Eventually the cyst breaks open, allowing the contents to escape. Later these sporcblasts themselves break open and the individual sporozoites come but ready to grow into new animals like the original Monocystis; Fig. G. These latter stages do not occur unless the sporozoites find their way into another earthworm, where they live as parasites until ready to multiply again. The sporozoites are SEXUAL AND ASEXUAL REPRODUCTION 243 evidently spores, but they arise from the division of a mass resulting from the fusion of two reproductive cells; and to distinguish them from other spores they are called sporozoites. By comparing this history with that of the malarian Plasmo- dium, it will be evident that the spores of the latter, which are formed in the body of the mosquito, must be sporozoites, since, like those just described, they arise from the breaking up of the mass of the two cells which have united by cell union. Monocystis as here described shows no spores which correspond to those that appear in the human blood; Fig. 25 g and h. REPRODUCTION IN MULTICELLULAR ORGANISMS Multicellular organisms have the same two general types of reproduction as found in the unicellular; namely, simple divi- sion, and division accompanied by cell union. DIVISION WITHOUT CELL UNION Multiplication by Simple Division. — Simple division among multicellular organisms is more common among plants than among animals; and excellent examples of it are familiar to all. Many of the lower plants, like liverworts, multiply by the for- mation of buds called gemmae, which break away from the original, and form new plants. Even among the higher plants the same general method is found. If one of the branches of a weeping-willow tree is broken off and stuck into moist ground, it will take root and grow into a new tree. Indeed, we can cut the branches of a willow into practically as many pieces as we wish, and find each one is capable of taking root and growing into a new tree. The same thing is true of most ordi- nary plants, for, with a few exceptions, trees and smaller plants may be reproduced indefinitely by breaking off their branches and putting them into the proper conditions for taking root. While a few plants fail to show this power, it is a character found very commonly in the vegetable kingdom. Many plants normally multiply upon a similar principle. The strawberry 244 BIOLOGY plant, for example, sends out branches which grow for some distance, and then their tips strike root into the ground and a new plant springs up, united with the old one at first by a connecting branch; Fig. 113. Among animals this method of reproduction is not so common as in plants and is confined to the lower species. One example has been already described in Hydra; see page 146. Reproduction by division is evidently closely related to the power of replacing lost parts. Hydra may be divided into many FIG. 113. — REPRODUCTION IN A STRAWBERRY PLANT BY DIVISION pieces, each capable of producing all of its lacking parts; but this power is retained in diminishing degree as we go from lower to higher animals. The earthworm does not ordinarily multiply by simple division, but if it is cut into two pieces by accident, each will develop the lost parts and two animals will result. In some worms, related to the earthworm, this method of multiplication by division, each piece developing all of the lost parts, is a normal method of reproduction; Fig. 114. Reproduction by Spores. — Reproduction by means of spores is also found among the multicellular organisms, especially among the multicellular plants. A few illustrations of it are the following. — SEXUAL AND ASEXUAL REPRODUCTION 245 Examples of spore formation in molds have already been described (page 97), two methods having been mentioned. In Mucor (Fig. 42 E) the spores are pro- duced within a sac called a sporangium, while in Penidllium (Fig. 42 A) they are only the ends of branches, growing in the air. The latter are called conidia to dis- tinguish them from spores formed in spo- rangia. The nature and function of spores and conidia are the same. Another well-known illustration of the same is the common puffball. This is a colorless plant, growing from a mycelium which lies chiefly below the surface of the ground. At certain seasons of the year there arise from the mycelium, rounded knobs which rapidly increase in size. They may grow as large as a walnut or an orange, and in some species they reach a diameter of a foot, or even two feet ; see Fig. 115. Within this great mass the contents di- vide into millions of spores, and after they have been properly matured an opening appears at the top and the spores emerge in the form of a fine dust. The slightest touch upon the puffball will throw masses of dust into the air, from which arises the name puff- ball. This dust consists of millions of minute spores, each of which can become a new plant. This power of producing spores is widely distributed among FlG. 114. TWO SEG- MENTED WORMS, WHICH MULTIPLY BY ASEXUAL METHODS A, Autolytus, multiplying by division; B, Syllis, multi- plying by budding, the buds growing from the side and breaking away to form new individuals. FlG. 115. A PUFF- BALL SHOWING THE SPORES PRO- TRUDING FROM THE OPENING 246 BIOLOGY plants, occurring in the lower as well as in the higher. Even in the flowering plants the pollen of a flower is really a mass of spores, although their relation to the growth of the plant is different from that of the spores to the puffball, since they do not grow immediately into a plant like the one that produces them. Among the multicellular animals, the production of spores is not found. There is, however, in a few animals a method of reproduction, called parthenogenesis, which in some respects resembles spore formation. The essential differences between reproduction by spores and that by eggs is that a spore grows into a new organism without being united with a sperm, i. e., no fertilization is required (see page 267), while an egg must combine with a sperm in order to be capable of growing into a new organism. Some organisms, however, produce eggs that can grow without fertilization. Among the best-known examples of this is the honey bee. The female bee produces true eggs, some of which unite with sperms, while others develop without such union. The individuals produced from the unfertilized and from the fertilized egg are different, the fertilized eggs producing worker bees or females, and the unfertilized eggs producing males (drones). So far as can foe seen the eggs are alike, the only difference between the eggs that produce workers and those that produce males being that one is fertilized and the other not. This phenomenon of the development of eggs without fertilization is called partheno- genesis (Gr. parthenos = virgin + genesis = creation) . It re- sembles reproduction by spores only in the fact that it consists of a single cell developing into an adult without the neces- sity of union with a sperm; but the reproductive bodies are identical with eggs, and it is usually described as reproduction by eggs which do not require fertilization. Parthenogenesis occurs in a variety of animals with vari- ous complications. Where it occurs it is most common to have such a parthenogenetic reproduction alternate, with more SEXUAL AND ASEXUAL REPRODUCTION 247 7 or less frequency, with sexual reproduction. In the microscopic Animal Hydatina, for example (Fig. 116), found in fresh water, the eggs commonly produced, called summer eggs, develop without fertilization into new females, which rapidly mature and produce more similar eggs that develop in the same way. This may go on for a long time, under proper conditions for hundreds of generations, without any males making their appearance. Even- tually, however, under conditions not yet understood, males make their ap- pearance and the females produce eggs of a different kind, called winter eggs, which are incapable of developing with- out being combined with sperms by the sexual process. Here, then, partheno- genesis seems to be the normal method of reproduction, sexual reproduction alternating with it at unknown and un- certain intervals. The reasons for this alternation, and the conditions that de- termine the one or the other method, are not yet understood. FIG. 116.— HYDATINA. A MICROSCOPIC ORGANISM THAT MULTIPLIES BY PARTHENOGENESIS ex, excretory system; gl, gland; m, mouth; st, stomach. MULTIPLICATION BY CELL UNION Conjugation. — In all animals above che unicellular forms, and in most plants, cell union is found as a factor in reproduction. Among a few plants of the lower orders the cells which unite are alike. In Mucor, for example, besides the spore formation mentioned on page 97, a union of cells sometimes takes place; Fig. 117. As shown in Figure A, special lateral threads grow out from the ordinary mycelium of the mold, and these come in contact with each other at their tips. After they touch each other single cells are divided off from each, B, which fuse with 248 BIOLOGY each other, as shown at C. This fused mass is called a zygo- spore (Gr. zygon = yoke + spora), z. It enlarges, becomes covered with a hard case, D, and breaks away from the plant that produced it. It may then remain dormant for a long time, but eventually it sprouts, E, and grows into a new plant. In this case the two cells that unite are, so far as the micro- scope discloses, alike, and the plants that produce them appear identical. But careful study has proved that there is a differ- ence in the uniting plants, shown not in their shape, but in their uniting powers. It has been found that there are two D E FIG. 117. — CONJUGATION OF MUCOR Successive stages being shown in A toE; x and y are threads from different plants, which unite by conjugation; z, the zygospore; at E the zygospore has sprouted to form a new plant. types of Mucor, differing only in their power of uniting with each other. For example, in Figure A, the two different my- celium threads are marked x and y. It is found that while outgrowths of x can unite with outgrowths of ?/, they can never unite with other outgrowths of the mycelium x. There are thus two different types of plants, each capable of uniting with the other, but not capable of uniting with outgrowths from itself. This reminds us of sex union, where an egg will unite with a sperm but not with another egg. It cannot be called true sex, however, since there are no distinguishable differences SEXUAL AND ASEXUAL REPRODUCTION 24S FIG. 118.— EGGS. A, OF 'AN ANIMAL; B, its i ^semblance to the gametophyte, is so slight that it was not recognized for years after plants had been carefully studied But it is now known thai the pollen does, at least in some of the higher plants, develop sufficiently to show the gametophyte stage and then produces what corresponds to antheridia; Fig. 128 g. The pollen tube which grows down through the style of the pistil (Figs. 65 and 127 pi), in a way corresponds to the antheridium ; and inside it are small cells, or nuclei of cells, m, that corre spondtoand have thesame func- tion as sperms. In other words, the pollen does not correspond to a sperm, but is simply a spore that grows into a male gameto- phyte, which itself produces the equivalent of sperms. It is thus seen that inside of the pistil one kind of spore grows into a female gametophyte and produces eggs, while on the stigma the other kind of spore grows into a rudimentary male gametophyte and produces the equivalents of sperms. Following farther the comparison with a fern, the next step is the fertilization of the egg of the female gametophyte by the sperm of the male gametophyte. In the flower this fusion is accomplished as follows: The pollen tube "(Fig. 1281?) is an outgrowth from the male gametophyte, and pushes its way FIG. 127. — A SECTION OP AN OVULE AFTER THE SPORE HAS GROWN INTO THE FEMALE GAME- TOPHYTE G, the gametophyte; e, egg; pt, a pollen tube pushing its way through the style to fertilize the egg; m, is the male nucleus in the pollen which corresponds to the sperm and fertilizes the egg. 276 BIOLOGY down the style until it reaches the ovule at the bottom of the ovary; see Figs. 65 and 127 pt. In this ovule the female gametophyte has formed, and has by this time produced what corresponds to archegonia with their eggs; Fig. 127 e. The tip of the pollen tube approaches the egg and finally comes in contact with it. Inside o* the pollen tube are nuclei which represent the sperms; Fig. 127 m. As we have noticed on page 257, when the fertilization of an egg occurs it is only the nuclei of the cells that fuse, so that the nuclei in the pollen FIG. 128. — DEVELOPMENT OF THE POLLEN A, a single pollen grain or microspore; B, the cell divided into two; C, the pollen, which has produced a rudimentary gametophyte at g; D, a later stage with the gametophyte g still more rudimentary; E, the pollen developing the pollen tube. The nucleus m divides later into two nuclei representing sperms. tube represent all of the important parts of a sperm. When the pollen tube comes in contact with the egg it allows these nuclei to escape into the egg, where one of them fuses with the nucleus of the egg, thus producing the actual sex union. The fertilized egg is now endowed with powers of growth and begins at once to develop into a new plant. Again follow- ing the comparison with the fern, we shall expect that the plant which comes from the fertilized egg must be the sporophyte, which in this case is, of course, the plant that produces the flowers. The egg develops at once, growing quickly into a tiny plant with a stem and one or two leaves. This occurs while the egg is still retained in the ovary of the flower that produced the spores. After a time this plant stops growing REPRODUCTION: ALTERNATION OF GENERATIONS 277 and becomes surrounded by a hard shell, inside of which it remains dormant for an indefinite period. This forms the seed, which thus appears to be a little sporophyte surrounded by a shell, and it remains dormant until later when it can be placed under proper conditions for germination; Fig. 66. It develops its spores, of course, after it has grown large enough to produce flowers. It is thus seen that the flowering plant has an alternation of generations as truly as does the fern, only in the flowering plant the sex stage, the gametophyte, is very small, while the asexual stage is very large. The plant with which we are familiar is in the sporophyte stage, and the pollen and the single cell inside its ovule are its spores. These develop into tiny growths that correspond to the gametophytes and are developed within, or attached to, the sporophyte that produced the spores, i. e., in the ovary or attached to the stigma. But tiny as they are, they produce the equivalents of eggs and sperms, which subsequently fuse by true fertilization. The real fertilization of the plant, then, is the fusion of the male cell contained in the pollen tube with the egg contained in the ovule. The term fertilization, which has been commonly ap- plied to the transfer of the pollen to the stigma, is a misnomer, and is largely given up, the term pollination being substituted instead. Alternation of Generations among Animals. — An alternation of generations also occurs in the animals known as hydroids, animals related to the Hydra. The fresh-water Hydra, as described in Chapter VII, multiplies by budding; but as fast as the buds are produced they break away from the original animal and become independent. In the marine Podocoryne, the buds do not break away but remain attached to form a colony, made up of large numbers of individuals; Fig. 129. The individuals are partially independent of each other and. if broken apart are capable of living independent lives. This stage of the life of the animal, since it has an asexual multi- 278 BIOLOGY plication by budding, is the asexual stage, and is comparable to the asexual stage of the fern above described (the fern proper). It differs from the fern, however, in the fact' that ?t does not produce new individuals by spores, but by budding. After a colony reaches a certain stage in its growth, some buds arise which differ in shape from the others. These (Fig. 129 gb) are rounded, and eventually break away from the FIG. 129. — A COLONY OF HYDROIDS (PODOCORYNE), SHOWING AN ALTER- NATION OF GENERATIONS The feeding animals have tentacles; gb, the generative buds, which eventually break away and become medusae; m, medusa; mo, mouth of the jellyfish; ov, ovaries. Colony and assume an independent existence. These free buds now become bell-shaped individuals of clear, transparent jelly, and are known as jellyfishes or medusae, m. The jelly- fishes have muscles which enable them to swim and travel for long distances in the ocean. As they have a mouth and digestive cavity they can procure their own food, and grow, frequently attaining considerable size after separating from the original colonies; some species, indeed, assume a size very much larger than the animal that produced them. After hav- ing lived this free life for a time, each becomes sexually mature, developing sexual glands, either ovaries or spermaries; Fig. 130 g. The sex bodies become mature, and are extruded into the water, REPRODUCTION: ALTERNATION OF GENERATIONS 279 where they float around until the eggs and the sperms come in contact and fuse, producing a typical fertilization. The jellyfish itself, after it has extruded the sex bodies, has no further function, and dies. The egg, however, now grows into a new colony like the origi- nal. This jellyfish is evi- dently the sexual stage in the development of the hydroid, and corresponds to the sexual stage in the development of the fern (the prothallium). The alternation of a sexual with a non-sexual method is far more common among plants than among animals. It is developed in all plants except the lower orders, even the flowering plants, as we have just seen, having such an alternation. Among animals, however, alternation of genera- tions is found only in the lower orders. It is common among the Hydroids, and a modified form of it occurs in one of the higher animals (Salpa) ; but among the great majority of ani- mals, when sexual reproduction is developed, the non-sexual method is totally lost. FIG. 130. — A FULL-GROWN JELLYFISH m, mouth; g, gonads. CHAPTER XIV DEVELOPMENT OF THE FERTILIZED EGG EMBRYOLOGY AND METAMORPHOSIS BY the term embryology is meant that part of the life his- tory of the animal or plant which begins with the fertilization of the egg and continues up to the time when a developed animal is formed, ready to emerge from the egg as a free-living, independent individual. When it hatches from the egg it is sometimes like the adult, except in size; but sometimes it is unlike its parents and goes through a further series of changes. In this case we speak of these later stages as constituting the larval history or a metamorphosis (Gr. meta = beyond + mor- phe = form). The development of animals from the egg to the adult stage, embryology and metamorphosis, has proved to be an especially interesting phase of biological study, and has received much attention in the last fifty years. The em- bryology of different animals and plants differs widely, but certain fundamental laws and rules are found to apply to all alike. In this introductory study it is only possible to give a few of the fundamental principles, using a single animal as an illustration. For this purpose will be described the de- velopment of the frog, which, although peculiar in some respects, will illustrate the important laws both of embryology and metamorphosis. The embryology of plants has also been studied rather extensively, but has not hitherto yielded so many interesting lessons as the embryology of animals. EMBRYOLOGY OF THE FROG 1. Segmentation. — The life of an individual frog may be said to begin the instant that the nucleus of the egg fuses with the head of the sperm (Fig. 121 H), the time of fertilization being thus a starting point of a new life. This fertilization of 280 DEVELOPMENT OF THE FERTILIZED EGG 281 an egg nucleus seems to endow it with renewed power. The nucleus of the egg previous to fertilization has lost its power of division, and if left to itself, eventually dies and disappears; but after fusing with the sperm the combined nucleus shows a rein- vigorated power of growth. It begins almost at once to divide in two parts (Fig. 132 A); the process of the division of the nucleus fol- A £j lowed by the division of the cell is identical with that described on page 85. As a result of this division there are produced two cells, FlG 131 each with a centrosome, each with its PRODUCTIVE nucleus, which contains the same number of CELLS OF chromosomes as the fertilized egg nucleus. FROG Moreover, at the beginning of the division, sp^r'megg; B' the each chromosome is split lengthwise, and half of each chromosome passes into each of the two nuclei of the two new cells. Each of the two cells thus contains chromatin material from each of the chromosomes of the fertilized egg, and since these chromosomes come partly from the male and partly from the female parent, it follows that one-half of the chromatin in each cell is derived from the male, and one-half from the female parent. Hence, each cell will contain inherited traits from each parent. This first divi- sion of the egg is soon followed by a second, which produces four cells, and in this division the same process is repeated, the chromatin material being again split up so that each of the four cells (Fig. 132 A) contains chromatin material from both parents. This process now goes on, the cells dividing again and again, until the original egg has divided into a large number of small cells, each cell probably containing chromatin material from both parents. This process of segmentation or cleavage is the first step by which all animals and plants begin their life history, the egg in all cases dividing after a similar manner into a large number of cells. 282 BIOLOGY FIG. 132. — DIAGRAM REPRESENTING THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE PROG A, eight stages of the segmentation of the egg; B, section of the egg showing the beginning of the differentiation of ectoderm from endoderm; C, sections at a later stage, showing the growth of the ectoderm over the endoderm; D, section after the germ layers are formed; «c, ectoderm; en, endoderm; mes, mesoderm; E, surface view of a young embryo showing two branchial slits, brc; F, surface view of an older embryo; G, diagrammatic, longitudinal sections of the stage F ; H, a later stage. In these diagrams the ectoderm is in black, meso- derm, with dotted shading, and endoderm without shading. br, the brain; I, liver; nc, notocord; sp, spinal cord. ht, heart; n, nervous system; s, sexual duct; (Various authors.) DEVELOPMENT OF THE FERTILIZED EGG 283 2. Differentiation. — Although the cells at the outset are much alike, they soon begin to show differentiation. In Fig- ure 132 B it will be seen that the upper cells are smaller than the lower ones, and the contents of the larger cells are quite different from those of the smaller. The difference thus shown early in the development of the egg marks the distinction between those cells which will eventually form the alimentary canal and those which will form the other parts of the body. As the development goes on and the number of cells in the embryo increases more and more, greater and greater differences are found among them (Figs. C and D), so that one group of cells after another becomes set apart by differences in structure and functions, until finally, when the animal has reached the adult form, it is not only composed of innumerable cells, but these cells have assumed a great variety of shape and function. This process of gradual change of shape and function of cells which were originally alike, is spoken of under the name of differentiation. A similar change occurs in all multicellular animals and plants; for, after segmentation of the egg, there always follows a differentiation of cells. 3. The Formation of Germ Layers. — After the cells have multiplied until they have become quite numerous, they begin to arrange themselves in three groups. Soon there appears an outer layer, an inner layer, and a -middle layer, known respec- tively as ectoderm, endoderm, and mesoderm. These are shown in Figure 132 D, which represents a later development in the frog. The method by which these three layers are formed is shown diagrammatically in Figure C. It may briefly be described as the growing of the mass of the smaller, ectoderm cells, around and over the larger, endoderm cells, so as finally to bring the larger cells upon the inside of the embryo, surrounded by the smaller ones. Meantime there has grown from the outer and inner layers a third mass of cells, the mesoderm, that pushes its way between the other two, thus partly filling up the space between the outer and inner layers; Fig. D. The •284 BIOLOGY final result is that the embryo has an ectoderm of smaller cells on the outer side, an endoderm of larger cells on the inner side, and a mesoderm between the outer and the inner layer. These three layers of cells remain distinct, and are destined for dif- ferent purposes in the subsequent life of the animal, each one of them developing into certain organs only. The organs that are developed from the three layers are as follows : — The mesoderm. — From the mesoderm develop the muscles, the bones, the heart, and the blood vessels, the lining of the body cavity, the outer layer of the alimentary canal, the mesentery which holds the alimentary canal in position, and the repro- ductive system. The endoderm. — From the endoderm develop the alimentary canal, the glands around the mouth, the lungs, the pancreas, and the liver. The muscles which form the wall of the alimen- tary canal are developed from the mesoderm, but the lining of the digestive tract, with all its glands, which secrete the digestive juices, is formed from the endoderm. The ectoderm. — The ectoderm gives rise to the skin, includ- ing the epidermis and the dermis. It also grows inward to line the mouth and the extreme posterior end of the alimentary canal. The ectoderm also gives rise to the nervous system, with all of its parts, including the brain, the spinal cord, the nerves, and all of the sensory organs, like the eyes, the ears, organs of smell and touch. It will be seen that the alimentary canal is made of three parts: the anterior end is formed by the infolding (imagination) of the ectoderm, the infolded part forming the mouth or buccal cavity; the posterior end is also formed by an invagination of the ectoderm, which forms the cloacal chamber; the rest of the canal is formed from the endoderm. These three parts are called the foregut (stomodceum) , the midgut (mesenteron) , and the hindgut (proctodceum) . Similar relations are found in other vertebrates and also in the lower animals as well. Layers similar to those described are found in the embryos DEVELOPMENT OF THE FERTILIZED EGG 285 of nearly all animals. Among some of the very lowest ( Hydra) only the ectoderm and the endoderm are formed, the mesoderm being omitted. But in all except the lowest types three layers are formed early in the embryological history. The method by which these three layers are formed differs in different ani- mals. In Figure 15 is shown a method of formation of the endoderm, differing from that of the frog, by an infolding of a hollow sphere to form a double sac. But however differently the layers are formed, the system of organs which are developed from them is essentially the same. The nervous system is always developed from the ectoderm, the alimentary canal from the endoderm, and the blood system and muscles are developed from the mesoderm. 4. The Formation of the Body.— While the germ layers have been forming, the embryo has been elongating (Fig. 132 E\ and the endoderm forms itself into a hollow tube within the body, which acquires an opening, first at one extremity and then at the other; Fig. G. This tube becomes the alimentary canal, and the two openings are the mouth and the anal, or cloacal opening. Between this inner tube and the outer wall of the body lies a cavity, more or less filled with the mesoderm, but in it eventually appears the body cavity or ccelum, which be- comes a more distinct cavity as the animal grows. Early in the development, when the animal has assumed the form shown at E, openings in the side of the neck break through from the alimentary canal to the exterior. There are at first two of these, shown at E, brc, but later others appear. These are known as branchial openings, and become passages through which water taken in at the mouth may be passed to the exterior. They represent the gill slits present in fishes, and are to have a similar function a little later, when the frog hatches from the egg and lives in the water. While these changes are going on there is formed a long, thickened rod of ectoderm in the middle line of the back, extending from one end of the ani- mal to the other, which is the beginning of the nervous system; 286 BIOLOGY Fig. G, n. The result is the formation of a little animal such as is shown in Figure H, in which the relation to the adult structure can be clearly seen, although at this stage the em- bryo only slightly resembles the adult frog. The development that has taken place up to this point has occupied a period of several days from the time when the egg was fertilized, the exact length of time depending to a large extent upon the temperature, the different stages being more rapidly passed through if the eggs are kept warm than when they are kept cool. Various other systems of organs begin to appear at this stage or a little later. From the ectoderm along the middle line in the back, develops a rod of nervous matter, and around the front end of this, outgrowths appear, which become the eyes, ears, and other sense organs. The nervous mass itself differenti- ates into the brain and spinal cord; Fig. H. The endodermal tube also develops outgrowths which in time become the lungs, liver, and pancreas. One part of the mesoderm forms itself into a gelatinous rod running lengthwise in the back of the embryo, just beneath the nervous system. This is the noto- cord, nc; it represents the beginning of the spinal column, and in time the vertebrce grow around it. Another part of the mesoderm develops into the heart, ht, and blood vessels; while that part of it which lines the body wall becomes the muscles, and that which is next to the intestine develops into the pm- toneumf the world if they could only get into new regions. It not infrequently happens that organisms from one country get carried by accident to another, and find the new country far better adapted to their life than their original home. For example, when the European hare was carried to Australia, it found conditions far better adapted to it than those of its original home in Europe, and it multiplied with prodigious rapidity, be- coming far more abundant in Australia than ever it was in Europe. The English sparrow, when introduced from England, finding America better adapted to its life than England, multi- plied very rapidly, and spread over the country. Our fields in the eastern states are filled with the so-called white daisy (Leu- canthemum) . This is a European species which, when introduced into this country, found conditions better adapted to its needs than in its original home and became far more abundant here than in its original home. These three illustrations show that although animals certainly must be adapted to the conditions in which they live or be exterminated, they are not particularly 346 BIOLOGY made for those localities, since in many cases they are better fitted for other localities than their own homes. The idea that organisms were especially designed by creation to fit the con- ditions in which they live is thus disproved. Adaptation the Result of Growth. — The history of organisms shows that adaptation to environment has not come suddenly, but has been the result of slow development, brought about by race divergence and evolution. Adaptation in the life of the individual. — When the individual starts its existence it is simply a fertilized egg. It is a cell, and is not especially adapted to any particular condition of life. In its development the cell divides into many cells, and these cells assume different shapes and relations. As the organism grows, the adaptation to the environment makes its appearance. In plants, the roots soon assume a form which adapts them to the soil, while the leaves become fitted for the air; in animals, some cells adapt themselves to functions of digestion, others to the functions of motion, etc. In other words, in the life of the individual, adaptation is a matter of slow growth and comes step by step as the egg is gradually molding itself, into the form of the adult. Concealed in this fertilized egg are marvelous powers which cause the egg to develop into an adult, and the powers that cause the development of the egg cause also the adaptation of the different parts to the conditions of life. Adaptation in the race. — There is no doubt that a similar history of growth has brought about the adaptation of the race to environment. Probably the earliest type of the plant was a single cell, adapted to life in the water but not in the soil. As the ages passed on and plants reached the land, an adaptation to this new environment slowly developed. The structures which we find in animals and plants to-day, which adapt them to their environment, were not of sudden origin in any case, but were the result of a gradual change of the older forms into newer types, more closely adapted to the new conditions of life. As an example of such adaptation, may be mentioned the ORIGIN OF THE LIVING MACHINE: ADAPTATION 347 development of the spinal column of the vertebrates- during the geological ages, which is disclosed by the fossils in the rocks. When the vertebrates first appeared, apparently they had no bones, but in their backs was a rather stiff rod which gave them rigidity, this being represented by the rod in the embryo which we have already learned to speak of as the notochord (see page 286) . Following along through the various strata of rocks, which represent a progressive development of vertebrates, we find that this rod in time became broken up into short sections, a condition which adapted its possessor very much better to an active life in the water. The short sections, which became the vertebrae, enabled a lateral flex- ing motion of the body which could not be brought about so readily if there were only a stiff supporting rod in the back. This broken series of bones, forming the vertebral column, thus adapted the animal to its rapid motion in the water. Later, when the vertebrates emerged from the water and as- sumed a life on the land, the type of vertebras adapted to life in the water was no longer fitted for the condition in which the animal now lived. The vertebrae were still retained, but they acquired new connections with each other, a greater solidity and a greater rigidity, so that the spinal column could now support the body in the air. Further development of the land animals into the birds was characterized by a further change in the form of the vertebrae, which adapted the animal to life in the air, and, moreover, the vertebrae were changed in another fashion in the mammals which lived on the land. In all of these series of changes, from the original unbroken rod of the back in paleozoic times, to the complicated spinal column of the mam- mal, we see a successive series of adaptations. The study of fos- sils has made it possible to trace this series of changes in detail, and our paleontologists have quite accurately pictured for us the succession of changes that has produced this long series of race variations, bringing about an adaptation of the race, first to one condition of life and then to another, and finally ending 348 BIOLOGY in the excellently adapted internal skeleton which the higher vertebrates possess to-day. All of this can be followed out in the study of fossils, and it represents only one of the many series of evolutionary changes which have occurred in the history of animals, adapting the race little by little to new conditions, or better adapting them to older ones. Forces Producing Race Adaptation. — While biology has not yet reached a point where it considers itself capable of explaining- all of the marvelous phenomena of adaptation, some of the laws that have been concerned in the production of the phenomena are fairly well understood. A primary one seems to be the law of natural selection, first exploited by Charles Darwin. This law and its action will be considered on a later page. THE THEORY OF EVOLUTION The divergence of animals and plants from common centers to produce the diversified world of to-day has been generally known under the phrase, the theory of evolution, or the theory of organic descent. The term "e volution" has a very much wider application than that which has just been given to it, since in its philosophical import it involves much more than the problem of the origin of species of animals and plants. The general theory of evolution includes the conception of the orderly development of the whole universe, by a system of natural law and force, and assumes that the origin of the world from the original nebulous mass has been, from the beginning, due to the unfolding of natural law. With the philosophical aspects of the theory we are not here concerned; but the phase of the theory that concerns the origin of modern animals and plants is one of the fundamental factors of modern biological thought. Indeed, it may be stated that modern biology did not have any real existence until, under the influence of the writings of Charles Darwin, the conception of the origin of species from common types began to be studied. The idea which has been expressed above, that the adaptation ORIGIN OF THE LIVING MACHINE: ADAPTATION 349 of organisms to their environment has been a matter of growth, is the result of the thought of the last half-century. Previous to the middle of the last century it had been assumed that or- ganisms transmitted their characters so accurately to their off- spring that they had continued from the beginning unchanged, and that species were immutable. The immutability of species (Lat. im = not + mutabilis = changing) had been assumed as the foundation stone of biological science, and all conceptions of nature had been based upon the idea that organisms breed strictly according to their type, without change, other than slight fluctuations back and forth from a center, and without permanent modification. The conception which we have as- sumed above — that not only are all organisms constantly undergoing individual variations, but that races are going through a gradual series of permanent changes, resulting in the appearance of new forms with successive ages — was quite revolutionary in thought. The belief that species were not immutable, but were constantly being transformed into new species by the ordinary processes of descent, changed the whole aspect of our attitude toward nature. During the fifty years after this conception was presented to the world for discussion, it was subjected to most hostile criticism and most bitter dis- pute. The objections have now, however, mainly disappeared, and it has become to-day one of the accepted doctrines of science that species are constantly undergoing changes, and that our present species have descended from older ones and will in turn develop into others. To understand and appreciate this modern conception, it is necessary to survey briefly the development of the idea and the fundamental facts that lie underneath it. In this review we will make reference only to that phase of the great theory of evolution that has to do with the origin of modern species, or to organic evolution, as it is commonly termed. Early Views. — We can trace a beginning of the idea of evo- lution back to the scientists and philosophers before Christ. Aristotle, nearly four centuries before Christ, recognized in a 350 BIOLOGY vague way the idea of a gradual succession of higher and higher forms of existence; and several other early philosophers specu- lated concerning the origin of living things upon the earth accord- ing to general processes of development. But these earlier ideas were soon lost sight of and it was not until the seventeenth century that any more modern ideas of the development of animals from each other were advanced. During all of these centuries, and indeed until about the middle of the nineteenth century, so far as the subject was thought of at all, the view generally accepted was that each different kind of animal and plant was an independent creation. This view crystallized into the special creation theory in the writings of John Ray in 1725, and became the generally accepted view of all scientists. Dur- ing the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, however, several philosophers expressed, in their writings, ideas approximating the belief that living things do not remain forever constant, but are ever going through the series of changes that we have al- ready described as race divergence. Among those whose writ- ings tended in this direction may be mentioned Kant, Goethe, Leibnitz, Erasmus Darwin, and others. With the beginning of the nineteenth century these conceptions began to take a more definite shape. Lamarck. — Lamarck was a French naturalist, living in about the beginning of the nineteenth century, and was well versed in botany and zoology. He formulated a clearly defined doctrine of descent, and was the first of the modern scientists who had any conception of the theory of evolution. Lamarck believed that the fossils found in the rocks were the ancestors of animals living to-day, and that the organisms of the present world have been derived by descent from those that lived in previous years. The changes that had taken place in their structure he believed to have been slow and gradual, but contin- uous, and produced by a variety of causes which he specified, and which have received the name of Lamarckian factors. The chief of these causes were the following: — ORIGIN OF THE LIVING MACHINE: ADAPTATION 351 1. The direct effect of the environment acting upon animals and plants, modifying them, generation after generation. 2. New physical needs, necessitating new conditions of life; these new conditions producing changes in the animals them- selves. 3. Use and disuse. — It is a well-known fact that the use of any organ causes it to increase, and the failure to use it causes it to decrease in size and in efficiency. Lamarck supposed that the arms of birds became wings through continued use in this direction, and that the hind legs of snakes were lost because they were not used. This has been the most universally recog- nized of the Lamarckian factors. 4. The transmission of these acquired characters to posterity. Lamarck assumed, as everyone else assumed in his day, that any characteristics possessed by an animal or a plant might be transferred to its offspring. Hence any of the changes produced by the environment, by new physical needs, or by use and disuse, would be transmitted to the offspring, and, therefore, the next generation would have the body modified by the habit and environment in which the first generation lived. This would result in a constant modification of organisms, producing evolu- tion. There were certain other factors in Lamarck's conception which, though really part of the original theory, are not com- monly included under the term of Lamarckian factors. One of these was cross breeding, i. e., breeding together of individuals of different varieties, or perhaps even of different species, the result being an offspring different from either parent. A second was isolation, a suggestion that certain individuals became separated from the rest, and they and their offspring, being obliged to breed together, produced types in an isolated locality, which developed along lines different from those taken by other members of the same species in other parts of the world. Although these Lamarckian factors are several in number, it will be seen that there is one common phase. In all it is 352 BIOLOGY assumed that diversities produced in individuals as the result of the action of the environment, or of their own habits, i. e., acquired variations, are transmitted to subsequent generations, and serve as the basis of the changes which produce race varia- tions and evolution. Our study of heredity has shown that such variations, according to our present knowledge, are almost certainly not transmitted to subsequent generations. It is evident that the very foundation of the Lamarckian theory can- not stand, if the modern conception of heredity is accepted. Lamarck's views were not accepted in his day. This was partly because the great French naturalist, Cuvier, one of the greatest naturalists that ever lived, opposed them strongly; and partly because the scientific world was not at that time ready to accept any such natural explanation of the origin of organisms as that suggested by Lamarck. They were, therefore, practically forgotten for a period of fifty years, during which time the idea that organisms had appeared by the process of descent had practically no followers, special creation of each species to fit its environment being the generally accepted view. A new era of thought was inaugurated in the middle of the nineteenth century by Chalmers, Spencer, and especially in 1859, by Charles Darwin. Charles Darwin. — Charles Darwin was the grandson of Erasmus Darwin, already mentioned. In 1859 he published a book, the result of twenty years' work, entitled "The Origin of Species," which produced a revolution in thought, not only in science but also in philosophy. Darwin accepted the idea of the origin of modern organisms from earlier ones by a process of direct descent, recognizing that divergence of type from com- mon centers has been the law of historical development of ani- mals and plants. To this extent, therefore, Darwin followed Lamarck and the early speculators concerning the origin of animals. Darwin's method of explaining this descent was totally different from that of Lamarck, and much more in ac- cordance with facts that could be demonstrated. According to ORIGIN OF THE LIVING MACHINE: ADAPTATION 353 Darwin, the method by which new forms were produced was by the law of natural selection. Very briefly stated, that law is as follows : — 1. Overproduction. — All animals and plants tend to multiply more rapidly than it is possible for them to continue to exist. More offspring are produced by even the slowest breeding ani- mals and plants than can possibly find sustenance in the world. 2. Struggle for existence. — As the result of overproduction, the individuals that are born are engaged in a constant struggle with each other for the opportunity to live. This struggle is sometimes an active and sometimes a passive one; and sometimes it is a struggle with each other for food. It is a struggle in which only the victors remain alive, the vanquished being exterminated without living long enough to leave offspring. 3. Variation, or diversity. — All animals and plants show a large amount of diversity among themselves, and, as a result, some must be better fitted for the struggle for life than others. 4. Natural selection, or the survival of the fittest. — It is a logical result of the struggle for existence that only those individuals best fitted for the struggle will be the ones, in the long run, to win in the contest. Hence the "fittest" in the long run will survive, while those less fitted to exist will be exterminated in the merciless struggle for existence. 5. Heredity. — By the law of heredity, individuals transmit to their offspring their own characters. Hence if one individual survives the struggle for existence by virtue of some special characteristic, it will transmit this characteristic to its offspring. The offspring will inherit it, and in the course of a few genera- tions the only individuals left alive will be those that have developed the favorable characteristic in question, while those that did not develop it will be exterminated by the law of natural selection. As the result of these five factors working together, Darwin supposed that there would be a constant accumulation of favor- able characters, each generation being to a slight extent an 354 BIOLOGY advance over the last. The struggle for existence and the sur- vival of the fittest are repeated generation after generation, and in each successive generation the only members to survive will be those with qualities that make them better able to contend in the struggle for existence than their rivals. Hence every individual character which gives its possessor any slight advan- tage over its rival will be sufficient to enable its possessors to survive the struggle for existence, by bringing about the exter- mination of the less fortunate individuals that did not have the favorable character in question. This character will be trans- mitted to subsequent generations, when the struggle will be repeated again, and once more the best characters of the next generation will be selected. As this goes on without cessation age after age, there will be a constant accumula- tion of favorable characters, and thus the race will in general constantly advance. Natural Selection and Adaptation. — This law of natural selection is especially well fitted to explain the marvelous adap- tations of organisms to their environment. Since the different members of any species of animals or plants are not alike, it will follow that at any period in the history of a race, some indi- viduals will be more closely adapted to their environment than others. Since there is always an overproduction of individuals, so that many more are born than can live, it will follow that the individuals best adapted to their environment will be the ones that will survive, while those less adapted to the conditions of life will be the ones to be exterminated in the struggle for exist- ence. Hence it will follow that at the close of any generation the individuals left alive will be those that have the most favor- able adaptation to environment. These will necessarily be the parents of the following generations, and, by the law of heredity, the next generation will inherit the characteristics of these parents and will be, on the average, a little better adapted to the environment than the last generation. If this process is repeated generation after generation, it will follow that each generation ORIGIN OF THE LIVING MACHINE: ADAPTATION 355 will be slightly better adapted than the last. By an accumula- tion of the improvements which thus appear accidentally, there will be developed, as the generations pass, a closer and closer adaptation to conditions. The final result is a better adaptation to conditions, and a gradual change of type and production of new species. Acquired and Congenital Characters Affecting Natural Selection. — In the form stated above, and as at first conceived by Darwin, the characters which are chosen by natural selection, and upon which the advance of the race is based, might be either acquired characters, such as those upon which Lamarck based his theory, or they might be congenital characters, which are in the germ plasm and essentially due to variation in the heredi- tary substance. Darwin did not sharply separate these two types of variation, although he recognized them both. Dar- win thought that the advancement of type was produced prima- rily by the natural selection of such characters as were born with the individual, i. e., congenital characters. He also believed that, to a certain extent, acquired characters, which were pro- duced in the animal either by the direct effect of the environ- ment or by use or disuse, could be transmitted and might thus affect posterity and have an influence in changing the type. Darwin did not believe, as did Lamarck, that these acquired characters were the primary factors in producing divergence of type, but thought they might be secondary ones, the primary factor being the selection of most favorable congenital varia- tions. Weismann. — The discussion of Darwin's theories continued vigorously for a quarter of a century, until his views of descent were quite generally accepted, although with various opinions as to the efficiency of his law of natural selection. In 1884 appeared the essay L* Weismann "On Heredity," which put a totally new aspect on the whole problem. His theory of hered- ity, already described, was so simple, and so readily obtained confirmation by direct observation, that it soon acquired almost 356 BIOLOGY universal acceptance. With the acceptance of Weismann's theory, it was no longer possible to look upon acquired characters as transmitted to posterity. As a result, the Lamarckian factors were of necessity thrown overboard, since they all involved the inheritance of acquired characters. It was no longer possible to believe that the direct effect of the environ- ment upon the individual, or the effect of the disuse of organs, could have any influence upon posterity; and as rapidly as Weismann's theory of heredity received acceptance the so-called Lamarckian factors were discarded, until to-day they are not generally regarded as factors in producing race variation. The adherents of Weismann have thought that the only possible factor left to produce evolution was the natural selection of the congenital variation. Congenital variations, since they are due to variations in the germ plasm, will be transmitted; and the natural selection of these congenital variations will remain as the great factor in the development of type. Indeed, the fol- lowers of Weismann took this extreme view and held, and still hold, that the only factor which has produced race evolution has been the natural selection of those characters which start as variations in the germ substance. But the dispute between the followers of Lamarck's older views and Weismann's new views has never yet been positively settled. Some naturalists accept Weismann's views in toto; others have not regarded them as sufficiently well demonstrated; while quite a number of prom- inent biologists, including Spencer, Packard, Cope, and others, have held to a modern form of Lamarck's views, believing that in some way, and under some circumstances, acquired characters might have influence upon the offspring and therefore might direct the line of race divergence. The question has not been definitely settled; but at the present time the balance of evidence seems to be against believing that acquired characters are trans- mitted, and therefore against the retention of any of the so-called Lamarckian factors, that are based upon the direct action of the environment upon the individual. ORIGIN OF THE LIVING MACHINE: ADAPTATION 357 The Mutation Theory. — One of the essential factors of the Darwinian theory was that the change of species was produced by the selection of minute diversities, such as the slight differ- ences found among animals and plants of the same species. It was argued by Darwin that in the struggle for existence, when the majority must be exterminated that the few may live, even the slightest differences in structure, shape, body, color, or habits would be sufficient to determine the question of life or death. If these slight differences could accumulate, generation after generation, they would in time become great; and thus, accord- ing to Darwin, the great differences between type were produced by the accumulation and heaping up of minute variations. To many of the more recent students of this subject it has not seemed plausible that such minute differences could accomplish all that Darwin claimed for them. Many objections to Darwin's ideas on this line have been expressed, and have finally found voice in a more recent conception of the conditions which have produced the evolution of the living world. This new idea is the mutation theory (Lat. mutare = to change), and is commonly associated with the Dutch naturalist, DeVries, although a num- ber of others have shared in its origin and development. DeVries based his views upon observations made in a field of primroses, where he kept thousands of individuals under observation. As the result of these observations, he came to the conclusion that new types of plants are appearing constantly in nature; but that they do not arise, as Darwin had supposed, by the accu- mulation of little changes one generation after another, but suddenly, and, as a rule, in single steps. In his field of primroses, growing side by side, he found several distinct types, abso- lutely different from each other and with no intermediate steps between them. They came, not as the result of the ac- cumulation of little steps, but suddenly, in a single generation. Moreover, by isolating and experimenting with them, he found that the new characters, which had thus appeared, bred true, i. e.y remained fixed m the race. BIOLOGY lack From this series of observations, extended in other directions by many other observers, has been developed the theory of mutation. This theory is, in essence, that new characters do not, as a rule, appear simply as slight diversities found between different individuals of the same species, but as characters of considerable extent at a single birth. New features of the race are thus sudden in their origin instead of gradual, as had been supposed by Darwin and also by Lamarck. According to this theory there are two types of variation among organisms: 1. Individual variations, spoken of above as the diversities which are shown between different individuals, and which come and go in a haphazard fashion, having no part to play in the change of the race. These may be ac- quired characters; at all events they are not impressed upon the germ plasm. 2. Mutations, which probably start with the germ plasm; Fig. 144. These varia- tions may be large or small, but whenever they appear they are at once fixed in the race. Inasmuch as they are part of the germ substance, they will be handed on to the next gener- ation and remain, therefore, as a permanent inheritance of the race. According to the mutation theory, these sudden large changes have brought about the race divergence. The theory of mutation, therefore, abandons Darwin's idea of the accumu- lation of the minute diversities, and replaces it with the idea that the steps in evolution may be larger and may be taken sud- denly. It is, of course, evident that this new conception of muta- tion is perfectly consistent with Weismann's view of heredity. Red BY THE FIG. 144. — MUTATIONS SHOWN BEETLE LEPTINOTARSA A and C are mutants from the original form B. The actual differences are greater than appears in these fig- ures because of great differences in color. (Tower.) ORIGIN OF THE LIVING MACHINE: ADAPTATION 359 Mendel's Law. — Accompanying the development of the the- ory of mutation, there has been brought prominently to view a somewhat new view of the laws of heredity, perfectly consistent with Weismann's theory, but explaining its method of action. Darwin in his discussion assumed that the offspring of two parents, since it could not be like both, would, in general, be halfway between the two. Even the slightest familiarity with the laws of heredity is enough to show that organisms inherit from both parents, and it has generally been assumed that they inherit, or may inherit, equally from both. It is, however, manifestly untrue that the offspring is always midway between its father and mother, inheriting equally characters from each. The laws of heredity are much more complex than this, for it frequently appears that an organism inherits mostly from one parent, the characteristics of the other hardly- reappearing in the offspring. An attempt to bring some of these facts into a general law has resulted in what is called Mendel's law of heredity. Mendel published the result of his work originally in 1866, but it attracted no special attention for nearly forty years, when it was revived by modern students in 1900. Since that time it has been subjected to extensive experiment, and has produced results of very great practical value in controlling and directing breeding experiments with animals and plants. Mendel's law is somewhat complex and difficult to understand, but the essential features of it -are as follows : — Unit characters. — It is an assumption of Mendel's law that, in many cases at least, different characters of animals are unit characters. By this term is meant that those characteristics are handed to the offspring as single units, which are inherited by the offspring in toto or not inherited at all. They cannot be halved or reduced in total characteristics. In other words, if the offspring inherits one of these unit characters, it inherits it in full. Even though the offspring should come from two parents, one of whom possessed the character in question, while the other did not, the offspring would either inherit it as a whole 360 BIOLOGY or not at all. For example, two varieties of peas are known, one of which has short pods and the other long pods. If they are crossed the offspring are either short-podded or long-podded, but not midway between the two. Very many other characters have been tested out experimentally and found in the same way to be inherited as unit characters. Dominant and recessive characters. — Mendel's law further points out that some of these unit characters are much more likely to reappear in the offspring than others. It frequently happens that of two opposite characters, one is much more likely to appear in the next generation than the other. Those that are most likely to reappear are called, in this terminology, dominant (Lat. dominari = to rule), while other characters that are more likely to disappear in the first generation, are called recessive (Lat. recessus = receding). These recessive characters, even though they do not appear in the first generation of off- spring, are not necessarily lost. The offspring may contain within its body the germs of these characters, but they may remain dormant, not appearing at all in the first generation. In subsequent generations these recessive characters may re- appear; thus recessive characters, which are present in one gen- eration, may disappear in a following generation, to reappear subsequently in the later generations. Law of inheritance. — The specially valuable contribution of Mendelism is the formulation of a law in accordance with which these dominant and recessive characters reappear in subsequent generations. That law is briefly as follows : When we cross with each other two individuals, one of which has a dominant char- acter, while the other has its opposite as a recessive character, all of the offspring in the first generation show the dominant characteristics. But although showing only the dominant characters they actually contain a mixture of dominant and recessive characters. This is shown by the fact that if these individuals now are bred together, in the next generation, which we will call the second generation, only three-fourths of the off- ORIGIN OF THE LIVING MACHINE: ADAPTATION 361 spring will show the dominant character, while one-fourth will show the recessive character. If now the individuals show- ing this recessive character are bred with each other, all their offspring will show the recessive character, the dominant char- acter having totally disappeared from them, never to occur again in any subsequent generation. This race is then a pure recessive type, from which all of the dominant characteristics have been eliminated. All of the other three-fourths of the second generation show the dominant character only. But tests, similar to the above, prove that only one of these is purely dominant. The other two-fourths, although in them the dominant character only is evident, are really mixed, con- taining both dominant and recessive characters. This is shown by the fact that if they are crossed, three-fourths of their off- spring will again show the dominant character and one-fourth will show the recessive character. This process may then be re- peated indefinitely. An illustration may make this clearer. Among mice the color gray is dominant, while the color white is recessive. If white and gray mice are bred together, the first generation of offspring will be all gray. If these gray animals are now bred together, in the second generation three-fourths of the offspring will be gray but one fourth will be white. If these white animals are bred together, their offspring will all be white and will continue to breed white offspring indefinitely, no gray mice ever subse- quently appearing in their progeny. They constitute a pure white race. If the other three-fourths, which are gray, are bred together, one of the three-fourths will continue indefinitely to produce gray offspring, no white ones appearing. In these the white characteristic has been eliminated entirely, and they form a pure gray race. But the other two-fourths, when bred to- gether, prove to contain both white and gray characters, and among their offspring one-fourth will show the white fur and the other three-fourths the gray fur. If again tested in the same way, the white animals will be found to produce pure races of 362 BIOLOGY white with no mixture of gray fur; one of the other fourths will be found to be pure gray races with no mixture of white, and the other two-fourths will again prove to be a mixed race con- taining both white and gray characters. This process may then go on indefinitely. The further details of this law are too complicated to be fol- lowed out in this place, but from the law it is possible to calcu- late approximately how many of the offspring at each generation will show recessive, and how many dominant characters. This law has been of great value in directing breeding experiments, and breeders who are trying to produce new varieties of animals and plants find the law extremely useful in controlling their ex- I HT iments toward definite ends. Mendel's law has thus shown that the inheritance by the offspring of the characters of the parents is not a pure matter of chance, but is controlled by definite laws. While we do not yet fully understand these laws, the fact that some of them have been discovered gives promise that we may, in time, be able to control the process of inheritance far more accurately than hitherto. It is not believed by those who have worked on Mendel's law that all characteristics of organisms are thus unit charac- ters and are transmitted in toto or not at all. Some characters appear to blend, as for example the cross between the white race and the negro, the offspring of such crossing being neither white nor black but mulattoes, a mixture midway between the parents. Hence the color of the human skin is probably not like the white and gray color in mice, a character transmitted by the law of Mendel. This law of Mendel has, however, been a great contribution to science in showing that large numbers of characters or organisms are unit characters, and are trans- mitted according to definite laws that may be clearly formu- lated. We may say, in concluding the general subject, that modern biological science recognizes the principle that race divergence has been the law of life, and that the evolution of modern types ORIGIN OF THE LIVING MACHINE: ADAPTATION 363 from earlier ones by descent has been the method by which the present world was produced. Further, the laws formulated by Darwin, DeVries, and Mendel, together with Weismann's theory of heredity, all fit together to explain the method of this evolu- tion. New variations have appeared suddenly, at least in many cases, as germ variations (mutations) , and then have been trans- mitted to the offspring as unit characters by Mendel's law, some of the offspring receiving the new characters, while others do not; but if inherited they are inherited as unit characters. Next, the law of natural selection comes in and selects those indi- viduals which have received useful mutations. Selection then "fixes them" in the race by eliminating individuals with char- acters less useful than those possessed by the survivors. As a result of all these factors working together the race advances. CHAPTER XIX CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION EVEN the slightest familiarity with organisms will disclose striking similarities between some forms and great differences between others. The frog is clearly quite like the lizard and much like other vertebrates, but very unlike the earthworm. These points of likeness are the basis upon which organisms are classified. il mt tar FIG. 145. — THE SKELETON OP A RABBIT c, carpals; /, fibula ; fe, femur; h, humerus; il, ilium; is, ischium; me, metacarpals; mt, metatarsals; pu, pubis; tar, tarsala; r, radius; sc, scapula; at, sternum; t, tibia; u, ulna. Homology. — The likeness between organisms is of two general types. The first is likeness in structure, which is called homology (Gr. homos = like + logos = ratio) . It is frequently found that 364 CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION 365 animals which appear quite unlike are really built upon the same plan of structure, differing only in the manner that the plan is carried out. For example, the frog possesses a spinal column made of vertebrae, and two pairs of legs attached to the body by girdles, each containing a certain number of bones. The rabbit (Fig. 145) has a skeleton based upon the same type. It also possesses a spinal column made of vertebra, with two pairs of appendages attached by girdles to the axis of the body; and each appendage is made up of bones which can be compared, bone by bone, with those in the appendages of the frog. If Figure 145 is compared with Figure 88, this similarity can be seen and fol- lowed out in very close detail, nearly all of the bones of the frog being represented in the skeleton of the rabbit. This similarity is found in spite of the fact that the two animals are so unlike in general appearance and in habits. One lives in the water and uses its legs for swimming and hopping; the other lives on the land, using its legs for support. But although .£, ,.«. built for different pur- poses, the skeleton of these two animals is evidently based upon the same plan. Figure 146 shows another ex- ample of similarity in structure representing the hand of man, C, and the corresponding fore foot of four other animals. Although the hand of man is used for a totally different purpose from that of the fore legs of the horse, the ox, or any of the other animals represented, it is evident that they are built upon the same plan of structure. In each there are a radius and ulna, and a series of wrist and finger bones. There are differences, it is true: while The skeleton of the hand of man, C; and the fore feet of a horse, A; a rhinoceros, B; a pig, D; and an ox,E. r, radius ; u, ulna. The other bones are not named but may be easily compared. 366 BIOLOGY man has five fingers represented, the others have lost some of these fingers, and one of them, the horse, A, has left but a single finger with the rudiments of two others. That these other fingers have been lost has been proved by the study of the paleontology of these animals; for by tracing back their his- tory through fossils it is found that the ancestors of the horse had at first five fingers, with a type of hand similar to that of man; later they had three and finally only one finger. This similarity in the structure be- tween the frog and the higher animals is shown in other parts of the body besides the bone. Figure 147 represents a section through the body of a cat, giv- ing a diagrammatic represen- tation of the relation of the organs in the upper part of the body. This can be com- pared directly with the anat- omy of the same region of the body of the frog, and while there are many differences in detail, the general structure is evidently the same. The spi- nal cord with the brain is found on the dorsal surface of both animals; the mouth, nostrils, larynx, lungs, and oesophagus are, in essential features, iden- tical. Thus it is evident from these comparisons that the di FlG. 147. — A MEDIAN VERTICAL SECTION OF A CAT, SHOWING DIAGRAMMATICALLY THE RELA- TIONS OF THE ORGANS cb, cerebellum ; cr, cerebrum ; hy, hyoid; Ix, larynx; oe, oesophagus; sp, spinal cord; st, sternum; th, thyroid gland : tr, trachea. CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION 367 frog, the cat, and the rabbit are built upon the same general plan, which is carried out in different ways in different cases. In other words, we have in these animals a like- ness of structure quite independent of differen- ces in the general pur- poses for which the vari- ous parts of the body are used. A comparison of Figure 97 with Figure 148, representing the eyes, respectively, of the frog and of man, will show that this similarity is carried out in the de- tails of structure, even of the smaller parts. Al- though differing in some minor points, it will be easy to trace in the eye of the frog the same parts that are present in the human eye. It is perfectly clear that these two organs are based upon the same plan and are identically planned structures. Such similarities in structure are not by any means confined to animals with a bony skeleton, but may be found among all groups of animals. Figure 149 represents a worm, which, by comparison with the figures of the earthworm in Chapter VIII, shows a similar structure in spite of differences in detail. The earthworm bears at first sight little resemblance to the worm shown in Figure 149, the latter having external tentacles and gills, neither of which is found in the earthworm. But it will be seen that both are made up of a series of similar segments, and that in general shape they are the same. If their internal anatomy is compared, both are found to have a similar alimen- FlG. 148. A VERTICAL SECTION OF THE HUMAN EYE 0, aqueous humor; m, muscle; ch, choroid; r, retina; co, cornea; sc, sclerotic; 1, crystalline lens; si, suspensory ligament; v, vitreous humor. 368 BIOLOGY tary canal, similar circulatory, nervous, and excretory systems, and all other parts of their anatomy are essentially alike. Such a likeness in struc- ture is sometimes found in quite unex- pected places. One would hardly expect, for example, that the arm of man, the fore leg of a horse, the wing of a bird, the fore leg of a frog and the fin of a fish would be identical structures, since they FIG. 149.— A SEGMENTED WORM RELATED TO viuysomuchinshape THE EARTHWORM, BUT HAVING TENTACLES and function; but AND GILLS they are all found to be homologous. Analogy. — A second type of likeness is. similarity in function, irrespective of structure. It not infrequently happens that dif- ferent animals develop organs of similar functions but of totally different structure. In this case they are said to be analogous (Gr. ana = according to + logos = ratio) but not homologous. For example, the butterfly and the bird have both developed wings for flying, and their wings are hence analo- gous. They are of similar shape and are used mucb in the same way; but the wing of the bird is made of bones, muscles, nerves, and feathers, while the wing of the butterfly has none of these parts, being simply an outgrowth of the skin containing air tubes. It is not homologous with the bird's wing, in spite of similarity in shape and function. The wing of the bird is, how- ever, both analogous and homologous with the wing of the bat, since both are used for similar purposes and both are made of similar bones and muscles, nerves and blood vessels. As another CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION 369 example of analogous organs, may be mentioned the teeth in the mouth of vertebrates and the peculiar teeth found inside the stomach of the lobster. These organs are both used for grinding food; but they are not homologous organs, since their structure is so different. The teeth are bony organs arising from the bones of the skull, which are themselves developed from the mesoderm of the embryo; the teeth of the lobster are of horny texture, and are developed from the ectoderm of the em- bryo which is folded inward to line the stomach. Numerous other examples of analogous organs might be given, for it frequently happens that different animals use for the same pur- pose organs that have quite a different origin and structure. Explanation of Homology and Analogy. — Analogous organs sometimes show much similarity, as in the shape of the wings of the bird and butterfly, and sometimes very little. When they do show a likeness it is explained by the fact that similar necessities of life have forced the development of similar struc- ture. For example, both the vertebrates and the lobster are obliged to masticate their food, and both have consequently developed hard cutting and grinding surfaces for the purpose. There is, therefore, some similarity in the form of the organs; but there is no necessity for similarity in structure, and in the two cases different parts of the body have been utilized for the purpose. The likeness between homologous organs, however, requires a very different explanation, because here we find a similarity in structure in spite of differences in function. We cannot explain the similarity in structure by any similarity of conditions. Although the wing of the bird and the arm of man are adapted to wholly different functions and have developed different shapes and motions, they are, in spite of this difference, formed upon the same plan, with an identical structure. The explanation must be something more fundamental than mere similarity in use. Naturalists to-day account for likeness in homologous organs by the theory of descent, saying that two animals with homologous 370 BIOLOGY organs owe their likeness to the fact that they have descended from a common ancestor possessing such an organ. The bird, the dog, and the monkey show homology in the wing, fore leg, and arm, because they have descended from a common ancestor, whose fore appendage possessed a certain series of bones and muscles, and, therefore, all its descendants have, by inheritance, retained these same bones and muscles. The differences between the members in question have been brought about by the fact that they were used for different purposes, and thus were slowly modified in shape, although they still retained a fundamental likeness in structure. CLASSIFICATION (TAXONOMY) Individuals. — As we look upon nature to-day, we find only individual organisms, each isolated from all others, and allied only with its parents. But the most superficial examination shows that some individuals have resemblances to each other, while others are very unlike; and it is evident that organisms can be arranged in groups showing more or less likeness to one another. Such a grouping is called classification. The general plan of such classification into groups is as follows: — Species. — When we find a large number of individuals re- sembling one another so closely as to be practically identical, we speak of them as belonging to a single species. For example, the common dandelion, which is widely distributed over the world, is made up of countless numbers of individuals; but they are essentially alike, in root, in stem, in leaf, in flower. We therefore speak of them all as constituting a single species, So too is the horse a distinct species, and the ass another. To give a definition of just what is meant by species is impossible, since no one knows just what is meant, and the word perhaps does not always have the same meaning. That the individuals of a species are not always exactly alike is evident from facts already mentioned concerning the great variations among dif- ferent pigeons and dogs. Such great variations as those pre- CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION 371 viously mentioned among dogs are very exceptional, for as a rule the members of the same species are closely alike. Just what biologists mean by species, and just what line they would draw to separate two species from each other, cannot be stated. It is quite impossible to say how unlike two animals must be to constitute two species, since sometimes, as with pigeons, members of the same species may be very unlike, while in other cases, as with sparrows, animals belonging to different species are very closely similar. It has been quite common to regard all animals that can breed together and pro- duce fertile offspring, as belonging to the same species. But this is not an accurate definition of the term, for there are many animals, so different from each other that they certainly deserve to be ranked as different species, but which can breed together. Nor can we get any idea as to the meaning of the term "species" by studying the number of similar individuals. Some species are composed of an immense number of individuals, as in the case of the dandelion; while other species comprise very few animals, sometimes only one or two having been found. Sometimes, too, the organisms belonging to the same species show a number of sub-groups, and the biologist calls them sub-species, or varieties. All of these facts show that no naturalist can at the present time exactly define the term "species," or state definitely how species may be separated from each other. When we recognize that new types are constantly arising from old ones by the process of divergence, it will be seen that we could not always expect to draw sharp lines separating the new and the old types that have arisen from a common center. But although naturalists are not able to define the term accurately, or separate the species strictly from each other, species are always recognized and form the starting point for classification. Genera. — A little study shows at once that some species have a much greater resemblance to each other than they do to others. For example, naturalists recognize the domestic cat as constitut- ing one species, and the wild cat as a second. But it is quite 372 BIOLOGY clear that the wild cat and domestic cat show greater resemblances to each other than they do to tigers, dogs, or wolves. Moreover, it is evident to anyone in the slightest degree familiar with ani- mals, that lions, tigers, leopards, wild cats, and domestic cats, although unlike each other, and recognized by naturalists as belonging to different species, have many points of resemblance to each other. They have the same general stealthy habits, the same kind of toes and feet, and they are much more closely allied to each other than any one of them is allied to the dog or the wolf. Naturalists, therefore, group all of these species together under one group which they call a genus (pi. genera). In naming any species, two names are commonly used, the first of which is the name of the genus, the second that of the species. For example, Felis is the name given to the whole genus of cats. Felis domestica is the domestic cat; Felis leo is the lion; Felis bengalis, the bengal tiger; Felis canadensis, the Ca- nadian lynx, etc. So, too, Viola is the genus name of all the violets; Viola blanda, of the white violet; Viola cucullata, of the common blue violet, etc. If the species should happen to have more than one variety or sub-species, a third name may sometimes be added to indicate the particular variety of the species. As a rule, however, two names only are used. Families. — Extending observation a little farther, it becomes evident that many genera show close resemblances which mark them off distinctly from other animals. As a result, naturalists group genera together into a larger group, which they call a family. A family sometimes may contain only a single genus; it may contain two or three or a large number of genera. Orders. — In the same way, families are grouped together to form larger groups, which are called orders. For example, the various cats already considered have certain points in common with the dogs, wolves, bears, seals, and walruses. In all of these cases the teeth are especially adapted for cutting flesh, and the animals are flesh eaters. There are very many genera among CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION 373 them, and a number of different families; but all agree in the living upon flesh, and all show certain points of likeness in the structure of the feet and the skeleton, which place them in a group by themselves, distinct from animals that live upon vegetable foods. All of these flesh-eating animals are, therefore, grouped together into an order called the Carnivora. Classes. — In a similar way, different orders can be arranged in still larger groups. For example, although there are many points of difference between the carnivorous cat, the herbivorous buffalo, the gnawing rabbit, the flying bat, and the gigantic marine whale, still they all agree in one fundamental character. In all of these orders the females have mammary glands and nourish their young by means of milk, a characteristic which is totally lacking in fishes, reptiles, and birds. It is evident, therefore, that all of these milk-producing animals may prop- erly be classed together under one head. Such a group we then know as a class; in this particular case we name them the Mammalia. Phyla. — Extending our observations still farther, we find that all of the animals mentioned, together with fishes, reptiles, amphibia, and birds-, resemble each other in having bones, which none of the rest of the animal kingdom possesses. The insects, clams, etc., never have bones, but have other characteristics of their own. It is evident, therefore, that all animals possessing bones may be grouped together as distinct from other types. This produces a group that we know as a phylum or sub- kingdom. In this particular case we name the phylum the Vertebrata. Kingdoms. — Now if we sweep our glance over the whole organic world, we find that it is divided into two groups, the animals and the plants. These large groups we call the animal kingdom and the vegetable kingdom. Thus it is seen that the whole organic world is divided into kingdoms, phyla, classes, orders, families, genera, and species. Occasionally we recognize intermediate groups; for instance, 374 BIOLOGY between the family and the genera there are sometimes recog- nized what we call sub-families, between the classes and the orders we find sub-classes, etc. THE SIGNIFICANCE OF CLASSIFICATION Why should there be a classification? — As soon as we recognize the principle of divergence from type it becomes evi- dent that the classification of animals has a meaning. < 'l:i>sifi- cation means history, and if we could get a perfect classification we should have pictured the history of organisms. The first step in the development of the organisms of the world was the divergence of animals and plants from one another, thus form- ing the two kingdoms of plants and animals. Then the process was repeated in each kingdom, where there appeared a still further divergence, a number of different lines of descent start- ing from common centers, giving rise to the various sub-king- doms. Again each of these broke up into other lines of descent, and the smaller groups thus made their appearance. Thus types continued breaking up and branching out in various directions, giving rise to a classification which may be compared to a tree, the trunk being the original type of organisms, the vari- ous large branches representing the first lines of divergence from the original stock, while the numerous subordinate branches represent the successive types that appeared, by the same gen- eral law. The minute twigs at the end of the branches are the species of to-day, and they are aH connected by this line of descent with the original trunk. The classification of animals is the attempt to reconstruct this treelike arrangement of organisms according to their histori- cal relationship. The members of the same species are supposed to have had a common ancestor in a fairly recent period; the different species of the same genus had a common ancestor a little farther back in history; the different genera of the same family had a still earlier common ancestor; the families of the same order had their connecting point farther back still, and so CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION 375 on through the whole series, until we get back to the common starting point, or the common center from which all animals and plants diverge. Classification is thus an expression of history. The following is an outline of the classification of animals and plants. The classification accepted by science is ever under- going changes, as a more complete knowledge of relations is obtained, and the classification accepted to-day is different in many respects from that adopted a generation ago. In turn, the classification used to-day will doubtless be modified by future study, until it becomes practically perfect. But even though we recognize that it is not yet perfect, it is quite necessary to have such a classification in order to understand the living world. It must not be inferred that our present classification represents an accurate history of organisms. The classification that biologists are aiming at is a genetic one, i. e., one that repre- sents actual relationships, and to a considerable extent the classi- fication outlined below does represent such relationships. But the difficulties of determining the actual history of organisms have been so great as to seem in some respects almost insur- mountable. The classification of organisms given to-day rep- resents, therefore, only an attempt to express genetic relation- ships, and is recognized as being only in part successful. AN OUTLINE OF THE CLASSIFICATION OF THE LIVING WORLD THE PLANT KINGDOM: Phylum I. THALLOPHYTA: plants without distinction of root, stem, or branch. Sub-phylum 1. Algae: thallophytes possessing chlorophyll: including unicellular forms, pond weeds, seaweeds, etc. Class I. Diatomacece: the diatoms (Fig. 68 A). Class II. Cyanophycece: the blue-green algae (Fig. 68 C). Class III. Chlorophycece: the green algae (Fig. 30). Class IV. Phceophycece: the brown algae. Class V. Rhodophycece: the red algae. 376 BIOLOGY Sub-phylum 2. Fungi: thallophytes without chlorophyll : bac- teria, yeasts, molds, etc. Class I. Schizomycetes: the bacteria (Fig. 33). Class II. Saccharomycetes: the yeasts (Fig. 32). Class III. Phycomycetes: the alga-like fungi (Fig. 42). Class IV. Ascomycetes: the sac-fungi. Class V. Basidiomycetes: the basidio-fungi (Fig. 115). Phylum II. BRYOPHYTA: the moss-like plants. Class I. Hepaticce: the liverworts. Class II. Mustinece: the mosses. Phylum III. PTERIDOPHYTA: the ferns and their allies. Class I. Filicales: the true ferns (Fig. 124). Class II. Equisetales: the horse-tails. Class III. Lycopodiales: the club mosses. Phylum IV. SPERM ATOPHYTA: the seed-bearing plants. Sub-phylum 1. Gymnospermae : the cone-bearing plants, pines, hemlocks, etc. Sub-phylum 2. Angiospermse : flowering plants. Class I. Monocotyledons: endogenous plants. Class II. Dicotyledons: exogenous plants. THE ANIMAL KINGDOM: Division I. PROTOZOA: unicellular animals. Class I. Rhizopoda: animals with naked protoplasm and pseudopodia (Fig. 19). Class II. Infusoria: animals with cilia, flagella, or ten- tacles, and usually a mouth (Fig. 21). Class III. Sporozoa: parasitic animals, producing spores and having a metamorphosis (Fig. 25). CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION 377 Division II. METAZOA: many-celled animals with a differ- entiation of cells. Phylum I. PORIFERA: animals with no distinct mouth, but many incurrent openings : the sponges. Class I. Calcarea: with a skeleton of calcareous spicules. Class II. Non-calcarea: with a skeleton of silicious or horny spicules, or none. Phylum II. CCELENTERATA: animals with a mouth, but without an anus and with no body cavity. Class I. Hydrozoa (Fig. 69). Class II. Syphozoa: sea-nettles. Class III. Actinozoa: corals, anemones. Class IV. Ctenophora. Phylum III. ECHINODERMATA: radiate animals, with com- plete alimentary canal and a body cavity. Class I. Asterioidea: starfishes. Class II. Ophiuroidea: brittle stars. Class III. Echinoidea: sea-urchins. Class IV. Crinoidea: sea-lilies. Class V. Holothuroidea: sea-cucumbers. Phylum IV. PLATYHELMINTHES : flat, unsegmented worms. Class I. Cestoda: the tapeworms. Class II. Trematoda: the flukes. Class III. Turbellaria: the planarians. Phylum V. NEMATHELMINTHES : round, unsegmented worms: round worms, threadworms. Phylum VI. MOLLUSCOIDEA. Class I. Polyzoa: sea-mats, corallines. Class II. Brachiopoda: lamp-shells. 378 BIOLOGY Phylum VII. ANNULATA: the segmented worms. Class I. Chcetopoda: bristle-footed worms. Sub-class A, Polychceta; with many bristles (Fig. 149). Sub-class B, Oligochceta ; with few bristles (Fig. 74). Class II. Hirudinea: leaches. Class III. Archiannelida. Class IV. Gephyrea. Class V. Choetognatha. Phylum VIII. MOLLUSCA. Class I. Pelecypoda or Lamellibranchia: bivalves, clams oysters, mussels. Class II. Gasteropoda: univalves, snails. Class III. Amphineura: many-valved: chiton. Class IV. Cephalopoda: with long arms: squids, cuttle fishes. Phylum IX. ARTHROPODA: with jointed feet. Class I. Crustacea: crabs, lobsters, barnacles. Class II. Onychophora. Class III. Myriopoda: millipedes, centipedes. Class IV. Hexapoda: insects. Class V. Arachnida: spiders, scorpions, etc. Phylum X. CHORD ATA: animals with a notochord. Sub-phylum, Atriozoa : body cavity opening to the exterior. Class I. Urochorda: tunicates or sea-squirts. Class II. Cephalochorda: amphioxus. Sub-phylum, Vertebrate: animals with a vertebral column. Class. I. Pisces: fishes. Class II. Amphibia: frogs, toads, salamanders. Class III. Reptilia: lizards, snakes, turtles, alligators. Class IV. Aves: birds. Class V. Mammalia: mammals. CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION 379 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS IN SPACE AND TIME We have already seen that while organisms are always adapted to the locality in which they live, they are frequently even better fitted for other localities, and their presence in any part of the world must be due to other factors besides fitness. The distribution of organisms on the earth's surface is controlled by three fairly well-known laws:— 1 . The members of a species usually occupy a continuous terri- tory. We do not find some members of a species in one locality and others in a distant region, without finding them also in inter- mediate territory. There are some exceptions to this law, but in the vast majority of instances each species occupies a continu- ous territory around a center of origin. The territory occupied will depend upon many factors of climate, for of course the habitat must be properly fitted to furnish the organism with food, water, and a proper temperature. 2. All animals and plants can multiply with a rapidity suf- ficient to give them, in a comparatively short time, enough off- spring to cover the face of the earth. The rate of multiplication of different organisms varies very greatly. The codfish may pro- duce 8,000,000 eggs per year, while the elephant produces only a single offspring in two years, and usually not so frequently as that. Among the lower animals and plants, the rate of reproduction is sometimes even greater than the higher num- ber given above. But even the slow rate of the elephant is sufficient, if the multiplication were unchecked, to enable the species to fill the world in a few years. The numerous offspring are always endeavoring to find room for themselves, and food to eat. For this purpose they distribute themselves as widely as possible. 3. All organisms distribute themselves from the centers, where their reproduction is rapid. All organisms, even those that seem stationary, have some method of dispersing themselves over the earth. The means of dispersal are chiefly the follow- ing: 1. By independent migration. This is true of almost all 380 BIOLOGY animals, but it is not true of plants, which, as a rule, have no independent power of motion. 2. By winds. Many plants produce seeds or spores which can be blown for long distances by the wind, until they land in a favorable locality, where they can develop into new plants. This dispersal by the wind is not so common among animals, although some of the lighter animals which fly, like the insects and bats, may be blown for long distances by the wind. 3. By water currents. The ocean currents and fresh-water streams carry many animals and plants long distances. The Gulf Stream carries living organisms across the Atlantic Ocean, and a river flowing through a country may distribute seeds for hundreds, and even thou- sands, of miles. 4. Incidental means. There are various inci- dental methods by which seeds or eggs, or even living animals, may be distributed. Wood-boring insects may be carried on drifting logs; seeds may be carried in particles of mud clinging to the feet of flying birds; living animals may be carried for long distances on floating ice; ships carry living animals and plants all over the world; migrating animals not infrequently distribute seeds of plants as they move about from place to place, and they may even carry living eggs and some living animals in the same way. By some of these means all organisms have an efficient method of distribution, and tend to scatter themselves in all directions from the centers, where they are produced in large numbers. Although the dispersal may be slow, in the end even the most slowly migrating animal or plant might be distributed over the face of the earth. All organisms tend to disperse themselves until further migration is checked. The factors which check their migration are spoken of as barriers. Barriers. — The ocean. — Bodies of salt water are effectual barriers against the distribution of land animals. Flying ani- mals cross small bodies of salt water, and animals and plants that are blown by winds may be distributed over the ocean CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION 381 for considerable distances; but for most land animals the ocean is an effectual barrier. The land. — For marine animals, the land proves to be an effective barrier. Although the conditions are essentially the same on both sides of the isthmus of Panama, the animals on the two sides of the isthmus are different, the narrow land barrier being sufficient to prevent animals from crossing from sea to sea. Land is also a fairly effectual barrier in preventing the water animals of one river system from passing to another. The inhabitants of the river may distribute themselves over a wide territory, but they are usually unable to pass from one watershed to another, except as they may be carried by inci- dental means. Mountains. — The high mountain ranges are perhaps the most effectual barriers of all. Practically no animal or plant is able to cross over the higher mountain ranges. Hence it sometimes happens that the animals and plants upon the two slopes of high mountains may be quite different, even though the climatic conditions on the two sides are essentially the same. Climate. — Each animal and plant is able to live only in cer- tain conditions of climate. Hence the climate of a territory is a determining factor in regulating its inhabitants. In their distribution, animals and plants are frequently completely checked when they reach territories in which the climate is unadapted to them. This may be the result of several different factors. 1. Water. — The absence of water is a most effectual barrier to the distribution of either animals or plants. Deserts are uninhabited by any form of life, since no protoplasm can exist without water. Although most forms of life need a moist climate, some prefer one that is moderately dry and cannot live in moist territories. Deserts and semi-deserts will, there- fore, be barriers for the greater number of animals and plants, while moist climates will be effectual barriers for the type of organism which prefers a semi-dry climate. 382 BIOLOGY 2. Food. — Animals and plants are limited to territories which furnish the food on which they subsist. A territory that fails to produce sufficient food for any given type of animal will prove an effectual barrier. 3. Temperature. — Forms of life adapted to a warm climate cannot live in a cold climate, and vice versa. The temperature of a territory is, therefore, a highly important factor in deter- mining its inhabitants. Most animals living in cold regions will not pass over the equator, and those adapted to the warm equatorial climate cannot distribute themselves over the colder regions. Enemies. — Every animal and plant has its special enemies. These enemies are sometimes in the form of parasites; they may be larger animals and plants, or other organisms that are contending for the same food. The mutual rivalries of organ- isms make one of the most complex problems of biology, and one that presents an endless puzzle. The introduction of any new animals into an old territory may produce unexpected changes in the life of the animals and plants, the newly arriving organ- isms seizing the available food, or destroying the life of other animals and plants, and giving rise to modifications in the fauna and flora, which can never be anticipated or predicted. The complexity of these relations is indicated in a famous example given by Darwin. The clover crop is dependent upon the bumblebees, which distribute its pollen and produce proper fertilization; the number of bumblebees is dependent upon the number of field mice who eat them; the field mice in turn are eaten by the cats; so that in this roundabout way the number of cats in a territory regulates the clover crop. Change of type under new conditions. — The distribution of any particular species of animal or plant is modified by another factor of a different nature. When an animal migrates into a new territory, and comes under totally different conditions as to food, climate, and enemies, it is very apt to begin to change. These variations from the original type may, in the new terri- CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION 383 tory, prove of special advantage rather than of disadvantage, and will be preserved, while the original type may be destroyed. In the new locality, the species often assumes a form quite unlike the original type, and becomes so differentiated that the descendants can hardly be recognized as belonging to the original species. This peculiar feature is especially noticeable on some of the oceanic islands. Such islands may be hundreds of miles from the mainland and only occasionally visited by accidental stragglers; but they develop peculiar types of ani- mals and plants distinctly their own, although originally com- ing from the mainland. So different do they sometimes be- come that they can hardly be recognized as close allies of the mainland types. Although this change of type in new localities is especially noticeable on oceanic islands, it undoubtedly occurs on the continental areas as well. When a species migrates into a new territory, and is placed under new condi- tions of food and climate, and is in rivalry with new enemies, modifications of the original type are sure to develop, and in the end the form adopted is more or less different from that of the original immigrant, which may be limited to its original home. DISTRIBUTION OF ORGANISMS IN TIME: PALEONTOLOGY Geology discloses the fact that the earth's crust is made up of a series of rocks which have been deposited during the long ages of the past; and by the study of these successive layers of rock we can learn various facts concerning the history of the world during the time when the different strata were de- posited. In many of these rocks we find remains of living or- ganisms, called fossils, which comprised the life of the world at various periods in its earlier history. The study of these different fossil remains is known as paleontology (Gr. palaios = ancient + on = being -f- logos = speech), and gives us an outline history of organisms in the past. Paleontological history at best is very incomplete, since it 384 BIOLOGY is only under special conditions that the body of an animal or plant becomes imbedded in the rocks and preserved in the form of a fossil. Incomplete as it is, paleontology has shown us many illuminating facts concerning the earlier life of the world. It has shown that life has been in existence on the earth for many millions of years, although we have no means of determining, even approximately, how many. It has taught that during this long series of ages there has been a constant succession of living things, one type after another making its appearance and giving place to other types. The animals and plants living to-day represent only the last step in this long series, nearly all of the species existing at the present time being of recent origin, some having been in existence only a few thousands, or perhaps even a few hundreds of years, al- though some of our present forms may extend back for hundreds of thousands of years in the past. The immediate predecessors of our present species were organisms much like them, and from them the present forms have doubtless been descended; and preceding these were others, still more remote in time and more unlike the present ones in structure, representing still earlier ancestral forms. The general history of any series of types has been approxi- mately as follows: Appearing in a certain part of the world, a group of animals has dispersed itself more or less over the face of the earth, becoming numerous in species and giving rise to a variety of subordinate types. The development has commonly gone on until a climax has been reached, after which the particular type has perhaps remained constant for a time, but eventually declined toward its final extermination. As it disappeared, its place was taken by some other type, better adapted to the new conditions of the changing world. So the progress has gone on age after age, type after type appearing, developing, culminating, and then declining and disappearing. One general law in this long progress is manifest. During the whole sories of ages there has been a general progress of CLASSIFICATION AND DISTRIBUTION 385 type from lower to higher forms. The first organisms, appear- ing in the oldest rocks, were simple forms of low structure, while the highest forms of organisms appeared in the most recent ages. While the progress has not been uniformly con- stant, the general trend has always been upward. The inverte- brates, which contain the lower animals, appeared and cul- minated first, while the vertebrates appeared later. Among the vertebrates the fishes appeared in the earlier rocks, the amphibia came next, reptiles and birds followed, and finally the highest group, the mammals, appeared last, with man at the extreme end of the series. It is true that in this long suc- cession of ages, some forms of organisms have degenerated, becoming simpler and finally disappearing, while others have remained constant for immensely long periods of time without any apparent change. But the general tendency of the whole history has been one of progress from a low form to a higher, from the simple to the complex; and the living world to-day represents the culmination of a long period of progress from the earliest times. This progress, as disclosed by the fossils buried in rocks, is, in a very general way, parallel to the progress of the individual animal as it develops from the egg, through the series of changes which we have learned to call embryology. The parallel between embryology and paleontological history has been one of the striking discoveries of biological study, and has been one of the great factors in the disclosure of the unity of the living world during these long ages. All the facts to-day assure us that there have been uniform laws and forces extending through the whole series of living organisms, from the earliest geological ages to the present, and from PROTOZOA to MAN. GLOSSARY-INDEX In this index all defined words are printed in black-faced type; words to which only page reference is given are in roman type. In addition to the words used in the text, definitions are given for some of the more common biological terms. These may be recog- nized by their lack of page references. abdomen. — The ventral part of the body below the ribs, 175. abdominal vein. — A vein in the frog, passing over the abdominal wall in the middle line, 191. abducens (Lat. ab = from -f- ducere = to lead). — A cerebral nerve supplying the eye muscles, 194. abiogenesis (Gr. a = without + bios = life -f- genesis = birth) . — See spon- taneous generation. aboral (Lat. ab = away from + os = mouth) . — Opposite to or away from the mouth. absorption of food, 205, 306. accretion. — Growth by addition of layers on the outside, 4. accompanying cells, 106. acellular. — See syncytium. acetabulum, 182. achromatin (Gr. a = without + chroma = color). — The part of a cell that does not absorb coloring matter, 33. acquired characters. — Characters first developed in the body rather than in the germ plasm, 327; inheritance of, 333, 334, 355. activity, 2, 3. adaptation, meaning of, 342; origin of, 344, 354. adipose (Lat. adeps = fat). — Fatty tissue. adnate (Lat. adnatus = grown to). — United to. adrenals. — Ductless glands lying on the kidneys. aerial (Gr. aer = air). — Pertaining to the ah*. aerial hyphae. — Branches of a mycelium growing upward into the ah* and developing spores, 98. aerobic. — Growing only in the presence of oxygen. afferent fibers (Lat. ad = to + ferre = to bear). — Fibers carrying im- pulses toward the brain, 172, 212. albumen. — A proteid, illustrated by the white of an egg, 8, 22. alcohol, 79. alimentary canal. — The digestive tract, 157, 185. alimentation (Lat. alimentum = food). — The process of food-getting, 138. alveolus. — Expanded sacs at the ends of ducts, as in the glands or lungs. See page 312. 387 388 BIOLOGY alternation of generations, in animals, 277, in plants, 269, 273. amitosis (Gr. a = without + mitos = thread). — Cell division without karyokinesis, 89. Amoeba, description of, 52. amoeboid (Gr. amoeba -\- -oid). — Resembling Amoeba, especially as regards movements by the protrusion of pseudopodia, 218. amorphous (Gr. a = without -+- morphe = form). — Without regular shape. amphiaster (Gr. amphi = around 4- aster = star). — The double star formed in karyokinesis, 86. amphibious (Gr. amphi = around + bios = life). — Capable of living either in the air or in the water. amphimixis (Gr. amphi = around + mixis = a mixing). — A name applied to the mixture of germ substance in sexual union, 336. amylopsin. — A ferment found in the pancreatic juice, that converts starch into sugar, 306. amylolytic. — Capable of converting starch into sugar. anabolism. — The building up of chemical substances from simpler ones, 139, 225, 299. anaerobic (Gr. an = without -f aerobic). — Growing only in the absence of oxygen. anaesthetics (Gr. an = not -\-aisthesis = feeling). — Drugs that dc.-n<>v consciousness. analogy (Gr. ana = according to -f logos = a ratio). — Likeness in func- tion, 368. analysis (Gr. ana = up + luein = to loose). — The reduction of a com- pound to its component parts, 234. anaphase. — The third stage of karyokinesis, 87,. anatomy (Gr. ana = up -f temnein = to cut). — The study of the grosser structure of organisms, 19. anchylosis (Gr. angkylos = crooked). — The growing together of bones, animalculae. — Microscopic organisms commonly found in water, 52. animal functions. — -Those distinctive of animals, i. e., nervous and muscu- lar, 217. animals and plants, differences between, 217, 224. annuals. — Plants which live a single season only. Annulata (Gr. anulus = a ring). — A group of animals with the body divided into rings, 157, 378. Anopheles, 71, 72. antennae. — Elongated appendages with sensory functions occurring on the head of certain animals. anterior. — Pertaining to the head, 155. GLOSSARY-INDEX 389 anterior root. — The anterior branch of a spinal nerve, carrying impulses from the center, 194. anther (Gr. anthos = a flower) . — The sac on the end of a stamen bearing pollen, 119. antheridia (Gr. antheros = flowery). — The organs in certain plants that produce the sperms, 271. anthropoid (Gr. anthropos = man). — Resembling man. anus. — The posterior opening of the digestive tract; the vent, 157. aorta. — The large main artery which carries blood to the lower part of the body, 188. aperture. — An opening, apetalous (Gr. a = without -+- petalon = a leaf). — Flowers without petals, 119. appendages. — • Elongated projections from organisms, with special func- tions; like legs, tentacles, etc., 175. appendix vermiformis. — A small, blind sac attached to the end of the large intestines. APPERT, 14. aqueous humor. — The transparent liquid between the cornea and the lens of the eye, 197. arachnoid membrane. — The membrane covering the brain, between the dura mater and the pia mater. arborizations (Lat. arbor = a tree). — The fine branches in which many nerve fibers sometimes terminate, chiefly at their central ends, 170. archegonia (Gr. arche = first + gonos = race). — The organs in certain plants that produce small eggs, 271. arteries. — Blood vessels carrying blood from the heart, 190. articular (Lat. articulus = a joint). — Pertaining to the joints, 177. ascent of sap. — • The flow of liquids from the roots to the leaves, 126. Ascomycetes, 99. ascospores. — Spores produced in asci, 79, 99. ascus (Lat. ascos = a sac). — A sac holding a definite number of spores, 79, 99. asexual reproduction, 238, 243, 262; distribution of, 265. asexual stage (Gr. a= without + sexual). — The stage in a metamorphosis in which reproduction is by an asexual method. Aspergillus, 97, 102. asphyxia (Gr. a = without + sphyzein = to throb). — Suffocation. assimilation (Lat. assimulare = to make like). — The power of converting nourishment into the substance of the body, possessed by all living things, 44, 62. astragalus, 182. 390 BIOLOGY atrophy (Gr. a = without + trephein = to nourish). — To decrease in size as the result of disuse, or from other causes. auditory. — Pertaining to hearing, 104. auricles (Lat. auris = ear). — The chambers in the heart that receive venous blood, 188. automatic activity. — Actions started by the organisms and not brought about by any external stimulus: spontaneity, 3. autophytes (Gr. autos = self + phyton = plant). — Plants which subsist upon minerals and gases, which they utilize through the agency of sun- light, 226. available energy, 298. avidity for water, 127. axial. — Pertaining to the axis. axial skeleton. — The skull and spinal column, with the ribs and sternum, 177. axil. — The angle above the attachment of a leaf. axis cylinder. — See axon. axon. — The process from a neuron extending outward and becoming the axis cylinder of a nerve fiber, 170. bacillus. — A motile, rod-shaped bacterium. bacteria. — A group of extremely minute plants, the simplest und sm;ilh>st known organisms, 26, 80, 232, 235. ball-and-socket joints, 185. barriers. — Factors that check the distribution of organisms, 380. basioccipital, 180. bast. — The fibers of the phloem. bees, parthenogenesis in, 246. bell animalcule. — Same as Vorticella. biennials (Lat. bi- = twice -f annus = year). — Plants that live two years, growing the first year and fruiting the second. bilaterally symmetrical. — Having the two sides strictly counterparts of each other, 155. bile.— The secretion of the liver; also called gall, 186. biogenetic law (Gr. bios = life + genesis = creation). — The law that em- bryology tends to repeat past history, 290. biological sciences, classification of, 18. bladder, 199. blade of leaf, 114. blastula. — A hollow-sphere stage of the developing egg. blend. — To mix, as when the offspring shows characters midway between those of its parents, 362. blights, 232. GLOSSARY-INDEX 391 blood, 191. blood vessels, 158. body cavity. — The cavity between the intestine and the body wall; also called the coelom, 157. body wall. — The muscular walls which lie outside the body cavity; the outer wall of the body, 143, 157, 166. bone, 27, 176. brachial (Lat. brachium = the arm). — Pertaining to the arm, 190. bract. — A leaf in the axil of which a flower is developed, brain. — The enlarged front end of the nervous system in vertebrates, 192: sometimes applied to the cerebral ganglia of invertebrates, 162. branchiae.— Gills, 288. branchial openings. — Openings in the neck, through which water may pass for respiration, 285. bread raising, 80. breeding season. — The season of the year during which reproduction occurs, 214. bronchi. — The larger branches of the trachea leading to the lungs, buccal. — Pertaining to the mouth, 185, 284. budding. — Reproduction by the formation of buds which may become detached; gemmation, 78, 146, 239. bulbus arteriosus. — The large arterial trunk arising from the ventricle of the frog, before it breaks up into branches, 188; also called truncus arteriosus. bundle. — A cluster of elongated cells, 104. butterfly, 72, 289. calcaneum, 182. calciferous (Lat. calx = lime + ferre = to bear). — Lime-producing, 169. callosities (Lat. callum = a thick skin). — Thickenings of the skin, calyx. — The outer row of leaves of a flower, usually green, 119. cambium (Lat. cambire = to exchange). — The layer of active, growing cells inside the bark and outside the woody layers in exogenous plants, 105, 108. cane sugar, 9. capillaries (Lat. capillus = a hair). — The microscopic blood vessels be- tween the ends of the arteries and the beginning of the veins, 190, 207. capillarity, 127. carbohydrates. — Starches, sugars, and celluloses, 9, 10. Carchesium, 91. cardiac (Gr. cardia = heart). — Pertaining to the heart, carnivorous (Lat. caro (carnis) = flesh + vorare = to eat). — Feeding on flesh, 224. 392 BIOLOGY carotids. — The two large arteries on the sides of the neck carrying blood to the head, 190. carpals, 182. carpels (Gr. carpos = fruit). — The separate parts (leaves) of which a pistil is composed, 120. cartilage. — A hard material, softer than bone, which forms part of the skeleton, 27, 35. cartilage bones. — Bones first formed as cartilage, 181. casein. — A proteid present in milk and constituting the curd, 8. castor bean, 103. cat, 366. caudal. — Pertaining to the tail, cell. — One of the simple units of which living things are composed, 20, 37. cell doctrine, 38. cell sap. — A clear liquid inside of plant cells, 30. cellulose. — A material related to starch and forming the cell wall of many plant cells; the basis of paper, cotton, etc., 35. cell wall. — The covering on the outside of the cell, not present in all cells. 29, 34. central nervous system, 162, 192. centrosome (Gr. centron = center + soma = body). — A small body lying near the nucleus in animal cells and apparently the center of active forces, 29, 34. centrosphere, 34. centrum. — The large central disk of bone in a vertebra, 177. cephalic (Gr. kephale = head). — Pertaining to the head, cerebellum. — The larger of the two divisions of the hind-brain, 193. cerebral ganglia. — The large ganglia in the head of an animal, usually two in number, 162. cerebral hemispheres. — The anterior and largest part of the brain of ver- tebrates, 193. cerebrospinal axis. — The central nervous system of vertebrates, composed of brain and spinal cord, 192. chemical composition of living things, 5, 7, 42. chemical compounds. — Substances made of two or more chemical elements joined in chemical union. chemotropism (Eng. chemesa = chemical 4- Gr. trope — a turning). — Reac- tion to chemical stimuli, 57. chiasma. — The crossing of the optic nerves in the brain. Chilomonas, 73. chitin. — A horny material, like that of which insects' wings are made. GLOSSARY-INDEX 393 chlorogogen cells.— The cells which fill the typhlosole and cover the intes- tine in the earthworm, 169. chlorophyll (Gr. chloros = green + phyllon = leaf). — The green coloring material in plants which enables them to carry on photosynthesis, 93, 117, 131, 218. chlorophyll bodies, 37. chloroplasts (Gr. chloros = green -f- plastos = molded). — Cells which pro- duce chlorophyll, 117. Chordata (Gr. chorde = a string). — Animals possessing a notochord, includ- ing all Vertebrata, 378. choroid (Gr. chorion = skin). — The pigment-holding layer of the eyeball, inside the sclerotic coat, 196. choroid coat, of the eye, 196. choroid plexus. — A membrane full of blood vessels covering certain cavities in the brain, 193. chromatin (Gr. chroma = color). — The material in the nucleus holding the characteristic features of cell life and concerned in inheritance, 33, 259. chromatophore (Gr. chroma = color + pherein = to bear). — A pigment- bearing cell. ohromidial units, 50. chromogenic. — Pigment-producing. chromosomes (Gr. chroma = color + soma = body). — The threads of chromatin formed preliminary to cell division; the number is constant in each species of organism, 85. chyle. — The completely digested food in the intestine. cilia (Lat. cilium = an eyelash). — Vibratile processes of protoplasm from the free surface of cells, 60, 218. circulation, 138, 206, 309; of earthworm, 158; of frog, 187, 205; of Hydra, 146. Cladonia, 229. class. — A group of closely related orders, 373. classification of organisms, 370, 375; significance of, 374. clavicle, 182. cleavage. — The division of the egg into cells, 281. clitellum (Lat. clitellce = a saddle). — A band of swollen segments in the earthworm, between the 28th and 35th segments, 157. cloacal aperture (Lat. cloaca = sewer). — The common opening of the intes- tine and the urogenital organs, 175, 186. cloacal chamber, 284. cnidoblast (Gr. cnide = thistle + blastos = a sprout). — The ectodermal cells in Ccelenterata which produce the nematocysts. cnidocil, 144. 394 BIOLOGY coagulate. — To change into a curd-like mass, 22. coccus. — A spherical bacterium. cocoon. — The t >ationary stage in the life of a butterfly, 72; the egg case of an earthworm, 165. Coelenterata (Gr. kottos = hollow + enteron = intestine) . — Animals with pnly a single cavity and no body cavity, including Hydra and its allies, 377. coeliac axis. — The arterial trunk from the dorsal aorta, supplying the viscera, 190. coelom (Gr. koilos = hollow). — Same as body cavity, 157. Coelomata (Gr. koilos = hollow) . — Animals with a body cavity including all animals above Ccelenterata. coelomic fluid.— The fluid filling the body cavity, 158, 160. coenocyte (Gr. koinos = common + cytos — a cell). — A protoplasmic mass containing several nuclei, but without division into cells; same as syncytium. cold-blooded. — A term applied to animals whose blood is of essentially the same temperature as the surrounding medium, colloidal.— A term applied to substances which will not dialyze through membranes, 307. colony. — A group of connected individuals, usually arising from one by asexual budding, 73, 92. columella. — A rod connecting the tympanic membrane with the inner ear in the fiog, 197. commensalism (Lat. cum = together + mensa = table). — An association of two organisms in which neither is benefited nor injured, 230. commissures (Lat. committere = to join). — Nerve cords connecting ganglia, 162. communal. — Living in communities. compound pistil. — A pistil made of several fused carpels, 120. conductility. — The power possessed by protoplasm of transferring impulses from one end to the other, 43. condyies. — The smooth protuberances by which the skull is attached to the first vertebra, 181. conformity to type. — The appearance of like individuals in successive gen- erations, 328. congenital characters (Lat. con = with + genitus = born). — Characters that are fixed in the germ plasm, 327, 334. conidia (Gr conis = dust). — Spores produced by constriction on the ends of threads rather than in a sporangium, 98. conjugation (Lat. com = together + jugare = to join). — The union of two similar cells in reproduction, 65, 94, 247, 262. GLOSSARY-INDEX 395 connective tissue. — Material, usually fibrous, which connects the various parts of an animal, consciousness, 5, 213. conservation of energy, 294; applied to organisms, 303. constructive processes, 139, 225, 299. contagious. — Having the character of passing readily from person to person. continuity of germ plasm, 329. contractile vacuole, 55, 62. contractility, 54. convolutions. — Folds of the surface of the brain, coordination (Lat. con- = with + ordinare = to arrange). — •The orderly control of the various functions so that they act in harmony; the control of many muscles so that they act toward a definite end, 140, 162, 211; in plants, 137. copulation. — The union of the sexes for the transferring of sperms to the eggs, 165, 215. copulatory organs. — Organs used for bringing the sex cells together, 256. coracoid, 182. cork, 38. cornea (Lat. corneus = horny). — The front, transparent covering of the eye, 196. corolla. — The second row of leaves in a flower, usually colored, 119. coronary arteries. — Arteries supplying the heart, corpuscles. — Any small bodies, but chiefly applied to floating cells in the blood, 192, 205. correlation of forces. — Same as transformation of energy, cortex (Lat. cortex = bark). — The layers of cells inside the epidermis and outside the cambium of a young stem; the outer layers of any organ, as the cerebral cortex, 104, 112. cotyledons. — The leaves of a plant in the seed, 123. cranial nerves. — The nerves arising from the brain, 194. cranium (Gr. cranion = skull). — That part of the skull that holds the brain, 180. crop. — An expanded chamber of the digestive tract for storing hastily swallowed food, 158. cross fertilization. — Fertilization of eggs from one individual, with sperms from another, 165, 267. crus, 182. cryptogams (Gr. cryptos = concealed + gamos = marriage).— Plants which do not produce flowers, 103. 396 BIOLOGY crystalline. — Applied to substances that will dialyze through membranes, 307 crystalline lens. — The lens in the eyeball which focuses light on the retina, 197. Culex, 72. cutaneous (Lat. cutis — skin). — Pertaining to the skin, 191, 209. cuticle (Lat. cutis = skin). — A thin, structureless membrane forming on the outside of the epidermis, 62, 166. cyclical changes. — Changes which pass through a cycle but eventually return to the starting point, 5. cyst. — A hard shell which is sometimes secreted around organisms in a dor- mant condition; any sac with a wall, developing abnormally in the body, 59, 74, 241. cytoblastema, 38. cytoplasm (Gr. cytos = cell + plasma = substance). — The liquid part of the protoplasm outside the nucleus, 32, 49. dandelion, 370. DARWIN, 352. death, 3, 153. decay. — Decomposition changes produced by bacteria in the presence of air; more complete than putrefaction, 81. deciduous. — A term applied to plants that shed their leaves in the fall; also to mammals that shed the placenta at birth. decomposition. — The chemical destruction of molecules. In biology the disintegration of organic substances, usually produced by bacteria or allied organisms. degeneration, 233. dehiscence (Lat. dehiscere = to' open). — The opening of an organ to dis- charge its contents, 123. dendrites (Gr. dendron = tree). — The branching processes arising from neurons, 170. denitrification. — The reduction of nitrates to nitrites or simpler compounds. dentine. — The inner, softer part of the teeth. depressant. — Having the power of reducing activity. dermis. — The inner layer of the skin, 176. descent theory. — The theory that all organisms are genetically inter- connected: evolution, 348. dessication (Lat. dessicare = to dry up). — Drying, 57. destructive processes, 139, 300. deutoplasm (Gr. deuteros = second + plasma = substance). — The food yolk in the egg, 249. DE VRIES, 357. GLOSSARY-INDEX 397 dextrose. — A form of sugar found in fruits; glucose, 9. dialysis. — See osmosis. diaphragm. — A muscular membrane separating the chest from the abdomen. diastatic. — Capable of turning starch into sugar. diastole (Gr. diastole = an expansion). — The period in each beat when the heart is relaxed, 188. Diatoms, 136, 219. dichotomous (Gr. dicha = in two + temnein = to cut). — Branching by regular division into pah's. differentiate. — To become unlike; usually applied to parts originally similar but which acquire different structure and function, 95, 283. digestion. — • A series of changes in the chemical and physical nature of the food which renders it capable of absorption, 204, 305. digestive cells, 145. digestive juices. — • The secretions which render the food capable of absorp- tion, 55, 62, 204. digits. — Fingers and toes. digitigrade. — Walking on the tips of the fingers and toes. dimorphism (Gr. di- = twice -f- morphe = form). — -Showing two distinct forms. dioecious (Gr. di- = twice + oikos = house) . — Having the sexes in different plants. diphtheria, 231, 232. direct development. — • Development without a metamorphosis, 290. disease germs, 82. disintegrate. — To break to pieces, 4. dispersal. — The power of organisms to distribute themselves from centers, 379. dissepiment. — See septum. distal. — Farthest from the main body. distribution, in space, 379; in time, 383. divergence.—- The appearance of two or more lines of descent from a com- mon center, 337, 339. diversities. — The slight differences found among individuals of the same species. diverticulum. — Any sac-like outgrowth. dogs, origin of, 339. dominant characters (Lat. dominari = to rule). — Those which appear most prominently in the first generation after the crossing of races, 360. dorsal. — Pertaining to the back, 155. drones. — Male bees. Drosera, 223. 398 BIOLOGY ductless glands. — Gland-like structures without ducts, pouring their secre- tions into the blood. ducts. — The large spiral or otherwise marked cells in the fibrovascular bundles; vessels, 106. In animals the tubes that carry the secretions of glands to the exterior, 105. duodenum. — The first loop of the intestine below the stomach, 186. dura mater (Lat. durus = hard + mater = mother). — A tough membrane on the outside of the brain, 194. ears, 197. earthworm, 155; physiology of, 216. ecdysis. — The shedding of the skin. ecology (Gr. oikos = house + logos = discourse). — The study of the mu- tual relations of animals to each other and to their environment, 20. ectoderm (Gr. ectos = outside + derma = skin). — The outer layer of cells of animals, 141, 283. ectoparasites. — Parasites living on the outer surface of their host, 230. ectoplasm. — The outer layer of protoplasm in Protozoa, 54, 61. efferent nerve fibers (Lat. ex = from -}-ferre = to bear). — Fibers carrying impulses away from the brain, 172, 212. egg. — Same as ovum, 267. egg sac, 163. electropism (Gr. electron = amber + trope = a turning). — The power of re- acting to electricity, 58. elements. — The ultimate varieties into which substances can be chemically analyzed, 5. embiyo (Gr. embryon = an embryo). — The young organism in the early stages of development, 19. embryology. — The study of the development of the egg into an adult, 19; of the frog, 280. embryo sac. — A name formerly given to the macrospore of a flowering plant, 122, 273. emulsion. — Finely divided droplets of one liquid (usually oil) floating in another liquid, 23. enamel. — The hard, outer covering of the teeth. encyst. — To inclose in a cyst, 74, 241. endoderm (Gr. endon = within + derma = skin). — The inner layer of cells of animals, lining the digestive tract, 143, 145, 283. endodermis. — A layer of cells within the cortex and next to the wood in the roots of plants, 113. endogenous stem (Gr. endon = within + genes = a producing). — Stems in which the fibrovascular bundles are irregularly arranged, with no cambium, wood ring, or bark, 112. GLOSSARY-INDEX 399 endoparasites. — Parasites living within the body of their host, 231. endoplasm (Gr. endon = within + plasma = substance). — The inner layers of protoplasm in the Protozoan cell, 54, 62. end organs. — Special organs at the ends of the nerves, 211; peripheral and central end organs are recognized, enemies, relation of animals to, 382. energy, 292; stored by plants, 299. English sparrow, 345. enteron. — The alimentary canal, 158. entire. — Of a leaf margin, without indentations, environment. — The surroundings which influence organisms, 351. enzymes. — Substances secreted by organisms and having powers of fer- mentation; unorganized ferments, 306. epiblast. — A name applied "to the ectodermal layer of the embryo, epidermis (Gr. epi = upon -f- derma = skin). — The outer layers of cells of any organism, 104, 115, 167, 176. epiglottis (Gr. epi = upon -f glottis = glottis) . — An elastic lid covering the glottis, which prevents food from passing into the windpipe, epiphysis. — -Same as pineal gland, 193. epithelio-muscle cells. — Cells of the ectoderm of Hydra, with contractile fibers extending from their base, 143. epithelium (Gr. epi = upon + thele = nipple) . — Cell layers covering sur- faces or lining canals or cavities, 169. equatorial plate. — The flattened mass of chromosomes formed between two centrosomes, 86. erythrocytes (Gr. erythros = red + cytos). — • The red corpuscles of the blood, 192, 205. Eudorina, 263. Euglena, 75, 76, 217. Eustachian tubes. — The tubes leading from the throat to the middle ear, 186, 197. eversion (Lat. e = out -f vertere = to turn). — The process of turning a part inside out. evolution. — The theory that traces the origin of the present world from the past as the result of the unfolding of natural law, 348. excreta, 139. excretions. — Waste products of metabolism eliminated by glands, 56, 139, 210. excretory system.— 56, 62, 139; of earthworm, 161; of frog, 199; of Hydra, 151; of plants, 225. exoccipital bones, 180. 400 BIOLOGY exogenous stems (Gr. exo — without + genes = a producing) . — Stems with a cambium layer separating a bark from a wood ring, 109, 112. extensors. — The muscles that straighten the appendages at the joints, 211. eye, 196; of human being and of frog compared, 367. eyespot. — A colored spot found in unicellular organisms, sensitive to light, 76. facial nerve. — The nerve supplying the side of the head with sensations, 194. Fallopian tubes. — • In mammals the part of the oviduct extending from the ovary to the uterus. family. — A group of similar genera, 372. fat. — One of the three chief food substances; a hydrocarbon made up of a fatty acid and glycerine, 9, 133. fatty acid. — One of the materials into which fat may be decomposed, 10. fauna. — The total animal life of any region. Felis, 372. females. — Individuals producing eggs, 251. female pronucleus. — The matured egg nucleus before union with the sperm, 254. female spores, 122. ferment. — Chemical substances that produce fermentation; enzymes, 306. fermentation, 79. fern, life history of, 269. fertilization. — The union of the egg nuclei and the sperm nuclei, 122, 249, 251, 257, 263. In botany the term is frequently erroneously applied to the transference of pollen to the pistil, 277. fibers. — The individual elements of muscles and nerves, 170. fibrillae. — The minute filaments of which a muscle fiber is composed. fibrin. — A proteid obtained from clotted blood. fibrovascular bundles (Lat. fibra = fiber -f- E. vascular). — Bundles of long cells of various shapes, extending lengthwise and strengthening the stems of the higher plants, 104. fibula, 182. filament. — The, thread-like stem to a stamen, 119; any thread-like organ. fission (Lat. findere = to split). — Division into two equal halves, 58, 63. flagella (Lat. flagellum = a whip). — Rather long, lashing processes of pro- toplasm, one to six to each cell, 73, 218. flexors. — • Muscles that bend the joints, 211. flexure. — A bending. Flora. — The total vegetation of any territory. flowers, 118. foam theory of protoplasm, 31. GLOSSARY-INDEX 401 foetus. — The embryo while within the uterus of the mother, 291. follicle. — The pocket in which a hair is produced. foods of plants, 126. food vacuoles. — Clear spaces in Protozoa representing the remains of digested food, foramen magnum (Lat. foramen = opening + magnum = great). — The opening into the skull through which the spinal cord enters, 180. forebrain. — The front part of the brain, consisting of cerebrum and thala- mencephalon, 193. fore-gut. — The front part of the alimentary canal; the stomodceum. fossils. — • The remains of animals or plants found in the rocks, 383. fourth ventricle, 193. free-living, 227. frond,— The leaf of a fern, 269. frontal bone, 180. fundamental cells. — The cells which make up the bulk of the stem of young plants; they are roughly spherical in shape and never elongated, 104. Fungi, significance in nature, 134, 234. fusion nucleus. — The nucleus formed from the fusion of two nuclei into one, as in fertilization or conjugation, 65, 241, 257. gall bladder. — The sac which temporarily stores the bile, 187. gamete (Gr. gamete = husband or wife). — One of the uniting cells in sex union; usually male or female, but sometimes not showing any sex differentiation, 262, 267. gametophyte (Gr. gamete = husband or wife + phyton = plant) . — • The stage in the life cycle of a plant that produces sex organs, 272, 275. ganglion. — A group of aggregated neuron bodies, 162. gastric glands, 204. gastric juice. — -The digestive secretion produced in the walls of the stomach, 204. gastrovascular cavity. — The cavity in the body of Ccelenterata, 141. gastrula (Gr. gaster = a stomach). — An early stage in the embryology of animals. See page 285. gemmae — Special buds formed for reproduction, gemmules, 243. gemmation. — The same as budding, 239. gemmules. — Special buds which break away from the parent and become new individuals; same as gemmae, generation. — The whole life history of an organism, from any stage to the same stage again, 67. genital (Lat. genere = to produce) .— Pertaining to reproduction, genus (pi. genera). — A group of similar species, 371. 402 BIOLOGY geotropism (Gr. ge = earth -f trope = a turning). — The power possessed by many plants of growing toward or away from the earth. germinal. — Pertaining to reproduction. germ layers. — The three layers formed in the developing embryo, ^83. germ plasm. — The substance which bears the hereditary traits and is con- tinuous from generation to generation, 330. gills. — Thin, expanded organs, bathed in water for respiratory purposes, 288. gill slits. — See branchial openings. girdling, 111, 129. gizzard. — A muscular chamber of the digestive tract where food is ground, 158. glands. — Groups of cells which produce secretions, 167, 176, 204. glenoid cavity, 182. glomerulus. — See Malpighian body. glossopharyngeal (Gr. glossa = tongue -f pharynx). — A nerve from the brain supplying the tongue and throat, 194. glottis. — The opening of the trachea or larynx into the mouth, 186. glucose. — A sugar from fruits, or artificially made from starch, containing maltose and dextrin, 9. gluten. — A proteid from cereals, 8. glycerine. — One of the decomposition products of fat, 10. gonads. — Glands producing eggs or sperms, 251. Gonium, 240. grafting. — Inserting a part of one animal or plant into another in such a way that the inserted part retains its life and grows. granular. — Filled with granules or minute solid particles. granular theory of protoplasm, 31. gregarious. — Congregating. growth, 4. guard cells, 116. gullet. — The oesophagus, 158. gustatory. — Pertaining to taste. gyncecium. — Same as pistil. haemal (Gr. haima = blood). — Pertaining to the blood. haemoglobin (Gr. haima = blood + Lat. globus = globe). — A red proteid which colors the blood red, 158, 192, 209. hair follicle. — The tiny pocket, within which each hair grows. hairs, 35, 117. hallux. — The great toe. hand, 365. hare, 34£. GLOSSARY-INDEX 403 Haversian canals. — The canals in bone in which the blood vessels run. heart, 187, 206, 309; of earthworm, 159. heliotropism (Gr. helios = the sun + trope = a turning). — The power possessed by plants of turning toward the sun. helotism (Gr. helot = a slave) . — An association of organisms in which one enslaves the other, 228. hepatic (Gr. hepar = liver). — Pertaining to the liver, hepatic vein. — The vein from the liver, 190. herbivorous (Lat. herba = grass + vorare = to eat). — Feeding upon grass, herbs or other plants, heredity. — The appearance in the offspring of characters of the parent, 326; nucleus in, 48, 259; Weismann's theory of, 329. hermaphrodites. — Individuals possessing both male and female reproduc- tive glands, 251. heterocercal. — Applied to a tail-fin with one lobe longer than the other, heterosporous (Gr. heteros = other -f spore). — Producing more than one kind of spore; i. e., macrospores and microspores, 274. hibernation (Lat. hibernare = to winter). — The death-like sleep which some animals show in winter, 214. high organisms. — Organisms with complex structure, 96. hind-brain. — The posterior part of the brain, consisting of cerebellum and medulla, 193. hind-gut. — The hind part of the intestine, the cloacal chamber; also called the proctodoeum. hinge joint, 185. histology (Gr. histos = a web -f logos = discourse). — The study of the microscopical anatomy of organisms, 19; of earthworm, 166. holophyte (Gr. holos = whole + phyton = a plant). — Having the food habits of plants, i. e., capable of utilizing sunlight and assimilating CO2, 221. holozoic (Gr. holos = whole -f zoon = animal). — Having the food habits of animals, i. e., nourished wholly on organic foods, 221. homocercal. — Applied to a tail-fin with both lobes equal, homologous (Gr. homos = like + logos = ratio). — Similar in structure, 364. homosporous (Gr. homos = like + spore). — Producing only one kind of spore, 274. HOOKER, 38. Horse, foot of, 365. host. A name applied to an animal or plant upon which another is living as a parasite, 227, humerus, 182. 404 BIOLOGY humor. — A name applied to the transparent liquids in the eye, 197. HUXLEY. 40. hybrids. — Organisms resulting from the crossing of different species, 268. Hydatina, 57, 247. Hydra, description of, 140. hydrocarbons, 9. hydroids. — Animals closely related to Hydra, 148, 277. hydrophyte (Gr. hydor = water + phyton = plant). — Plants living in water or in a very wet habitat, hyoid. — A V-shaped arch of bone under the jaw and surrounding the larynx, 181. hyomandibular. — A chain of bones attaching the lower jaw to the skull hi the frog. hypha. — One of the filaments of a mycelium, hypoblast. — Applied to the endodermal layer in the embryo, hypophysis (Gr. hypo = under + phuein = nature). — See pituitary body, 193. ileum. — A name given to the intestine below the duodeum. ilium, 182. imago. — The adult stage of an insect with a metamorphosis, 289. imbibition (Lat. imbibire = to imbibe). — The action of absorbing water, shown by many organic substances, immutability of species (Lat. in = not + mutabilis = changing). — The theory that species remain constant, 349. imperfect flowers. — Flowers in which either stamens or pistils are lacking, 120, 121. impregnation (Lat. impregnare = to make pregnant). — See fertilization, 257. inbreeding. — Breeding from a male and female of the same parentage, like brother and sister, 268. income, of an animal, 219; of a plant, 220. incubation (Lat. incubare = to he on). — To keep warm. Indirect development, 290. individual, 67. individual variations, 337, 358. indusium (Lat. induere = to put on). — A covering over the sporangia in the sorus of a fern, 269. inferior vena cava. — The large venous trunk bringing the blood from the lower parts of the body to the heart: same as posterior vena cava, 190. infundibulum. — Any funnel-shaped or dilated organ, 193. infusion. — A preparation made by steeping a substance like hay in warm water. GLOSSARY-INDEX 405 inner ear, 198. inorganic, 26. insertion. — The attachment of a muscle farthest from the center of the body, 184. intercellular (Lat. inter = between + cellular). — Lying between the cells, intercellular digestion, 145. internodes. — Spaces between the nodes, interstitial cells (Lat. inter = between + sistere = to set). — Cells in Hydra lying between the cnidoblasts and the muscle cells, 143. intestine. — The digestive tract from stomach to cloacal chamber, 186. intracellular (Lat. intra = within + cellular). — Lying within the cells, intracellular digestion, 146. intussusception (Lat. intus = inside -f- suscipere = to take up). — The process of growth by taking material inside the body and incorporating it into the body substance, 5. invagination (Lat. in = within + vagina = a sheath). — The act of turning inward, as when the finger of a glove is pushed into the palm, invertebrata. — A name given to all animals below vertebrata. invertion. — The splitting of a molecule of cane sugar into two molecules of grape sugar, a molecule of water being added in the process, 9. iris. — An opaque curtain, containing pigment, covering the front of the eyeball, 197. irritability. — The power of reacting under the influence of stimuli, 43, 57, 63, 219. ischia, 182. isolation. — The separation of two individuals from the rest of the species so that they will breed together, 351. jellyfish. — See medusa. joints. — Places where bones or other hard movable parts come together, 176, 184. karyokinesis (Gr. karyon = nucleus + kinesis = movement). — The proc- ess of cell division accompanied by a peculiar, complicated nuclear division; mitosis, 85. karyoplasm (Gr. karyon = nucleus + plasma = substance). — The liquid protoplasm inside the nucleus; nucleoplasm, 32, 49. katabolism, 139. kidneys. — Glands in vertebrates secreting urea, 199. kinetic energy (Gr. kinetos = moving). — Energy in motion; active energy, 293. kingdoms. — The two divisions of organisms, animals and plants, 373. lachrymal (Lat. lachryma = a tear). — Pertaining to tears, lacteals. — Lymph vessels, carrying absorbed fat from the intestine, 192. 406 BIOLOGY lacunae. — Spaces among the tissues in which lymph collects, 192, 208. L..MARCK, 350. Lamarckian factors. — Forces in evolution first suggested by Lamarck, 351. lamella. — A thin plate or layer, larva. — A free-living stage in the development of an animal, unlike the adult, e. g., a tadpole, 286, 289. larval history. — The stages in the life history of an animal after hatching from the egg and before adult form is reached, larynx. — The enlargement of the air passages containing the vocal cords, 191, 209. leaf, structure of, 114. legumen. — A proteid derived from legumes, 8. legumes. — Plants belonging to the Leguminosae family, like beans, peas, clover, alfalfa, vetches, locusts, etc. Leucanthemum, 345. leucocytes (Gr. leukos = white -f- cytos = cell). — The white corpuscles of the blood, 192, 205. lichens. — The grayish green mosses which grow on rocks or trees, etc.; an association of a fungus and a green plant, 229. life cycle. — See generation; of nature, 234. life force, 4, 323. ligaments. — Bands of connective tissue connecting bones, 184. lingual (Lat. lingua = tongue). — Pertaining to the tongue, 190. linin. — The delicate fibers extending through the karyoplasm and forming a network, 32. littoral. — Pertaining to the shore. liver. — A large gland opening into the intestine at the pylorus, 186. lophotrichic (Gr. lophos = a crest + thrix = hair). — With a tuft of fla- gella, 81. low organisms. — Organisms with a simple structure, 96. lumen. — A cavity in a tube or sac. lungs, 191, 209. lymph. — The liquid part of the blood after it has passed out of the capilla- ries into the tissues, 176, 192, 208. lymph glands. — Glandular swellings on the lymph vessels, which belong to the ductless glands; lymph nodes, 192. lymph hearts. — Four pulsating sacs in the frog, that force lymph into the veins, 192, 208. lymph spaces. — Spaces in tissues in which lymph collects, 176. lymph vessels. — Tubes carrying lymph from the lacunae to the veins, 192, 208. GLOSSARY-INDEX 407 machine. — Any mechanism designed to convert one kind of energy into another, 297. macronucleus (Gr. macros = large). — The larger of the two nuclei in cells having two, 62. macrospore (Gr. macros — large).— The large spores ;n certain plants, which develop into female gametophytes, 122, 273. macula lutea (Lat. macula = spot + luteus = yellow). — A small spot on the retina, with most acute vision, malaria, 69, 232. males. — Individuals producing sperms, 251, 257. male pronucleus. — The sperm after entering the egg and before it unites with the egg nucleus, 257. male spores, 122. Malpighian bodies. — Minute rounded bodies in the kidneys filled with a knot of blood vessels; glomeruli. Mammalia (Lat. mamma = breast). — Animals, the females of which have milk glands, 373. mammary glands. — Glands secreting milk, 373. mandible. — The jaw bone, 180; also the jaw-like teeth of animals like insects and Crustacea. mantle. — A fold of skin more or less enveloping the body of an animal, marrow. — The soft material filling the cavities of bones, maturation (Lat. maturare = to make ripe). — The final changes by which an egg becomes prepared for fertilization, 253. maxilla. — A bone forming the upper jaw, 180; also mouthparts of insects or Crustacea, mechanical theory. — The theory that life phenomena are manifestation? of chemical and mechanical forces only, 41. medulla oblongata. — The posterior part of the brain, 193. medullary rays (Lat. medulla = marrow) . — Bundles of cells extending from the center to the outer parts of a stem, 111. Medusae. — The sexual, free-swimming stage of certain hydroids and other Ccelenterata; jelly fishes, 144, 278. megaspore. — Same as macrospore. membrane bones. — Bones formed first as membranes, 181. membranella. — A band of fused cilia found in some of the unicellular animals, 61. Mendelism. — A law of heredity first advanced by Mendel, 359. mental functions, 317. mesenteron (Gr. mesos = middle + enteron = intestine) . — The mid-gut, 284. mesentery (Gr. mesos = middle + enteron = intestine). — A fold of the peritoneum which slings the intestine in position, 187. 408 BIOLOGY mesoblast. — The mesoderm of the developing embryo. mesoderm (Gr. mesos = middle + derma = skin). — The middle layer in a developing embryo, 283. mesogloea (Gr. mesos = middle + gloios = glue). — The middle, non-cellu- lar layer of Hydra and allied animals, 143. mesophyll cells (Gr. mesos = middle + phyllon = leaf). — The irregular, loosely packed, chlorophyll cells in the middle of a leaf, 117. xnesophytes (Gr. mesos = middle -f phyton = plant). — Plants living in a moderately moist habitat. metabolism (Gr. meta = beyond + ballein = to throw) . — A name given to the series of chemical changes going on in organisms, 138, 210. metacarpals, 182. metameres (Gr. meta = beyond -j- meros = a part). — Segments of animals like the earthworm, 155. metamorphosis (Gr. meta = beyond + morphe = form). — A life history in which an organism passes through several unlike stages, more or less independent, 72, 289; of frog, 280, 286. metaphase. — The second step in karyokinesis, 87. Metaphyta (Gr. meta = beyond + phyton = plant). — Plants made of many cells, 223. metastasis (Gr. meta = beyond + histanai = to place.) — The process of using foods, 132, 135, 300. metatarsals, 182. Metazoa (Gr. meta = beyond + zoon = animal). — Animals made of many cells, 223. mice, breeding of, 361. micronucleus (Gr. mikros = small + nucleus). — The small nucleus in a cell containing two nuclei, 62. microorganism. — Any organism of microscopic size, microsomata (Gr. mikros = small + soma = body). — Extremely minute bodies in the protoplasm which frequently show motion, 32. microspores (Gr. mikros = small + spore). — The small spores in a plant, which develop into male gametophytes, 122, 273. mid-brain. — The middle part of the brain, consisting of the optic lobes (called corpora quadrigemina in man), 193. migration.— The act of changing one's dwelling place from one locality to another, 379. mimicry. — Resemblances which some organisms show to other objects, for protective purposes. mitosis (Gr. miios = a thread). — See karyokinesis. mitral valve. — The valve between the left auricle and vent-ride, molds, 96, 99, 235. GLOSSARY-INDEX 409 molecule. — The smallest particle of a chemical compound which can exist without the compound being chemically destroyed. Monocystis, 241. monoecious (Gr. monos = one -j- oikos = house). — With both sexes in the same individual; applied to plants, 251. monogamous (Gr. monos = one + gamos = marriage). — The sexual asso- ciation of one male with one female. monotrichic (Gr. monos = one + thrix = hah1) . — With a single flagellum, 81. morphology (Gr. morphe = form + logos = discourse) . — The study of the structure of organisms in all relations, 19. morula (Lat. morum = a mulberry). — The stage in the egg development after the egg has become a sphere of cells. motion, in plants, 136, 218; in the earthworm, 167; in the frog, 211. motor cells. — The neurons which send impulses over their axons to the muscles to produce motion, 172, 213. motor ocularis. — The third cerebral nerve supplying the eye muscles, 194. Mucor, 97, 247. mucous membrane. — The lining of the alimentary canal, 187. mucous. — Applied to glands secreting mucus. mucus. — A thick, viscid secretion from the mucous membrane. multicellular organisms (Lat. multus = many + cellular). — Organisms made of many cells which show a differentiation among themselves, 90, 95. muscles, 219. mutations (Lat. mutare = to change). — Sudden departures from the race character which have a tendency to remain fixed, 358. mutation theory (Lat. mutare = to change).— The theory of evolution that assumes that progress has taken place by mutations rather than by individual diversities, 357. mutualism. — An associating of organisms for mutual benefit, 228. mycelium (Gr. mykes = fungus + helos = a nail). — The thread-like fila- ments of which fungi are composed, 96. myosin (Gr. raws = muscle). — A proteid in lean meat, 8. nares. — • See nostrils. nasal bones, 180. natural selection. — The law by which the best fitted organisms survive. 353. NEEDHAM, 13. nematocysts (Gr. nema = a thread + cystis = sac). — Special cells in Cce- lenterata which have a coiled poison thread capable of extrusion; net- tling cells, 143. 410 BIOLOGY nephridia (Gr. nephros = kidney). — The organs of the earthworm which excrete nitrogenous waste, 161. nerve fibers. — The separate fibers of which a nerve is composed, 170. nerve impulse, 314. nerves, 163, 194. nervous system of earthworm, 162; of frog, 192; of Hydra, 146. netted-veined leaves. — Those with veins branching into a network, 114. nettle-hairs, 117. nettling cells. — See nematocysts. neural arch (Gr. neuron = a nerve). — The arch of bones on top of the ver- tebrae, inclosing the neural foramen, 177. neuroglia (Gr. neuron = a nerve + gloios = glue). — The connective frame- work of the nervous system. neurons (Gr. neuron = a nerve). — The nerve cells which are the units of the nervous system, 169, 195. nictitating membrane (Lat. nictare = to wink). — A semitransparent, inner eyelid in the frog and some other animals, 175. nidamental glands (Lat. nidus = a nest). — Glands connected with th<> oviduct, that secrete the covering of eggs, 201. Nitetta, 29. nitrification. — The production of nitrates in the soil from simpler nitrogen compounds. nodes. — The places on a stem where branches arise. nostrils. — Openings into the nasal cavities; nares, 175, 186. notochord (Gr. notos = the back -f chorde = a string). — A rod in the back of vertebrate embryos that develops into the spinal column, 286. nucleolus. — A small body in the nucleus of a cell, with unknown functions, 32. nucleoplasm. — See karyoplasm. nucleus. — The vital center of a cell, containing chromatin and controlling constructive metabolism, 29, 32, 45. occipital bones. — The skull bones which surround the foramen magnum, 180. occipital condyles. — The rounded protuberances by which the skull articu- lates with the first vertebra, 181. oesophagus. — The tube from the throat to the stomach or crop, or from the mouth into the body, 60, 158. olfactory lobes. — Two small lobes of the brain in front of the cerebrum, 193. olfactory nerve. — The first of the cerebral nerves, supplying the olfactory sacs, 194, 196, 198. olfactory sacs. — Minute sacs in the nasal cavities; the seat of the sense of 196, 198. GLOSSARY-INDEX 411 omosternum (Gr. omos = shoulder + sternon = the chest). — A bit of cartilage forming the front of the sternum in the frog, 182. ontogeny (Gr. ont = being + -geneia = a producing). — Development from the egg, 19, 290. oocyte (Gr. oon = egg + cytos). — An egg before maturation, 252. oogenesis (Gr. oon = an egg + genesis = creation). — The development of the egg in the ovary, 252. oogonium (Gr. oon = an egg + gonos = offspring). — A sac in some plants within which are produced one or two eggs. operculum. — A lid-like cover. optic lobes. — The section of the brain in front of the cerebellum; the mid- brain, 193. optic nerve. — The second cerebral nerve, supplying the eye, 194, 196. optimum temperature, 132. oral. — Pertaining to the mouth, 60. order. — A group of similar families, 372. organ. — Any part of an animal or plant adapted for a specific function; usually made of a combination of several different tissues, 26, 95. organic evolution, 349. organic substances.— Substances originally derived from organisms, 26; in chemistry, any compounds of carbon. organism. — A living being provided with organs; hence any living being, 26. organisms as machines, 298. origin. — The attachment of a muscle nearest the center of the body, 184. Oscittaria, 136, 219. osmosis. — The force that causes some substances to diffuse through mem- branes which are moistened on both sides; dialysis, 127, 307. ossification. — Turning to bone. osteoblast (Gr. osteon = a bone + blastos = a sprout). — A bone-forming cell. otic. — Pertaining to the ear, 180. otocyst (Gr. ous = the ear + cystis = a sac). — A sac which in many invertebrates is supposed to have hearing functions. otoliths (Gr. ous = the ear -f lithos = a stone). — Calcareous bodies found in the otocysts in some animals. outgo, of an animal, 220; of a plant, 220. ova. — The female reproductive cells, 249, 267. ovary. — In animals the glands producing eggs, 151, 163, 200, 249; in flowers the lower part of the pistil containing the ovules and seeds, 120. overproduction, 353. oviducts. — Ducts for carrying eggs to the exterior, 163, 200, 249. 412 BIOLOGY oviparous animals.— Animals that lay eggs, 290. ovules. — The small bodies in the pistil that contain the macrospores and grow into the seed, 121. oxidation. — Union with oxygen, as in ordinary combustion, 55, 138. palatine bones, 180. paleontology (Gr. palaios = ancient + out = being + logos'). — The study of the distribution of organisms in the past ages by means of fossils, 383. palisade cells. — A layer of regular, chlorophyll cells, just beneath the upper epidermis in most leaves, 117. pallium.— See mantle. pancreas. — A digestive gland opening into the intestine just below the stomach, 187, 204. pancreatic fluid or juice. — The secretion of the pancreas, 204, 306. Pandorina, 73, 90, 263. papilla. — A small finger-like projection. parallel-veined leaves. — Those with veins running from base to tip, or from midrib to margin, in a roughly parallel course, 114. Paramecium, description of, 59. parasite. — An organism that lives upon and feeds upon a living host, 227. parasitism, effect of, 231. parasphenoid bones, 180. parenchyma (Gr. para = beside + enchein = to pour in). — Short, square- ended cells in plants, 106. parietal bones, 180. parotids. — • Salivary glands in front of the ear in some animals. parthenogenesis (Gr. parthenos = virgin + genesis = a creation). — Re- production by eggs which do not require fertilization, 246, 262, 265. PASTEUR, 14. PASTEUR'S solution, 83. patheticus. — The fourth cerebral nerve, supplying the eye muscles, 194. pathogenic (Gr. pathos = disease + -genie). — Disease producing, 82. pectoral. — Pertaining to the chest. pedal (Gr. pous = a foot). — Pertaining to the feet. peduncle. — The stalk supporting a flower, 118. pelagic (Lat. pelagus = the sea). — Pertaining to the open ocean. pelvis. — The girdle of bones attaching the legs to the spinal column, 182. Penicillium, 96. penis. — The male copulatory organ, 291. pepsin. — A ferment in the gastric juice. peptone. — A soluble form of proteid. peptonize. — To convert ordinary proteids into peptones. GLOSSARY-INDEX 413 Peranema, 75, 217. perennials (Lat. per = through + annus = year).— Plants living year after year. perfect flowers. — Those with both stamens and pistils, 121. perianth (Gr. peri = around + anthos = a flower). — A name given to the calyx and corolla combined, 119. pericardium (Gr. peri = around + cardia = the heart). — A sac surround- ing the heart, 187. perichondrium (Gr. peri = around + chondros = cartilage). — Fibrous ma- terial surrounding cartilage. peripheral system, 163. periosteum (Gr. peri = around + osteon = bone). — Fibrous material sur- rounding bone. peristalsis (Gr. peri = around + stellein = to place). — The writhing mo- tions of the intestine, 205. peritoneum (Gr. peri = around -f teinein = to stretch). — The membrane lining the abdominal cavity, 167, 171, 187. peritrichic (Gr. peri = around + thrix = hah-). — With flagella distributed over the body, 81. perivisceral fluid (Gr. peri = around + Lat. viscera). — See ccelomic fluid. pes. — The foot. petals. — Leaves which form the corolla, 119. petiole. — The stem of a leaf, 114. phagocytes (Gr. phagein = to eat + cytos = a sac). — Leucocytes with the power of absorbing solid objects, 205. phalanges. — -The bones of the fingers and toes, 182. phanerogams (Gr. phaneros = visible + gamos = marriage). — Plants which produce flowers, 103. pharynx. — The throat cavity, 158. phloem (Gr. phloios = inner bark). — The bark, 105. photosynthesis (Gr. phos = light + synthesis — composition). — The func- tion of starch making, possessed by green plants only, 129, 135, 218. phototropism (Gr. phos = light + trope = a turning). — Reaction to light, 58. phyla. — The largest subdivisions of animals and plants, 373. phytogeny (Gr. phylon = tribe + -geneia = a producing). — The past history of organisms, 290. physiology (Gr. physis = nature + -logia). — The study of the functions of the different animals and plants, 19. pia mater (Lat. piits = delicate + mater = mother). — A delicate mem- brane surrounding the brain and cord, inside the dura mater, 194. pigeons, 338, 414 BIOLOGY pigment cells (Lat. pingere = to paint). — Cells which contain coloring matter, 176. pineal gland. — A small body lying on top of the brain; also called the pineal eye; same as epiphysis, 193. pistil. — The central row of leaves (carpels) of a flower, bearing female re- productive organs; also called the gyncecium, 120. pith. — The central mass of cells in a stem, made of fundamental cells, 104. pituitary body. — A small body on the under side of the brain; the hypophy- sis, 193. placenta. — The membrane by which the embryo is attached to the uterus in mammals, 291; in plants, the line of attachment of seeds in the ovary, plankton (Gr. plankton = wandering). — The living organisms which float in water, largely microscopic. plantigrade. — Walking on the palms of the hands or the soles of the feet, plasma. — The liquid portion of circulating blood, 191, 205. plasmodium (Gr. plasma = substance). — A jelly-like mass. Plasmodium malarice, 69, 239. plastids. — Miscellaneous bodies within a cell, 37. platelets. — Minute bodies in the blood of vertebrates, 192. pleura (Gr. pleura = a rib). — Membranes surrounding the lungs. . Pleurococcus, 77, 239. plexus (Lat. pleclare = to weave). — A network of nerves, 194. pneumogastric (Gr. pneumon = lung + gaster = stomach). — A large, cere- bral nerve extending down the neck and supplying the heart, lungs, and stomach, 194. Podocoryne, 277. poisons. — Substances which, taken into the body, produce injurious effects, 43. polar cells. — Small cells extruded from the egg during its maturation, 254. pollen. — The male spores produced by a flower, 119. pollen tube. — An outgrowth from a pollen grain which pushes through the style of a flower to fertilize the egg in the ovary, 122, 275. poll ex. — The thumb. pollination. — The transfer of the pollen to the stigma, 277. polygamous (Gr. polus = many + gamos = marriage). — The sexual asso- ciation of one male with several females, polymorphism (Gr. polus = many + morphe = form). — The property of having two or more forms of the same animal, 149. portal circulation. — The circulation of blood from the intestine through the liver; it has two capillary systems, 190. portal vein. — The vein carrying blood from the intestine to the liver, 190. GLOSSARY-INDEX 415 posterior end, 155. posterior root. — The branch of the spinal nerve entering on its posterior side and carrying impulses toward the brain, 195. posterior vena cava.— Same as inferior vena cava, 190. potential energy, 293. precoracoid, 182. predatory. — Living by preying upon other animals, premaxillary bones, 180. proboscis. — An elongated portion of the head of an animal, with special functions. process. — • Any small projection. procoelous (Gr. pro = before -f coilos = hollow). — Applied to vertebrae which are concave in front only, proctodaeum, 284. pronation. — The position of the fore arm with the palm downward, pronuclei. — • The two nuclei, male and female, which are in the matured egg, ready to unite with each other, 254, 257. prophase.— The preliminary stage in karyokinesis, 85. prostomium (Gr. pro = before + stoma = mouth). — The sensitive lobe projecting over the mouth in the earthworm, 156. protective resemblances. — Resemblances to objects, either animate or inanimate, for the purpose of protection; mimicry. proteids. — Highly complex compounds of carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen and some other elements; the basis of living tissues and a necessary part of animal foods, 7, 133. prothallium (Gr. pro = before + thallos = a branch). — The small, sexual stage of the life history of a fern, 271. protomitomic theory, 50. Protophyta (Gr. protos = first + phyton = plant). — The unicellular plants, 222. protoplasm (Gr. protos = first + plasma = substance) . — The living sub- stance of organisms, 29, 30, 40, 48. Protozoa (Gr. protos = first + zoon = animal). — The unicellular animals, 92, 222. proximal. — Nearest to the body. pseudonavicellae (Gr. pseudes = false + Lat. navicella = a boat).— Spin- dle-shaped spores formed by some Sporozoa as the result of the union of cells. pseudopodia (Gr. pseudes = false -f pous = foot).— Temporary lobes of protoplasm used in locomotion, 52. psychology (Gr. psyche = the soul + -logia). — The study of mind, 20. pterygoid bones, 180. 416 BIOLOGY ptyalin. — The enzyme in saliva which converts starch into sugar. pubis, 182. puffballs, 245. pulmonary arteries (Gr. pleumon = a lung). — Bloodvessels carrying blood to the lungs, 191. pulmonary circulation. — The circulation through the lungs, 191. pulmonary veins. — The blood vessels carrying blood from the lungs to the heart, 191. pupa. — • A stationary, inactive stage between a larva and an adult, 289. pupil. — An opening in the center of the iris allowing light to enter the eye, 197. putrefaction. — Decomposition of organic products, taking place without the presence of much oxygen, 81. pylorus. — The opening of the stomach into the intestine, 186. quadrate bones, 180. quadrato-jugal bones, 181. rabbit, skeleton of, 364. race variations. — Variations by which the race is gradually or suddenly modified, 338. racemose. — Arranged somewhat like a cluster of grapes, radiant heat. — Heat which is given off from a hot body into space, 297. radius, 182. ramus. — A branch. reaction. — A response to an external stimulus, 43. recapitulation theory. — See repetition. receptacle. — In botany, the end of the flower peduncle on which the floral leaves are borne, 118. recessive characters (Lat. recessus = receding). — Characters which fail to appear in a first generation, but may appear in later generations, 360. rectum. — The enlarged, posterior end of the intestine, 186. REDI, 12. reflex action. — An action produced by a stimulus passing to the central nervous system and there giving rise to stimuli which pass outward to the muscles, but without volition, 212. regeneration. — The redevelopment of parts that have been lost, 150. reintegrate. — To recombine compounds that have been disintegrated, renal. — Pertaining to the kidneys, renal portal vein. — A vein from the legs of the frog that breaks up into capillaries in the kidney, 191. repetition, law of. — The law that the development of animals repeats their past history, 290. GLOSSARY-INDEX 417 reproduction, 5, 45, 140, 238, 318, rate of. reproductive cells, 267. reproductive organs, 163, 199. reproductive system of Amoeba, 58; of bacteria, 81; of earthworm, 163; of Eudorina, 264; of frog, 214; of Hydra, 146, 151; of malarial Plasmo- dium, 71; of Monocystis, 241; of Pandorina, 74; of Paramecium, 63; of Penidllium, 98; of Ulothrix, 93; of yeast, 78. respiration. — The exchange of gases between organisms and their environ- ment, 56, 138, 160, 225; explained, 209, 312. reticular theory of protoplasm, 31. reticulum. — A network, 32. retina. — The sensitive part of the eye, 196, 197. rhizoids. — • Delicate hairs attaching some plants, like mosses, to the soil, 270. Ritinus communis, 103. rigor mortis (Lat. rigor = stiff + mors = 'death). — The stiffening that occurs after death, rivalries of organisms, 382. root cap. — A protective covering of hard cells over the tips of growing roots, 113. root hairs. — Delicate, single-celled absorption hairs, on the tips of roots of plants, 113. root pressure. — The pressure of sap in roots that forces sap up the stem, 127. root structure, 112. rudimentary organs. — Organs only imperfectly developed, rusts, 232. Saccharomyces, 78. saccule, 198. sacrum. — The fused vertebrae between the hip bones, salivary glands. — Glands secreting saliva, 204. saprophytes (Gr. sapros = rotten + phyton = a plant). — Plants which live upon the dead bodies of other organisms, 227. sarcode. — A name first given to the living contents of animal cells, 40. scapula, 182. SCHLEIDEN, 38. SCHULTZE, 40. SCHWANX, 38. sciatic plexus. — The network formed by the several spinal nerves which combine to form the sciatic nerve, 194. sclerenchyma (Gr. sderos = hard +enchyma = infusion). — Plant cells wiih thick, hard walls. 418 BIOLOGY sclerotic coat (Gr. sderos = hard). — The outer covering of the eyeball, 196: sea nettles. — See jelly fishes. sebaceous glands (Lat. sebum = fat). — Oil glands in the skin. secreting cells. — Cells which extract material from the blood and secrete special substances, 145, 161. secretions. — Materials eliminated by the glands and used by the body for some special purpose, e. g., gastric juice, seed. — A young plant surrounded by a shell and lying dormant; developed in higher plants only, for the purpose of distribution, 122. seedling. — The young plant in a seed, or just sprouting from a seed, 123. segmentation. — A term describing the division of the earthworm into segments, 155; the division of the egg into many cells in development (deavage), 280. segment. — The name applied to the rings of which a body like the earth- worm is composed; melameres, 155. segregation (Lat. segregare = to separate). — The grouping together of individuals which show resemblances, semicircular canals. — Canals in the inner ear, associated with the sense of equilibrium, 198. semilunar valves. — Valves at the beginning of the pulmonary arteries and the aorta, 310. seminal receptacles. — Sacs of the earthworm for holding the sperms re- ceived at copulation, 165. seminal vesicles. — Sacs in the earthworm for holding sperms before they are ejected during copulation, 164, 200. sensation. — A conscious feeling, produced in the brain as the result of impulses reaching it from the various sense organs, 212, 316. sensations in plants, 137. sense organs. — Organs at the outer ends of the nerves which are excited by external stimulation, 167, 172, 195, 212. sensitiveness. — Same as irritability, 219. sensitive plants. — Plants which respond quickly to touch by closing their leaves, 137. sepals. — The leaves which form the calyx, 119. septa. — Partitions separating chambers, especially in the earthworm, 157. serous. — Applied to glands secreting a thin, watery liquid, serous membranes. — Membranes lining the body cavity and thorax, serum. — The liquid part of the blood after the clot has separated, setae. — Minute bristles serving to aid the earthworm in locomotion, 167. sexual reproduction. — Reproduction by union of eggs and sperms, 71. 238, 240, 262; distribution of, 266. In earthworm, 163; in frog, 214; in Hydra, 151; in plants; origin of, 263; purpose of, 335. GLOSSARY-INDEX 419 sexual stage. — The stage in a metamorphosis in which sexual organs are produced. shell, of an egg, 250. shoulder girdle, 181. sieve cells. — • Large vessels in plants, with perforated partitions separating them from each other, 106. sinus. — Any irregular space or dilated blood vessel. skeleton, 139, 176. skin, 35, 176. skull, 180. sleep of plants, 137. smell. — See olfactory organs. sociology (Lat. sotius = a companion + Gr. -logia). — The study of the relations of organisms in forming societies, 20. somaplasm (Gr. soma = body + plasma = substance) . — The bit of the germ substance in the egg that is set aside in the developing egg to give rise to the new individual, 332. somatic (Gr. soma = body). — Pertaining to the body. sorus (plural, son). — A cluster of sporangia in the leaf of a fern, 269. SPALANZANI, 13. special creation theory, 350. specialization. — Adaptation to some special function. species. — The name given to a group of organisms essentially alike, 370. sperms. — The male cells in sexual reproduction, 250, 255, 267. spermaphytes. — Seed-bearing plants, phanerogams, 376. spermaries. — The glands that produce the sperms, 164, 199, 250. spermatocyte (Gr. sperma = seed + cytos = cell). — A cell in the spermary that is to break up to form sperms, 254. spermatogenesis (Gr. sperma = seed + genesis — creation) . — The devel- opment of the sperms, 254. spermatozoids. — A name sometimes given to the motile sperm-cells of plants, 271. spinal cord. — The part of the central nervous system of vertebrates extend- ing through the spinal column, 193. spinal nerves, 194. spindle, 86. spiracles. — Openings of gill chambers, as in tadpoles; also breathing pores of insects. spiral cells. — Cells of a fibrovascular bundle with their inner wall thickened to form a spiral thread, 106. spireme (Gr. spirema = a coil) . — A name applied to the chromatiu when it forms a thread, prior to division, 85. 420 BIOLOGY Spirogyra, 30. splanchnic. — Pertaining to the viscera. spleen. — A good-sized organ lying among the folds of the intestine, 187. spontaneity. — Power of producing movements from internal causes, 2. spontaneous generation. — The theory that life can arise in some other way than from previously existing life; abiogenesis, 10. sporangium (Gr. spora = a seed + angeion = a receptacle). — A sac within which spores are produced, 100, 270. spores (Gr. spora = a seed). — Single-celled reproductive bodies, capable of growing into a new plant without fertilization, 16, 59, 79, 81, 239, 267. sporoblast (Gr. spora = seed -f- blaslos = a germ). — A sac in which sporozoites are produced, 242. sporophyte (Gr. spora = seed + phyton = a plant). — The stage, in a plant with alternation of generations, that produces spores, 272, 274. Sporozoa, 241. sporozoites (Gr. spora = seed + zoon = animal). — Spores that result from the division of fused gametes, 241. squamosal bone, 180. stamens. — The modified leaves of a flower that produce pollen, 1 19. starch. — A carbohydrate with the general formula CeHioO.s, or some multiple of this, 8, 129, 134. stereome cells (Gr. stereos = a solid). — Cells in the bark with very thick walls, 106. stereotropism (Gr. stereos = a solid + trope = a turning). — Reaction to solid objects, 53. sterility. — Unfertility, or inability to produce offspring, or hybrids, 268. sterilize. — To treat an object so as to destroy all living things in it, 14, 17. sternum, 182. stigma. — The roughened surface on the end of a style, for the reception of pollen, 120. stimulus. — Any force applied to an organism which will produce a reaction, 43. stinging cells, 143. stipules, 114. stomach, 186. stomata (Gr. stoma = mouth). — Openings through the epidermis of plants through which gas enters and moisture evaporates, 116. stomodaeum, 284. strawberry plant, reproduction of, 244. CtLOSSARY-lNDEX 421 streaming of protoplasm. — The circulating motion of protoplasm within a cell, 32. struggle for existence, 353. style.— The projection on top of an ovary in a flower, 120. subspecies. — A subdivision of a species; sometimes called a variety, 371. sugar. — A carbohydrate with the general formula C6Hi2OG (monosac- charide) or Ci2H22On (disaccharide), 8, 132, 134. summer eggs. — Eggs produced in the summer which develop at once, 247. sundew, 224. sunlight, 131. supination. — Position of the forearm when the palm of the hand is upper- most. support, 139. supraoccipital bones, 180. survival of the fittest. — Same as natural selection, 353. suspensorium, 180. suture. — A jagged union between two bones, as in the skull. swarm spores. — Spores with flagella enabling them to swim; zoospores. 74. symbiosis (Gr. sun = together + bios = life) . — The living together of two organisms in close relations, which may be advantageous or dis- advantageous to each, 228. sympathetic system. — Two chains of nerve ganglia and nerves lying in the body cavity, parallel to the spinal cord, 195. symphysis. — A union of two bones in the median line of the body. syncytium (Gr. sun = together -f- cytos = cell). — A mass of living pro- toplasm with many nuclei but no cell boundaries; acellular, 89, 99. synovial glands. — Glands which secrete lubricating fluid into joints, 184. synthesis (Gr. sun = together + tithenai = to place). — The building of a compound out of simpler parts, 234. systematic zoology. — The study of organisms which gives attention to classification and naming of species. systemic circulation. — That part of the circulation which includes the vessels that supply all the body except the lungs, 191. systole (Gr. systole = contraction). — The period of contraction of the heart, 188. tactile. — Pertaining to touch. tadpole, 288. tarsals, 182. taste, 198. taxonomy (Gr. taxis = arrangement + nemein = to arrange). — The study of the classification of organisms, 19. 422 BIOLOGY telophase. — The last stage of karyokinesis, 87. tendons. — Bands of connective tissue binding muscles to bones, 185. tentacles. — • Appendages from an animal, usually motile, and serving as sensory and prehensile organs, 141. testis. — See spermary. thalamencephalon. — The small section of the brain behind the cerebrum, with the pineal gland on top of it, 193. thallophyte (Gr. thallos = a shoot + phyton = a plant). — A plant that does not show differentiation into root, stem, and leaf, 37.5. thallus (Gr. thallos = a shoot).— A flat leaf or branch, thermotropism (Gr. thermos = heat -f- trope = a turning) . — Reaction to temperature, 57. thigmotropism (Gr. thigma = touch + trope = a turning) . — Reaction to mechanical stimulation, 57. thoracic duct. — The large lymph duct in mammals, carrying lymph from the lower parts of the body to the veins in the neck, 209. thymus. — A ductless gland in the neck, especially prominent in the young, thyroid gland. — A ductless gland in the neck below the larynx, tibia, 182. tissue (Lat. texere = to weave). — A collection of similar cells in a multi- cellular animal, 27, 95. tongue, 185. tonsils. — Two ductless glands in the back part of the mouth. ' touch, 198. touch corpuscles. — End organs of touch, trachea (Gr. trachea = windpipe). — The air passage from the lungs; the windpipe, 209. tracheids. — The thick-walled wood cells with tapering ends, found in fibro- vascular bundles, 105. transformation of energy, 296. transpiration. — The evaporation of water through the leaves, transverse processes (Lat. trans = across + vertere = to turn). — Lateral projections from the vertebrae, 177. Trichina, 231. trichocysts, 61. tricuspid valve. — The valve between the right auricle and ventricle, trigeminal. — The fifth cerebral nerve, supplying the sides of the head with sensations, 194. trypsin. — A ferment found in pancreatic juice, digesting proteids. tubercles. — Knob-like growths, usually indications of disease, tuberculosis, 231, 232. turgor. — The pressure of liquids within the cells of plants. GLOSSARY-INDEX 42? tympanic membrane (Gr. tympanum = a drum). — The membrane cover- ing the ear cavity and serving to collect the air waves, 175, 197. tympanum (Gr. tympanum = a drum). — The cavity of the middle ear, 197. TYNDALL, 14. typhlosole (Gr. typhlos = blind + solen = a tube). — A cylindrical rod ex- tending through the intestine of the earthworm, 158. typhoid fever, 232. ulna, 182. Ulothrix, 93, 136. unicellular organisms. — Organisms made of single cells, or of colonies of similar cells, each of which can carry on all the functions of life, 52, 90. unit characters. — Characters that are inherited as units, 359. urea. — -An excretion from animals containing the nitrogen waste (CH4N2O), 210. ureter. — The duct carrying urine from the kidney to the bladder, 199. urethra. — The duct carrying the urine from the bladder to the exterior, 199. urogenital organs (Gr. ouron = urine + Lat. gemtalis = genital). — The ex- cretory and sexual organs, which, in vertebrates, are united, 201. urostyle (Gr. oura = tail -f- stylos = a pillar). — The single bone in the frog which represents the tail, 177. use and disuse, LAMARCK'S theory of, 351. uterus. — • A chamber in the oviduct where the eggs are stored, or in mam- mals where the embryo develops, 200, 291. vacuoles (Lat. vacuum = a cavity).— Spaces inside the body of cells, usually filled with a clear liquid, 37. vagus. — • A branch of the pneumogastric nerve extending to the heart. valves. — Membranous folds in the vessels or in the heart, which allow liquid to flow only in one direction, 188. variability. — The quality of showing variations. variations. — • Slight differences between animals of the same species, 261, 327. varieties. — See subspecies. vasa deferentia (Lat. vasa = vessel + deferens = carrying down). — The ducts that carry sperms from the spermary to the exterior, 164, 250. vasa efferentia (Lat. vasa = vessel + efferens = carrying to). — The ducts carrying sperms from the sperm aries to the kidney in the frog. vegetative functions. — Those possessed by vegetables as well as animals, Associated with alimentation and reproduction, 217. 424 BIOLOGY veins. — Blood vessels worrying blood to the heart, 190; the fibrovascular bundles in a leaf, 114. vent. — See anus. ventral side, 155. ventral cord. — The nerve cord on the ventral side of the body cavity of the earthworm and some other animals, 163, 171. ventricle (Lat. venter = stomach). — The lower chamber of the heart that forces blood into the arteries, 188. venus sinus. — A large blood vessel on the dorsal side of the heart of a frog into which the venus blood collects before passing into the right auricle, 188. vertebrae. — The separate bones of the backbone or spinal column, 177. Vertebrata. — Animals which possess a backbone or its equivalent, 176, 373. vesicle. — A sac. vessel (Lat. vasa = a vessel). — Any hollow tube or cavity, 105. vestigial organs. — Functionless remains of organs, formerly larger and functional, villi. — Projections on the inside of the intestine which serve to absorb food, 308. viola, 372. viscera. — The organs of the abdominal cavity, 175. vital energy, or vitality, 41, 309, 319. vitalistic theories. — The theories that regard life as a distinct force, 323. vitelline membrane (Lat. vitellus = yolk). — A cell wall of an ovum, 249. vitreous humor (Lat. vitrum = glass). — The transparent liquid back of the lens and filling the eyeball, 197. viviparous. — Producing young alive, 290. vocal cords. — The membranes in the larynx whose vibration produces the voice, 209. vomers, 180. VON MOHL, 40. Vorticella, 91. warm-blooded. — With blood that always maintains an equable tempera- ture. WEISMANN, 328, 355. wilts, 232. winter eggs. — Eggs of certain animals, designed to live over winter, usually requiring fertilization, in distinction from summer eggs which do not, 247. Wolffian body. — The primitive kidney found in the vertebrate embryo, wood. — Same as xylem. GLOSSARY-INDEX 425 worker bees. — Female bees whose sexual organs do not mature, and who perform the work of the colony, xerophytes (Gr. xeros = dry -f phyton = a plant). — Plants inhabiting very dry regions, xylem (Gr. xylon = wood). — The layers of hard woody cells inside the cambium layer in exogenous stems; the wood, 105. yeast, 78, 235. yolk. — The food material deposited in an egg for the nourishment of the developing embryo, 250. zooid (Gr. zoon = an animal) . — A more or less independent member of a compound organism, like a hydroid, 148. zobspore (Gr. zoon = an animal + spora) . — Spores which swim by the agency of motile flagella or cilia, 93, 136. Zoothamnium, 92. zygapophyses. — Articular processes in vertebrae, 177. zygospore (Gr. zygon = a yoke -f spora) . — A spore formed by the union of two gametes, 94, 262. zygote (Gr. zygon = a yoke). — A cell formed from the union of two other? in sexual reproduction; a zygospore, 94, 262. zymogenic. — Giving rise to fermentations. 14 DAY USE RETURN TO DESK FROM WED This book is due on the last date stamped below, or on the date to which renewed. Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. trcr T 2 8 ',368 ISSf. F General Library 544523 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY